00392311-Installation Guide(V100R007_02,Mini).pdf

HUAWEI UMG8900

V100R007

Installation Guide

Issue 02

Date 2009-01-09

Part Number 000392311

Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For anyassistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2009. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

http://www.huawei.com

mailto:[email protected]

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................1

1 Installation Procedure...............................................................................................................1-11.1 Hardware Installation Procedure.....................................................................................................................1-21.2 Hardware Installation Steps............................................................................................................................1-31.3 Precautions......................................................................................................................................................1-3

2 Installation Preparations...........................................................................................................2-12.1 Preparing Documents......................................................................................................................................2-22.2 Requirements for Construction Engineers......................................................................................................2-22.3 Preparing Installation Tools............................................................................................................................2-22.4 Checking Environment....................................................................................................................................2-7

2.4.1 Checking Building Conditions of Equipment Rooms............................................................................2-82.4.2 Checking Environment Conditions........................................................................................................2-82.4.3 Checking Power Supply Conditions......................................................................................................2-82.4.4 Checking Grounding Conditions............................................................................................................2-82.4.5 Checking the Lightning Protection System............................................................................................2-92.4.6 Requirements for DDFs/ODFs...............................................................................................................2-92.4.7 Optical Transmission Devices................................................................................................................2-92.4.8 Distribution Requirements for Terminals and Alarm Boxes.................................................................2-9

3 Unpacking and Inspection.......................................................................................................3-13.1 Inspecting Packages........................................................................................................................................3-23.2 Unpacking.......................................................................................................................................................3-2

3.2.1 Unpacking Wooden Crates.....................................................................................................................3-23.2.2 Unpacking Cartons.................................................................................................................................3-63.2.3 Unpacking Boards..................................................................................................................................3-7

3.3 Inspection........................................................................................................................................................3-8

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive Floor................................4-14.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions.....................................................................................................4-54.2 Removing Package Accessories......................................................................................................................4-54.3 Positioning Supports.......................................................................................................................................4-54.4 Installing Expansion Bolts............................................................................................................................4-114.5 Installing Supports.........................................................................................................................................4-154.6 Installing Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive Floor.........................................................................................4-20

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide Contents

Issue 02 (2009-01-09) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

4.7 Attaching the Cabinets..................................................................................................................................4-27

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive Floor...........................5-15.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions.....................................................................................................5-55.2 Removing Package Accessories......................................................................................................................5-55.3 Positioning Supports.......................................................................................................................................5-85.4 Installing Expansion Bolts............................................................................................................................5-115.5 Installing Supports.........................................................................................................................................5-155.6 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive Floor........................................................5-195.7 Attaching the Cabinets..................................................................................................................................5-24

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor.............................................. 6-16.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions.....................................................................................................6-56.2 Removing Package Accessories......................................................................................................................6-56.3 Positioning Cabinets........................................................................................................................................6-56.4 Installing Expansion Bolts............................................................................................................................6-116.5 Fixing Cabinets on the Cement Floor...........................................................................................................6-156.6 Attaching the Cabinets..................................................................................................................................6-21

7 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor..........................................7-17.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions.....................................................................................................7-67.2 Removing the Grounding Cables and Cabinet Doors.....................................................................................7-67.3 Installing Expansion Bolts..............................................................................................................................7-97.4 Attaching the Cabinets..................................................................................................................................7-13

8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets..................................................8-18.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions.....................................................................................................8-38.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables...........................................................................................8-38.3 Cabling Mode of Power Cables......................................................................................................................8-48.4 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables Between Cabinets and DC Power Distribution Cabinets.......8-78.5 Connecting Interconnected PGND Cables Between Cabinets......................................................................8-14

9 Installing Internal Components..............................................................................................9-19.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions.....................................................................................................9-29.2 Installing SSM Frames....................................................................................................................................9-39.3 Installing Boards in SSM Frames....................................................................................................................9-49.4 Installing Boards in the UA Frames................................................................................................................9-6

10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components....................10-110.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions.................................................................................................10-310.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of Internal Components in Front-Access Cabinets.......10-310.3 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of Internal Components in Rear-Access Cabinets........10-810.4 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for the SSM Frames.........................................................10-1210.5 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for the UA Frames............................................................10-1310.6 Connecting the PGND Cables and Power Cables of Low-Density UA Fan Frame..................................10-1610.7 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Monitoring Boxes.......................................................10-16

ContentsHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide

ii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

10.8 Connecting AC Power Cables...................................................................................................................10-18

11 Connecting Signal Cables....................................................................................................11-111.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions.................................................................................................11-411.2 Connecting Signal Cables.........................................................................................................................11-12

11.2.1 Connections of Monitoring Cables..................................................................................................11-1311.2.2 Connections of UAM Cables...........................................................................................................11-1611.2.3 Connections of Internal Cables in UA Frames.................................................................................11-33

11.3 Connecting Monitoring Cables.................................................................................................................11-3811.4 Connecting Trunk Cables..........................................................................................................................11-38

11.4.1 Connecting E1/T1 Cables in the SSM Frame..................................................................................11-3911.4.2 Connecting E1/T1 Cables in the UA Frame.....................................................................................11-4011.4.3 Connecting Tailor-Made Internal Trunk Cables Between the SSM-4 Frame and the UA Frame...11-4111.4.4 Connecting Internal HW Trunk Cables in the UA Frame................................................................11-4211.4.5 Connecting E3/T3 Trunk Cables......................................................................................................11-42

11.5 Connecting Signal Cables of Access Service in the UA Frame................................................................11-4311.5.1 Connecting POTS Subscriber Cables...............................................................................................11-4311.5.2 Connecting ATI Subscriber Cables..................................................................................................11-4311.5.3 Connecting SDL Subscriber Cables and Trunk Cables...................................................................11-4411.5.4 Connecting HSL Subscriber Cables.................................................................................................11-44

11.6 Connecting BITS Clock Cables................................................................................................................11-4411.7 Connecting Service Bearer Network Cables.............................................................................................11-4511.8 Connecting Service Bearer Optical Fibers................................................................................................11-47

12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinet Fittings...................................................................12-112.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions.................................................................................................12-212.2 Introduction to Fittings of Cabinet Doors...................................................................................................12-212.3 Installing Door Lintels................................................................................................................................12-312.4 Installing Cabinet Side Panels.....................................................................................................................12-412.5 Installing Front and Back Doors.................................................................................................................12-412.6 Connecting PGND Cables for Cabinet Doors.............................................................................................12-712.7 Recovering the ESD-Preventive Floor......................................................................................................12-11

13 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Fittings...............................................................13-113.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions.................................................................................................13-213.2 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Side Panels....................................................................................13-213.3 Installing Front and Rear Doors of Normalized N66-22 Cabinets..............................................................13-313.4 Connecting PGND Cables for Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Doors............................................................13-513.5 Recovering the ESD-Preventive Floor........................................................................................................13-8

14 Installing Peripherals............................................................................................................14-114.1 Installation Specifications and Precautions.................................................................................................14-214.2 Installing Terminals.....................................................................................................................................14-214.3 Installing Alarm Boxes................................................................................................................................14-3

15 Checking Installation............................................................................................................15-1



iii

15.1 Checking Specifications and Precautions...................................................................................................15-315.2 Checking Cabinet Installation.....................................................................................................................15-315.3 Checking Connections of PGND Cables and Power Cables.......................................................................15-315.4 Checking Connection of Signal Cables.......................................................................................................15-415.5 Checking Installation of Connectors and Sockets.......................................................................................15-415.6 Checking Installation of Peripherals...........................................................................................................15-415.7 Checking Installation of Other Components...............................................................................................15-515.8 Checking the Power Supply........................................................................................................................15-5

15.8.1 Checking the Power Supply to Cabinets............................................................................................15-615.8.2 Checking the Power Supply to Frames..............................................................................................15-715.8.3 Checking the Power Supply to Boards and Running State................................................................15-7

16 Installing LMT Software......................................................................................................16-116.1 Installation Procedure..................................................................................................................................16-316.2 Preparation for LMT Software Installation.................................................................................................16-316.3 Installing LMT Software.............................................................................................................................16-516.4 Checking Installation.................................................................................................................................16-10

16.4.1 Checking System Components.........................................................................................................16-1016.4.2 Checking Software Versions............................................................................................................16-1116.4.3 Checking Running Status of LMT Service Manager.......................................................................16-12

16.5 Uninstalling LMT Software......................................................................................................................16-13

17 Loading Host Software..........................................................................................................17-117.1 Loading Procedure......................................................................................................................................17-217.2 Software Loading Preparation.....................................................................................................................17-2

17.2.1 System Hardware Preparation............................................................................................................17-317.2.2 System Software Preparation.............................................................................................................17-417.2.3 Configuring MML Batch Files...........................................................................................................17-417.2.4 Setting FTP Server.............................................................................................................................17-517.2.5 Setting the HyperTerminal...............................................................................................................17-1117.2.6 Configuring IP address on OMC Interface......................................................................................17-1517.2.7 Configuring LMT Office Direction..................................................................................................17-1617.2.8 Modifying MML Timeout Settings..................................................................................................17-17

17.3 Loading Host Software..............................................................................................................................17-1817.4 Loading the License File...........................................................................................................................17-1817.5 Loading Tone Files Dynamically..............................................................................................................17-1917.6 Loading PV8 Software..............................................................................................................................17-2117.7 Loading RSP Software..............................................................................................................................17-2517.8 Checking Loading Result..........................................................................................................................17-2617.9 Problems Handling....................................................................................................................................17-28

17.9.1 No Display on Serial Port Console After System Starts up.............................................................17-2817.9.2 Illegible Characters Displayed on Serial Port Console After System Starts up...............................17-2917.9.3 Normal Display After System Starts up but Command Input Failure.............................................17-2917.9.4 Communication Failure Between the UMG8900 and the FTP Serve on LMT...............................17-29


Installation Guide

iv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

17.9.5 OMU Board Startup Failure.............................................................................................................17-3117.9.6 Loading Failure of Other Boards.....................................................................................................17-3117.9.7 UMG8900 Host Software Incorrectly Uploaded to the OMU Hard Disk........................................17-3217.9.8 Using File Uploading Command of Loading Management Wrongly..............................................17-3217.9.9 Using Unmatched Version...............................................................................................................17-3217.9.10 Failing to Recover Configuration Data After System Restarts up.................................................17-33

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System.......................................................................18-118.1 Installation Procedure..................................................................................................................................18-318.2 Installing the Modem..................................................................................................................................18-318.3 Installing the Remote Access Server...........................................................................................................18-618.4 Adding Dial-up Users................................................................................................................................18-1718.5 Checking the Remote Maintenance System..............................................................................................18-20

18.5.1 Checking Modem.............................................................................................................................18-2018.5.2 Checking Remote Access Server.....................................................................................................18-21

19 Loading OMU Software Manually.....................................................................................19-119.1 Loading Procedure......................................................................................................................................19-219.2 Software Loading Preparation.....................................................................................................................19-3

19.2.1 System Hardware Preparation............................................................................................................19-319.2.2 System Software Preparation.............................................................................................................19-3

19.3 Software Loading Procedure.......................................................................................................................19-4

A Mounting Cabling Racks........................................................................................................A-1A.1 Introduction to Cabling Racks.......................................................................................................................A-3A.2 Mounting Indoor Cabling Racks...................................................................................................................A-4A.3 Mounting Outdoor Cabling Racks.................................................................................................................A-9A.4 Mounting Cabling Ladders..........................................................................................................................A-12A.5 Mounting Cabling Troughs.........................................................................................................................A-17A.6 Mounting Accessories.................................................................................................................................A-21

B Assembling Cable Connectors...............................................................................................B-1B.1 Assembling Power Cable Connectors............................................................................................................B-2

B.1.1 Cutting Power Cables...........................................................................................................................B-2B.1.2 Mounting Heat-Shrinkable Tubes.........................................................................................................B-3B.1.3 Stripping Power Cables.........................................................................................................................B-3B.1.4 Crimping Power Cable Connectors......................................................................................................B-5B.1.5 Shrinking Heat-Shrinkable Tubes of Power Cable Connectors............................................................B-7B.1.6 Checking Power Cable Connectors......................................................................................................B-8

B.2 Assembling RJ45 Connectors........................................................................................................................B-9B.2.1 Stripping Network Cables...................................................................................................................B-10B.2.2 Inserting Network Cables...................................................................................................................B-12B.2.3 Crimping RJ45 Connectors.................................................................................................................B-16B.2.4 Inspecting RJ45 Connectors...............................................................................................................B-17

B.3 Assembling RJ48 Connectors of Twisted Pair Trunk Cables......................................................................B-17



v

B.3.1 Stripping Twisted Pair Trunk Cables..................................................................................................B-18B.3.2 Inserting Twisted Pair Trunk Cables..................................................................................................B-20B.3.3 Crimping RJ48 Connectors.................................................................................................................B-21B.3.4 Inspecting RJ48 Connectors...............................................................................................................B-22

B.4 Assembling SMB Connectors......................................................................................................................B-22B.4.1 Mounting Heat-Shrinkable Tubes and Crimping Sleeves..................................................................B-23B.4.2 Stripping Trunk Signal Cables............................................................................................................B-24B.4.3 Welding Pins of SMB Connectors......................................................................................................B-25B.4.4 Crimping SMB Connectors.................................................................................................................B-25B.4.5 Shrinking Heat-Shrinkable Tubes of SMB Connectors......................................................................B-26B.4.6 Inspecting SMB Connectors...............................................................................................................B-27

C Introduction to Engineering Labels......................................................................................C-1C.1 Description of Labels.....................................................................................................................................C-2C.2 Engineering Labels for External Cables of Alarm Boxes..............................................................................C-9C.3 Engineering Labels for Network Cables......................................................................................................C-10C.4 Engineering Labels for Optical Fibers.........................................................................................................C-11C.5 Engineering Labels for Trunk Cables..........................................................................................................C-13C.6 Engineering Labels for Power Cables..........................................................................................................C-16

D Introduction to File System Directory.................................................................................D-1D.1 Introduction to the LMT File Directory........................................................................................................D-2D.2 Introduction to BAM File Directory..............................................................................................................D-2D.3 Introduction to Configuration Files...............................................................................................................D-4

D.3.1 Description of Main Version................................................................................................................D-4D.3.2 Description of Board Software.............................................................................................................D-5

D.4 Introduction to Higher Layer Software of Boards.........................................................................................D-7

E Requirements for Device Running Environment...............................................................E-1E.1 Requirements for Equipment Room Location................................................................................................E-2E.2 Requirements for Equipment Room Construction.........................................................................................E-2E.3 Requirements for Temperature and Humidity................................................................................................E-4E.4 Requirements for Indoor Sanitation...............................................................................................................E-5E.5 Requirements for Erosive Gas Condition.......................................................................................................E-5E.6 Requirements for Electromagnetic Environment...........................................................................................E-6E.7 Requirements for ESD Prevention.................................................................................................................E-6E.8 Requirements for Lightning Protection Grounding........................................................................................E-7E.9 Requirements for Power Supply.....................................................................................................................E-9


Installation Guide

vi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figures

Figure 1-1 Hardware installation procedure.........................................................................................................1-2Figure 3-1 Moving the wooden crate with a fork truck........................................................................................3-3Figure 3-2 Straightening tongues (1)....................................................................................................................3-4Figure 3-3 Straightening tongues (2)....................................................................................................................3-4Figure 3-4 Straightening tongues (3)....................................................................................................................3-4Figure 3-5 Lifting and removing covers...............................................................................................................3-5Figure 3-6 Removing surrounded wooden boards...............................................................................................3-6Figure 3-7 Unpacking cartons..............................................................................................................................3-7Figure 4-1 Installation procedure.........................................................................................................................4-2Figure 4-2 Cabinet after installation.....................................................................................................................4-3Figure 4-3 Line drawing template (for installation on the ESD-preventive floor-unit: mm)...............................4-7Figure 4-4 Mounting holes of the supports for a single cabinet (unit: mm).........................................................4-8Figure 4-5 Mounting holes of supports for multiple cabinets in a row (unit: mm)..............................................4-9Figure 4-6 Mounting holes of the supports for a single cabinet (unit: mm).........................................................4-9Figure 4-7 Mounting holes of supports for multiple cabinets in a row (unit: mm)............................................4-10Figure 4-8 Mounting holes of supports for back-to-back cabinets in two rows (unit: mm)..............................4-10Figure 4-9 Method for drilling a hole.................................................................................................................4-12Figure 4-10 Drilling a hole.................................................................................................................................4-12Figure 4-11 Components of the expansion bolts................................................................................................4-13Figure 4-12 Installation of the expansion tube and the expansion nut (1).........................................................4-14Figure 4-13 Installation of the expansion tube and the expansion nut (2).........................................................4-14Figure 4-14 Installed expansion bolts................................................................................................................4-15Figure 4-15 Adjusting the support......................................................................................................................4-16Figure 4-16 Assembling supports and guide rails..............................................................................................4-17Figure 4-17 Positions of supports.......................................................................................................................4-18Figure 4-18 Fixing supports...............................................................................................................................4-18Figure 4-19 Installing the holder fixing components.........................................................................................4-20Figure 4-20 Disassembling plastic coverings.....................................................................................................4-22Figure 4-21 Fixing cabinets................................................................................................................................4-23Figure 4-22 Leveling cabinets (1)......................................................................................................................4-24Figure 4-23 Leveling cabinets (2)......................................................................................................................4-25Figure 4-24 Testing the insulation......................................................................................................................4-26Figure 4-25 Installing plastic coverings.............................................................................................................4-27

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide Figures


vii

Figure 4-26 Connecting plates between cabinets...............................................................................................4-28Figure 4-27 Installing connecting plates for combined cabinets........................................................................4-28Figure 4-28 Installing connecting plates for multiple H66-22 cabinets in back-to-back way...........................4-29Figure 5-1 Installation procedure.........................................................................................................................5-2Figure 5-2 A single cabinet installed on an ESD-Preventive floor......................................................................5-3Figure 5-3 Several cabinets installed on an ESD-Preventive floor......................................................................5-3Figure 5-4 Removing the packing accessories.....................................................................................................5-6Figure 5-5 Removing the cabinet doors...............................................................................................................5-6Figure 5-6 Placing the cabinet doors....................................................................................................................5-7Figure 5-7 Line drawing template for installation on the ESD-preventive floor (unit: mm)...............................5-9Figure 5-8 Installing the side-by-side line drawing template for installation on the ESD-preventive floor (unit:mm).......................................................................................................................................................................5-9Figure 5-9 Mounting holes of supports for a single cabinet (unit: mm)............................................................5-10Figure 5-10 Mounting holes of supports for multiple cabinets in a row (unit: mm)..........................................5-10Figure 5-11 Mounting holes of supports for back-to-back cabinets in two rows (unit: mm)............................5-11Figure 5-12 Settling the drill bit.........................................................................................................................5-12Figure 5-13 Drilling holes..................................................................................................................................5-13Figure 5-14 Components of the expansion bolts................................................................................................5-14Figure 5-15 Installing the expansion tube..........................................................................................................5-14Figure 5-16 Unscrewing the bolt and accessories..............................................................................................5-15Figure 5-17 Installed expansion bolts................................................................................................................5-15Figure 5-18 Tightening the assembly screws.....................................................................................................5-16Figure 5-19 Installing slide rails.........................................................................................................................5-17Figure 5-20 Level and fix the supports of a single cabinet................................................................................5-18Figure 5-21 Appearance of the insulation plate.................................................................................................5-19Figure 5-22 Positions of supports.......................................................................................................................5-19Figure 5-23 Removing the Air Filter..................................................................................................................5-20Figure 5-24 Placing the cabinet..........................................................................................................................5-21Figure 5-25 Leveling the cabinet........................................................................................................................5-22Figure 5-26 Testing the insulation of the cabinet...............................................................................................5-23Figure 5-27 Restoring the Air Filter...................................................................................................................5-24Figure 5-28 Installing the connecting plates......................................................................................................5-25Figure 5-29 Leveling the combined cabinets.....................................................................................................5-25Figure 6-1 Installation procedure.........................................................................................................................6-2Figure 6-2 Installed cabinets................................................................................................................................6-3Figure 6-3 Line drawing template (unit: mm)......................................................................................................6-7Figure 6-4 Picture of line drawing template.........................................................................................................6-8Figure 6-5 Hole positions for installing a single cabinet (unit: mm)...................................................................6-8Figure 6-6 Hole positions for installing cabinets in a row (unit: mm).................................................................6-9Figure 6-7 Hole positions for installing a single cabinet (unit: mm)...................................................................6-9Figure 6-8 Hole positions for installing cabinets in a row (unit: mm)...............................................................6-10Figure 6-9 Hole positions for installing back-to-back cabinets in a row (unit: mm).........................................6-10Figure 6-10 Method for drilling a hole...............................................................................................................6-12

FiguresHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide

viii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 6-11 Drilling a hole.................................................................................................................................6-12Figure 6-12 Components of the expansion bolts................................................................................................6-13Figure 6-13 Installation of the expansion tube and the expansion nut (1).........................................................6-14Figure 6-14 Installation of the expansion tube and the expansion nut (2).........................................................6-14Figure 6-15 Installed expansion bolts................................................................................................................6-15Figure 6-16 Disassembling plastic coverings.....................................................................................................6-16Figure 6-17 Fixing cabinets on the cement floor...............................................................................................6-17Figure 6-18 Leveling cabinets (1)......................................................................................................................6-18Figure 6-19 Leveling cabinets (2)......................................................................................................................6-19Figure 6-20 Testing the insulation......................................................................................................................6-20Figure 6-21 Installing plastic coverings.............................................................................................................6-21Figure 6-22 Connecting plates between cabinets...............................................................................................6-22Figure 6-23 Installing connecting plates for combined cabinets........................................................................6-23Figure 6-24 Installing connecting plates for multiple H66-22 cabinets in back-to-back way...........................6-24Figure 7-1 Installation procedure.........................................................................................................................7-2Figure 7-2 A single cabinet installed on a concrete floor.....................................................................................7-3Figure 7-3 Several cabinets installed on a concrete floor.....................................................................................7-4Figure 7-4 Removing the grounding cables.........................................................................................................7-7Figure 7-5 Removing the doors of the rear access cabinet...................................................................................7-7Figure 7-6 Removing the doors of the front access cabinet.................................................................................7-8Figure 7-7 Removing the side panels...................................................................................................................7-9Figure 7-8 Settling the drill bit...........................................................................................................................7-10Figure 7-9 Drilling holes....................................................................................................................................7-11Figure 7-10 Components of the expansion bolts................................................................................................7-12Figure 7-11 Installing the expansion tube..........................................................................................................7-12Figure 7-12 Unscrewing the bolt and accessories..............................................................................................7-13Figure 7-13 Installed expansion bolts................................................................................................................7-13Figure 7-14 Installing the connecting plates......................................................................................................7-14Figure 7-15 Leveling the combined cabinets.....................................................................................................7-15Figure 8-1 Connection procedure.........................................................................................................................8-1Figure 8-2 Cable distribution in the DC power distribution cabinets and the cabinets of the UMG8900...........8-4Figure 8-3 Overhead cabling mode on the power distribution cabinet side.........................................................8-5Figure 8-4 Underfloor cabling mode on the power distribution cabinet side.......................................................8-6Figure 8-5 Connections of the OT terminals........................................................................................................8-7Figure 8-6 Wiring terminals in the power distribution cabinet............................................................................8-9Figure 8-7 Overhead cabling of the DC power distribution cabinet (1).............................................................8-10Figure 8-8 Overhead cabling of the DC power distribution cabinet (2).............................................................8-11Figure 8-9 Terminal positions of the PGND cables...........................................................................................8-12Figure 8-10 RTN connections (at the power distribution cabinet side).............................................................8-13Figure 8-11 –48 V terminals at the power distribution cabinet side..................................................................8-13Figure 8-12 Cascading the equipotential grounding cables...............................................................................8-15Figure 9-1 Wearing an ESD-preventive wrist strap correctly..............................................................................9-2



ix

Figure 9-2 Installing SSM frames........................................................................................................................9-4Figure 9-3 Installing boards.................................................................................................................................9-6Figure 9-4 Panels..................................................................................................................................................9-7Figure 10-1 Connections of power cables between components and front-access PDFs in TG-only application.............................................................................................................................................................................10-4Figure 10-2 Connections of power cables between components and front-access PDFs in low-density AGapplication...........................................................................................................................................................10-5Figure 10-3 Connections of power cables between components and front-access PDFs in high-density AGapplication...........................................................................................................................................................10-7Figure 10-4 Connections of power cables between components and rear-access PDFs....................................10-9Figure 10-5 Connections of power cables between components and rear-access PDFs in high-density application...........................................................................................................................................................................10-11Figure 10-6 Connections of the PGND cables in the SSM frames..................................................................10-13Figure 10-7 Connections of the PGND cables of the UA frames in the rear-access cabinet...........................10-15Figure 10-8 Connections of PGND cables of the environment monitoring box in the rear-access cabinet.....10-18Figure 10-9 Position of the AC power supply module.....................................................................................10-19Figure 10-10 Appearance of the AC power supply module.............................................................................10-19Figure 11-1 Connection Procedure.....................................................................................................................11-2Figure 11-2 Cabling holes at the top and bottom of the N68-22 cabinet...........................................................11-4Figure 11-3 Cabling holes at the top and bottom of the N68E-22 cabinet.........................................................11-5Figure 11-4 Overhead cabling mode..................................................................................................................11-6Figure 11-5 Downward cable ladder..................................................................................................................11-6Figure 11-6 Layout of cables on the cabling rack..............................................................................................11-7Figure 11-7 Underfloor cabling mode................................................................................................................11-8Figure 11-8 Cabling along the lower enclosure frame.......................................................................................11-9Figure 11-9 Cable ties inside the wire bushing................................................................................................11-10Figure 11-10 Method for trimming the cable tie..............................................................................................11-11Figure 11-11 Trimmed cable tie.......................................................................................................................11-11Figure 11-12 Fixing the cable tie on the signal cable.......................................................................................11-12Figure 11-13 Connections of monitoring cables for environment monitoring boxes in front-access cabinets in TG-only application.................................................................................................................................................11-13Figure 11-14 Connections of monitoring cables for environment monitoring boxes in front-access cabinets in low-density AG application......................................................................................................................................11-14Figure 11-15 Connections of monitoring cables for environment monitoring boxes in front-access cabinets in high-density AG application......................................................................................................................................11-14Figure 11-16 Connections of monitoring cables for environment monitoring boxes in rear-access cabinets in low-density AG application......................................................................................................................................11-15Figure 11-17 Connections of monitoring cables for environment monitoring boxes in rear-access cabinets in high-density AG application......................................................................................................................................11-16Figure 11-18 UMG8900 structure....................................................................................................................11-17Figure 11-19 E1 interfaces on the MOMD......................................................................................................11-18Figure 11-20 E1 interfaces of the UAFM frame..............................................................................................11-19Figure 11-21 E1 interfaces of the RSP10 frame...............................................................................................11-20Figure 11-22 8 E1 Cables of Low-Density Frames in Front-Access Cabinets................................................11-21Figure 11-23 16 E1 Cables of Low-Density Frames in Front-Access Cabinets..............................................11-22


Installation Guide

x Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 11-24 8 E1 cables of low-density frames in rear-access cabinets.........................................................11-23Figure 11-25 16 E1 cables of low-density frames in rear-access cabinets.......................................................11-24Figure 11-26 Connecting trunk cables between the SSM-4 frame and HABD frame.....................................11-27Figure 11-27 Connecting trunk cables between the SSM-4 frame and HABA frame.....................................11-28Figure 11-28 Cascading between the UAFM main frame and UAFS subframe..............................................11-29Figure 11-29 Cascading between the RSP10 main frame and RSP14 subframe.............................................11-30Figure 11-30 HW cable with two connectors...................................................................................................11-31Figure 11-31 Connections of the HW cables between high-density UA frames in the front-access cabinet...11-32Figure 11-32 Connections of the HW cables between high-density UA frames in the rear-access cabinet....11-33Figure 11-33 Connections of test and alarm cables between three front-access UA frames...........................11-34Figure 11-34 Connections of test and alarm cables between two front-access UA frames.............................11-35Figure 11-35 Connections of test and alarm cables between high-density and front-access cabinets.............11-36Figure 11-36 Connections of test and alarm cables for rear-access UA cabinets............................................11-37Figure 11-37 Connections of LVDS cables.....................................................................................................11-38Figure 11-38 Connections of E1/T1 trunk cables............................................................................................11-39Figure 11-39 Connections of E1/T1 cables in the UAFM frame.....................................................................11-40Figure 11-40 Connections of E3/T3 trunk cables............................................................................................11-42Figure 11-41 Connections of BITS clock cables..............................................................................................11-45Figure 12-1 Fittings of cabinet door...................................................................................................................12-2Figure 12-2 Installing door lintels......................................................................................................................12-3Figure 12-3 Cabinets with top covers.................................................................................................................12-4Figure 12-4 Installing the front and back doors.................................................................................................12-5Figure 12-5 Installing the bottom of front and back doors.................................................................................12-6Figure 12-6 Shuffle pins.....................................................................................................................................12-6Figure 12-7 Opening the lock.............................................................................................................................12-7Figure 12-8 Closing the lock..............................................................................................................................12-7Figure 12-9 Cabinet door before the PGND cable is connected........................................................................12-8Figure 12-10 Loosening the PGND bolt of the door..........................................................................................12-8Figure 12-11 Connecting the PGND cable of the door......................................................................................12-9Figure 12-12 Installing the washer.....................................................................................................................12-9Figure 12-13 Fastening the bolt........................................................................................................................12-10Figure 12-14 Cabinet door with the PGND cable connected...........................................................................12-10Figure 12-15 Testing the Insulation.................................................................................................................12-11Figure 12-16 Fixing floor holders and guide rails............................................................................................12-12Figure 13-1 Installing side panels......................................................................................................................13-3Figure 13-2 Installing the rear access cabinet doors..........................................................................................13-4Figure 13-3 Installing the rear door of the front access cabinet.........................................................................13-5Figure 13-4 Loosening the PGND bolt of the door............................................................................................13-6Figure 13-5 Connecting the PGND cable of the door........................................................................................13-6Figure 13-6 Fastening the bolt ...........................................................................................................................13-7Figure 13-7 Testing the Insulation ....................................................................................................................13-7Figure 13-8 Connected PGND Cables...............................................................................................................13-8



xi

Figure 13-9 Installing the front pallets...............................................................................................................13-9Figure 13-10 Cutting and restoring the antistatic floor......................................................................................13-9Figure 14-1 Connection modes for the LMT.....................................................................................................14-2Figure 14-2 Appearance of universal alarm boxes.............................................................................................14-4Figure 15-1 Procedure for power-on checking...................................................................................................15-6Figure 16-1 Connection between the LMT and the UMG8900.........................................................................16-2Figure 16-2 LMT software installation procedure.............................................................................................16-3Figure 16-3 Language selection.........................................................................................................................16-6Figure 16-4 Welcome to the Installshield Wizard for Huawei LMT.................................................................16-6Figure 16-5 License agreement..........................................................................................................................16-7Figure 16-6 Selecting installation directory.......................................................................................................16-7Figure 16-7 Components to be installed.............................................................................................................16-8Figure 16-8 Entering CD KEY...........................................................................................................................16-8Figure 16-9 Confirm Installation........................................................................................................................16-9Figure 16-10 Copying files.................................................................................................................................16-9Figure 16-11 Installation completed.................................................................................................................16-10Figure 16-12 About window............................................................................................................................16-12Figure 16-13 LMT Service Manager window..................................................................................................16-13Figure 16-14 Uninstalling programs................................................................................................................16-14Figure 17-1 Procedure for installing host software............................................................................................17-2Figure 17-2 Disabling firewall...........................................................................................................................17-6Figure 17-3 TCP/IP filtering..............................................................................................................................17-7Figure 17-4 WFTPD window.............................................................................................................................17-8Figure 17-5 Users/rights… dialog box..............................................................................................................17-8Figure 17-6 Configuring the user name.............................................................................................................17-9Figure 17-7 Entering the password....................................................................................................................17-9Figure 17-8 Setting the path to upload the file.................................................................................................17-10Figure 17-9 TFTPD window............................................................................................................................17-10Figure 17-10 Setting the path to upload the file...............................................................................................17-11Figure 17-11 Establishing physical environment.............................................................................................17-12Figure 17-12 Establishing serial port connection.............................................................................................17-12Figure 17-13 Setting parameters for the HyperTerminal.................................................................................17-13Figure 17-14 Setting attributes.........................................................................................................................17-14Figure 17-15 Setting ASCII.............................................................................................................................17-14Figure 17-16 User login...................................................................................................................................17-16Figure 17-17 Setting the office information.....................................................................................................17-17Figure 17-18 Modifying timeout setting..........................................................................................................17-17Figure 17-19 Disabling firewall.......................................................................................................................17-30Figure 17-20 TCP/IP filtering..........................................................................................................................17-31Figure 18-1 Dial-up service networking............................................................................................................18-2Figure 18-2 Procedure for installing remote maintenance system.....................................................................18-3Figure 18-3 Installing a new modem..................................................................................................................18-4


Installation Guide

xii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 18-4 Selecting the modem......................................................................................................................18-4Figure 18-5 Selecting the serial port for the modem..........................................................................................18-5Figure 18-6 Completing modem installation......................................................................................................18-5Figure 18-7 Setting Phone and Modem Properties............................................................................................18-6Figure 18-8 Routing and remote access.............................................................................................................18-7Figure 18-9 Welcome to the routing and remote access server setup wizard....................................................18-7Figure 18-10 Common configurations...............................................................................................................18-8Figure 18-11 Remote access server setup..........................................................................................................18-8Figure 18-12 Remote client protocols................................................................................................................18-9Figure 18-13 IP address assignment...................................................................................................................18-9Figure 18-14 Address range assignment..........................................................................................................18-10Figure 18-15 New address range......................................................................................................................18-10Figure 18-16 Address range assignment..........................................................................................................18-11Figure 18-17 Managing multiple remote access servers..................................................................................18-11Figure 18-18 Completing the routing and remote access server setup wizard.................................................18-12Figure 18-19 Configured remote access server................................................................................................18-12Figure 18-20 Setting port properties................................................................................................................18-13Figure 18-21 Selecting the modem..................................................................................................................18-13Figure 18-22 Setting port properties of the modem.........................................................................................18-14Figure 18-23 Network and dial-up connections...............................................................................................18-15Figure 18-24 Incoming connections properties................................................................................................18-16Figure 18-25 Incoming TCP/IP properties.......................................................................................................18-17Figure 18-26 Computer management...............................................................................................................18-18Figure 18-27 Setting local users and groups....................................................................................................18-18Figure 18-28 Adding a new user......................................................................................................................18-19Figure 18-29 User dial properties interface......................................................................................................18-19Figure 18-30 Setting dial-in properties............................................................................................................18-20Figure 18-31 Phone dialer................................................................................................................................18-21Figure 18-32 Entering Dial-Up Networking dialog box.................................................................................18-22Figure 18-33 Setting up a new connection.......................................................................................................18-22Figure 19-1 Procedure for loading software to the OMU manually..................................................................19-2Figure A-1 Procedure for mounting cabling racks..............................................................................................A-1Figure A-2 Cabling ladder...................................................................................................................................A-3Figure A-3 U-shaped connecting piece...............................................................................................................A-3Figure A-4 Bracket angle....................................................................................................................................A-3Figure A-5 Cable manager..................................................................................................................................A-3Figure A-6 Triangular support.............................................................................................................................A-4Figure A-7 Connecting clip.................................................................................................................................A-4Figure A-8 Fixing clip.........................................................................................................................................A-4Figure A-9 Cabling trough..................................................................................................................................A-4Figure A-10 Movable bushing.............................................................................................................................A-4Figure A-11 End cover........................................................................................................................................A-4



xiii

Figure A-12 Rectangular frame...........................................................................................................................A-4Figure A-13 U-steel.............................................................................................................................................A-4Figure A-14 Mounting the cabling rack to the ceiling........................................................................................A-6Figure A-15 Mounting the cabling rack to the ceiling with an obstacle.............................................................A-7Figure A-16 Fixing the triangular support...........................................................................................................A-8Figure A-17 Fixing the cabling ladder to the support.........................................................................................A-9Figure A-18 Rectangular frame.........................................................................................................................A-10Figure A-19 Mounting the outdoor cabling rack against the wall.....................................................................A-11Figure A-20 Mounting the outdoor cabling rack on the ground........................................................................A-12Figure A-21 Assembling cabling ladders..........................................................................................................A-13Figure A-22 Turning the cabling ladder at the same level (without cabling troughs).......................................A-14Figure A-23 Turning the cabling ladder at different levels...............................................................................A-15Figure A-24 Connecting the cabling ladder to the wall.....................................................................................A-15Figure A-25 Front jointing of climbing ladders................................................................................................A-16Figure A-26 Side jointing of climbing ladders..................................................................................................A-16Figure A-27 Oblique jointing of climbing ladders............................................................................................A-17Figure A-28 Connecting cabling troughs..........................................................................................................A-18Figure A-29 Mounting the cabling trough on a 200 mm [7.9 in.] or 400 mm [15.7 in.] cabling ladder...........A-18Figure A-30 Mounting the cabling trough on a 600 mm [23.6 in.] cabling ladder...........................................A-19Figure A-31 Cutting off the upper side of the triangle aperture in the cabling trough......................................A-19Figure A-32 Mounting cabling troughs obliquely.............................................................................................A-20Figure A-33 Cabling troughs mounted obliquely onto the cabling ladder........................................................A-20Figure A-34 Cable-through racks mounted to the cabling rack without the cabling trough.............................A-21Figure A-35 Cable-through racks mounted to the cabling rack with the cabling trough..................................A-22Figure A-36 Mounting end covers, trough rims, and baffle rings.....................................................................A-22Figure B-1 Assembling power cables..................................................................................................................B-3Figure B-2 Stripping power cables......................................................................................................................B-4Figure B-3 SS-325 parts......................................................................................................................................B-5Figure B-4 Connecting core wires with the terminal crimping sleeve................................................................B-6Figure B-5 Molding dies related to the power cables..........................................................................................B-6Figure B-6 Crimping cables.................................................................................................................................B-7Figure B-7 Shrinking the heat-shrinkable tubes..................................................................................................B-8Figure B-8 Assembling the RJ45 connector........................................................................................................B-9Figure B-9 Components of a shielded RJ45 connector.....................................................................................B-10Figure B-10 Putting a network cable into a connector jacket............................................................................B-10Figure B-11 Peeling the jacket of a twisted pair cable......................................................................................B-11Figure B-12 Putting a cable into a metal shell...................................................................................................B-11Figure B-13 Peeling the shielded layer of a twisted pair cable.........................................................................B-12Figure B-14 Wire sequence of the crossover network cables............................................................................B-13Figure B-15 Wire sequence of the straight through network cables..................................................................B-14Figure B-16 Wire holder of a connector............................................................................................................B-14Figure B-17 Aligning four pairs of cables on a wire holder..............................................................................B-15


Installation Guide

xiv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure B-18 Cutting wires.................................................................................................................................B-15Figure B-19 Inserting a connector holder..........................................................................................................B-15Figure B-20 Press-Fitting a connector...............................................................................................................B-16Figure B-21 Inserting the metal shell of a connector.........................................................................................B-17Figure B-22 Assembling the RJ48 connectors of the twisted pair trunk cables................................................B-18Figure B-23 Length of the stripped segment on the cable.................................................................................B-19Figure B-24 Structure of the RJ48 optical connector........................................................................................B-19Figure B-25 Shielded cables..............................................................................................................................B-20Figure B-26 Trimmed core wires......................................................................................................................B-20Figure B-27 Arrangement of the core wires......................................................................................................B-21Figure B-28 Ready-made RJ45 connector ........................................................................................................B-21Figure B-29 Procedure for assembling the SMB connector..............................................................................B-23Figure B-30 Mounting heat-shrinkable tubes and crimping sleeves.................................................................B-24Figure B-31 Stripping trunk signal cables.........................................................................................................B-24Figure B-32 Welding pins.................................................................................................................................B-25Figure B-33 Crimping the SMB connector onto a cable...................................................................................B-26Figure B-34 Shrinking heat-shrinkable tubes....................................................................................................B-27Figure C-1 Labels for power cables....................................................................................................................C-2Figure C-2 Labels for signal cables.....................................................................................................................C-3Figure C-3 Print warning.....................................................................................................................................C-4Figure C-4 Writing direction...............................................................................................................................C-5Figure C-5 Appearance of the affixed label on the power cable.........................................................................C-6Figure C-6 Appearance of the affixed label on the signal cable.........................................................................C-6Figure C-7 Affixing the label onto proper position of the cable.........................................................................C-7Figure C-8 Folding up the label...........................................................................................................................C-7Figure C-9 Labels for signal cables.....................................................................................................................C-8Figure C-10 Example of the label on the alarm cable.........................................................................................C-9Figure C-11 Example of the label on the network cable...................................................................................C-10Figure C-12 Example of the label on the optical fiber between two devices....................................................C-12Figure C-13 Example of the label on the optical fiber between the device and the ODF.................................C-13Figure C-14 Example of the label on the trunk cable between two devices.....................................................C-14Figure C-15 Example of the label on the trunk cable between the device and the DDF..................................C-15Figure C-16 Example of the labels on the DC power cables.............................................................................C-17Figure C-17 Example of the labels on the AC power cables.............................................................................C-18Figure E-1 Partition in the equipment room........................................................................................................E-4



xv

Tables

Table 2-1 Measurement tools...............................................................................................................................2-2Table 2-2 Punching tools......................................................................................................................................2-3Table 2-3 Fastening tools.....................................................................................................................................2-3Table 2-4 Small tools............................................................................................................................................2-4Table 2-5 Dedicated tools.....................................................................................................................................2-4Table 2-6 Meters...................................................................................................................................................2-6Table 2-7 Auxiliary tools......................................................................................................................................2-6Table 10-1 Relationships between components and power control switches in front-access cabinets..............10-4Table 10-2 Relationships between components and power control switches in the H66-22 cabinet.................10-6Table 10-3 Relationships between components and power control switches in the H66-22 cabinet.................10-8Table 10-4 Relationships between power control switches and components.....................................................10-9Table 10-5 Relationships between power control switches and components...................................................10-12Table 11-1 Modes of the UAM frame..............................................................................................................11-17Table 11-2 Description of E1 interfaces on the MOMD..................................................................................11-19Table 11-3 Positions of E1 interfaces of the UAFM frame..............................................................................11-20Table 11-4 Positions of E1 interfaces of the RSP10 frame..............................................................................11-20Table 11-5 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB44 connectors..........................................................11-21Table 11-6 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X2)............11-22Table 11-7 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X3)............11-23Table 11-8 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB44 connectors (from connectors X1 to X2)............11-24Table 11-9 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB44 connectors (from connectors X1 to X3)............11-24Table 11-10 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X2)..........11-25Table 11-11 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X3)..........11-25Table 11-12 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X4)..........11-25Table 11-13 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectors X1 to X5)..........11-26Table 11-14 Description of cascading between the UAFM main frame and the UAFS subframe..................11-29Table 11-15 Description of HWC interfaces of the RSP10 frame...................................................................11-30Table 11-16 Description of HW interfaces of the RSP14 frame......................................................................11-31Table 11-17 Description of HW cables with two connectors...........................................................................11-32Table 11-18 Pin assignment of service bearer network cables.........................................................................11-46Table 16-1 Recommended configurations of the hardware and system for LMT software...............................16-3Table A-1 Procedure for mounting cabling racks................................................................................................A-3Table B-1 Tensile strength standard of ready-made cables.................................................................................B-9

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide Tables


xvii

Table B-2 Pin assignment for the RJ48 connector of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable......................................B-21Table C-1 Template of standard fonts.................................................................................................................C-5Table C-2 Content of labels on the external cable of the alarm box...................................................................C-9Table C-3 Content of labels on the network cable............................................................................................C-10Table C-4 Content of labels on the optical fiber between two devices.............................................................C-11Table C-5 Content of labels on the optical fiber between the device and the ODF..........................................C-12Table C-6 Content of labels on the trunk cable between two devices...............................................................C-14Table C-7 Content of labels on the trunk cable between the device and the DDF............................................C-15Table C-8 Content of labels on the DC power cables.......................................................................................C-16Table C-9 Content of labels on the AC power cables.......................................................................................C-18Table D-1 Directory structure of the LMT files..................................................................................................D-2Table D-2 BAM file directory.............................................................................................................................D-3Table D-3 Description of the main version.........................................................................................................D-4Table D-4 Description of board type...................................................................................................................D-5Table D-5 Higher layer software of boards.........................................................................................................D-7Table E-1 Construction requirements for the equipment room...........................................................................E-2Table E-2 Requirements for temperature and humidity.......................................................................................E-4Table E-3 Dust particle limit in the equipment room..........................................................................................E-5Table E-4 Erosive gas density limits...................................................................................................................E-5Table E-5 Electromagnetic range.........................................................................................................................E-6Table E-6 Lightning protection grounding requirements....................................................................................E-7Table E-7 Specifications of AC voltage and frequency.......................................................................................E-9Table E-8 DC power supply specifications.......................................................................................................E-10

TablesHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide

xviii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

About This Document

PurposeThis document describes the procedures for installing the cabinets, frames, cables, andperipherals.

This document provides the installation guide, component installation and installation check forHUAWEI UMG8900 Universal Media Gateway (hereinafter referred to as UMG8900).

Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

HUAWEI UMG8900 V100R007

Intended AudienceThe intended audiences of this document are:

l Installation technician

l Commissioning engineer

l Field technician

Update HistoryUpdates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document versioncontains all updates made to previous versions.

Updates in Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Initial commercial release.

Updates in Issue 01 (2007-11-28)

Initial field trial release

OrganizationThis document provides the installation guide, component installation and installation check forHUAWEI UMG8900 Universal Media Gateway (hereinafter referred to as UMG8900).

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide About This Document


1

1 Installation Procedure

Based on normal installation sequence, device installation includes four major parts: hardwareinstallation, software installation, data configuration, system commissioning. This documentdescribes the basic procedures for hardware installation and software installation of theUMG8900.

2 Installation Preparations

This describes the sequence of installation preparations in the installation procedures and thepreparatory work.

3 Unpacking and Inspection

The project supervisor should check the goods together with the customer when the goods arereceived.

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive Floor

This describes how to install the N66-22 and H66-22 cabinets on the ESD-preventive floor.

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive Floor

This describes how to install the normalized N66-22 cabinets on the ESD-preventive floor.

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

This describes how to install the N66-22 and H66-22 cabinets on the cement floor.

7 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor

This describes how to install the normalized N66-22 cabinets on the cement floor.

8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets

This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables and power cables forcabinets.

9 Installing Internal Components

This describes how to install internal components of the cabinet.

10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components

This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables and power cables forinternal components.

11 Connecting Signal Cables

This describes how to connect the signal cables of the UMG8900.

12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinet Fittings

This describes how to install N66-22 or H66-22 cabinet fittings.

13 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Fittings

This describes how to install normalized N66-22 cabinet fittings.

14 Installing Peripherals

This describes how to install peripherals including terminals, alarm boxes, and EAC-2environment monitoring device.

About This DocumentHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide

2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

15 Checking Installation

This describes how to check the installation.

16 Installing LMT Software

This describes the procedure for installing the LMT software, installation preparations, and stepsfor installing/uninstalling the software.

17 Loading Host Software

This describes the loading procedure, loading steps, loading method, loading check, andexception handling.

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System

This describes the applications, configuring procedure, and checking method of remotemaintenance system.

19 Loading OMU Software Manually

This describes the applications, loading preparations, loading procedure, and loading steps.

A Mounting Cabling Racks

This describes how to mount the cabling racks.

B Assembling Cable Connectors

This describes how to assemble the cable connectors.

C Introduction to Engineering Labels

The engineering labels are used for site installation and future maintenance. The engineeringlabels are of two types based on power cables and signal cables. The signal cables of theUMG8900 include alarm external cables, network cables, optical fibers, trunk cables. The powercables include DC power cables and AC power cables.

D Introduction to File System Directory

This describes the functions of the file system directory.

E Requirements for Device Running Environment

This describes the requirements for device running environment, including location andconstruction of equipment room, temperature and humidity, cleanness, erosive gas,electromagnetism, ESD-prevention, lightning protection, and power.

ConventionsSymbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if notavoided,will result in death or serious injury.



3

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, whichif not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if notavoided,could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance degradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or savetime.

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.

General Conventions

The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.

Command Conventions

The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.


Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of allitems can be selected.

About This DocumentHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide

4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)


[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions

The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.


Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder .

Keyboard Operations

The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A meansthe two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations

The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without movingthe pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously andquickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move thepointer to a certain position.



5

1 Installation Procedure

About This Chapter

Based on normal installation sequence, device installation includes four major parts: hardwareinstallation, software installation, data configuration, system commissioning. This documentdescribes the basic procedures for hardware installation and software installation of theUMG8900.

1.1 Hardware Installation ProcedureThe normal running of the UMG8900 is related to the quality of installation. Systematic andstandard installation is required to reduce the unfavorable factors to the device running and toimprove the reliability of device running over network.

1.2 Hardware Installation StepsThis describes the hardware installation steps of the UMG8900.

1.3 PrecautionsThis describes the precautions during hardware installation of the UMG8900.

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide 1 Installation Procedure


1-1

1.1 Hardware Installation ProcedureThe normal running of the UMG8900 is related to the quality of installation. Systematic andstandard installation is required to reduce the unfavorable factors to the device running and toimprove the reliability of device running over network.

Figure 1-1 shows the procedure for hardware installation of the UMG8900.

Figure 1-1 Hardware installation procedure

Prepare

Start

Install cabinets

Install protection grounding cablesand power cables for the cabinets

Install internal components

Install protection grounding cablesand power cables for the internal

components

Install cabinet fittings

Install signal cables

Install peripherals

Check the installation

End

Inspect Packages

1 Installation ProcedureHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide

1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

NOTE

l In the UMG8900, the internal components, including SSM frames, are set from the bottom up. Theinternal components in the cabinet are often installed from the bottom up.

l The internal components except the boards in SSM frame are installed before delivery. To install theupgrade/expansion devices, refer to Figure 1-1 and 9 Installing Internal Components of thisdocument.

1.2 Hardware Installation StepsThis describes the hardware installation steps of the UMG8900.

1. Before installation, prepare the technical documents and installation tools, check whetherthe installation environment meets the requirement, and ensure that the constructionengineers have necessary installation skills. For details, see 2 Installation Preparations.

2. Inspection includes checking whether the package is intact and unpacking the goods forinspection. For details, see 3 Unpacking and Inspection.

3. Cabinet installation on ESD-preventive floor includes removing package accessories,positioning supports, installing expansion bolts, installing supports, fixing cabinets onESD-preventive floor, and testing insulation between expansion bolts and cabinets. Fordetails, see 4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive Floor.

4. Cabinet installation on cement floor includes removing package accessories, positioningsupports, installing expansion bolts, fixing cabinets on cement floor, and testing insulationbetween expansion bolts and cabinets. For details, see 6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22Cabinets on the Cement Floor.

5. Connection of protection ground (PGND) cables and power cables includes connectingPGND cables and power cables, connecting PGND cables and power cables between DCpower distribution cabinets and cabinets, and connecting PGND cables between cabinets.For details, see 8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets.

6. Installation of internal components includes installing boards in the UA frames, configuringinternal components, and installing boards in the SSM frames. For details, see 9 InstallingInternal Components.

7. Connection of PGND cables and power cables for internal components includes installinginternal components, SSM frames, UA frames, low-density UA fan frames, and connectingPGND cables and power cables of the monitoring box. For details, see 10 ConnectingPGND Cables and Power Cables for Internal Components.

8. Connection of signal cables includes connecting the monitoring cables, trunk cables, accesssignal cables of the UA frame, BITS clock cable, and external network cables. For details,see 11 Connecting Signal Cables.

9. Installation of cabinet fittings includes installing fittings such as the ESD-preventive floorand cabinet doors. For details, see 12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinet Fittings.

10. Installation of peripherals includes installing local maintenance terminal (LMT) and alarmbox. For details, see 14 Installing Peripherals. That is the end of hardware installation.

11. Before starting software installation, check the hardware installation. For the checklist andcriterions, see 15 Checking Installation. Rectify improper installation items until theycomply with the requirements.

1.3 PrecautionsThis describes the precautions during hardware installation of the UMG8900.

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide 1 Installation Procedure


1-3

l This document helps you to install the hardware components and cables of theUMG8900. The construction engineers should refer to this document in a flexible waybecause the available information does not cover all site conditions and optional devicesin actual installation.

l Ports that the UMG8900 provides are type 2 equipment defined in the Electromagneticcompatibility and Electrical Safety – Generic Criteria for Network TelecommunicationsEquipment issue 3.

l Pay attention to the following before installing the UMG8900: Read the Site Survey Reportto know the position and state of the device in the network. Familiarize the interface typesof line transmission devices, length of cables, and accounting modes of access devices.Check whether the customer's order for the device is changed greatly.

1 Installation ProcedureHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

2 Installation Preparations

About This Chapter

This describes the sequence of installation preparations in the installation procedures and thepreparatory work.

2.1 Preparing DocumentsThe construction technical documents related to the installation include the following. Readthem carefully to get more information about the project.

2.2 Requirements for Construction EngineersDuring the installation, the customers must arrange the technical engineers to attend theinstallation training about the system networking, power supply, cable connection, and operationand maintenance. In this case, the client engineers can maintain the device.

2.3 Preparing Installation ToolsIn general, the construction party must prepare the following tools and meters.

2.4 Checking EnvironmentCheck the following items before installing the UMG8900.

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations


2-1

2.1 Preparing DocumentsThe construction technical documents related to the installation include the following. Readthem carefully to get more information about the project.

l The customer-commissioning party must complete documents such as network plan,equipment room design, construction diagram, and cable routing diagram. The copies ofall these documents must be provided to Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. (hereinafterreferred to as Huawei) before delivery.

l Huawei engineers fill in site survey report on site.

l Huawei makes engineering design document based on actual conditions of each office anddelivers it.

l Package documentation refers to Hardware Description and Installation Guide.

l Huawei delivers other documents such as contracts and agreements, configuration table,packing list to customers with goods.

2.2 Requirements for Construction EngineersDuring the installation, the customers must arrange the technical engineers to attend theinstallation training about the system networking, power supply, cable connection, and operationand maintenance. In this case, the client engineers can maintain the device.

In addition, pay attention to the following two points when organizing the construction engineers.

l The technical engineers of the cooperative party must master the installation andcommissioning methods and obtain the qualification certificate after training.

l The technical engineers of the customer must master some installation and constructiontechnique through training by Huawei before the installation.

The number of technical engineers depends on the project scheduling and installation conditions.Normally three to five are needed.

2.3 Preparing Installation ToolsIn general, the construction party must prepare the following tools and meters.

Table 2-1 Measurement tools

Picture Name Description

Long tape To measure adistance

Angle square To measure adistance

2 Installation PreparationsHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)


Spirit level To measure thehorizontal level

Table 2-2 Punching tools


Percussion drill To drill holes.The matched drillbits are of Ф6,Ф8, Ф10, Ф12,Ф14, and Ф16.

Vacuum cleaner To clean the floor

Table 2-3 Fastening tools


Crossheadscrewdriver

To fastenscrews

Straightscrewdriver

To fastenscrews

Spanner To fasten bolts

Torque spanner To fastenexpansionbolts



2-3


Suite of sleeves To level thecabinet

Table 2-4 Small tools


Diagonal pliers To cut cableties

Table 2-5 Dedicated tools


Crimping pliers To crimpcrystalconnectors ofnetworkcables

Cold-pressedpliers

To crimp cold-pressedterminals


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)


Cable peeler To peel cables

Wire punchdown tool

To connect thetrunk cable tothe cablingrack

High-speed wirestripper forcoaxial cables

To process thecoaxial cable

Vertical tester To test thevertical error



2-5

Table 2-6 Meters


Cable tester To testnetworkcables

Multimeter To measureimpedanceand voltage,or checkcontinuity

Table 2-7 Auxiliary tools


ESD-preventivewrist strap

To be wornduringinstallation

Cable tie To bind cables

Fiber bundlingtape

To bundle theoptical fiber


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)


Gloves To be wornduringinstallation

ESD-preventivegloves

To be wornduringinstallation

Ladder To be used foroperations atheights

NOTE

The instruments must pass the measurement test.

2.4 Checking EnvironmentCheck the following items before installing the UMG8900.



2-7

2.4.1 Checking Building Conditions of Equipment Rooms

2.4.2 Checking Environment Conditions

2.4.3 Checking Power Supply Conditions

2.4.4 Checking Grounding Conditions

2.4.5 Checking the Lightning Protection System

2.4.6 Requirements for DDFs/ODFs

2.4.7 Optical Transmission Devices

2.4.8 Distribution Requirements for Terminals and Alarm Boxes

2.4.1 Checking Building Conditions of Equipment RoomsCheck the area, height, weight bearing capacity, and groove distribution of the equipment room.If any item does not meet the installation environment requirements, reconstructing isrecommended.

For details on the installation environment requirements, see E.2 Requirements for EquipmentRoom Construction.

2.4.2 Checking Environment ConditionsThe check items include:

l The illumination conditions must meet the requirements for device maintenance. Theremust be normal illumination, standby illumination, and emergency illumination systems.

l The air-conditioning and ventilation systems can ensure the temperature and humidityrequirements.

l Effective ESD-preventive measures are taken.

l The equipment room is equipped with enough fire-fighting facilities.

l The equipment room meets the quakeproof requirements. The floor in the equipment roomis solid enough to install and fasten the device.

l Safe lightning-proof measures are taken for the equipment room.

2.4.3 Checking Power Supply ConditionsThe check items include:

l The AC power supply facilities are complete, and the power meets the requirement. Besidesthe mains power supply, there must be standby power supply by diesel generator.

l The DC power distribution devices can provide stable power supply, and the output voltageis within the specified range.

l Enough available storage batteries ensure that the device is able to run in case of powersupply failure.

l Lead-out terminals for AC safety ground are available for the purpose of easy connection.

For details on the power supply requirements, see E.9 Requirements for Power Supply.

2.4.4 Checking Grounding Conditions


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Good grounding ensures the stable running of the device, and prevents the device from lightningand interference. Therefore, check the grounding conditions of the site, and take correctgrounding measures.

NOTEThe earth resistance of the grounding system is recommended to be less than 10 ohms. The device groundingshould comply with national and local electrical codes.

2.4.5 Checking the Lightning Protection System

The equipment building must have lightning arrester.

The ground for lightning arrester of the equipment building and the protection ground of theequipment room share the same group of grounding bodies.

2.4.6 Requirements for DDFs/ODFsIn the networking, if the UMG8900 connects to E1 trunk cables, choose qualified digitaldistribution frame (DDF) according to the international standards; if the UMG8900 connects toexternal optical fibers, choose optical distribution frame (ODF) according to the internationalstandards. According to the capacity of the project and future expansion, the capacity of theDDF/ODF must be figured out. For the convenience of soldering the connectors of trunk cablesat the DDF side, see the contract checklist for the model of the trunk cables used in theUMG8900. You can also consult the engineering designer at the local office.

2.4.7 Optical Transmission DevicesIf there is auxiliary transmission device, check the following items before the UMG8900hardware installation:

l The optical transmission device is installed and debugged.

l Optical fibers are laid.

l The fiber tails from connection box are marked.

l The connectivity of the optical fibers is checked.

l The cabling rack and distribution frame are installed.

2.4.8 Distribution Requirements for Terminals and Alarm Boxes

l The maintenance and monitoring room is clean, without sundries.

l The cabinet fittings are installed.

l The workstations are ESD-preventive computer workstations.

l The workstations are in the correct location, which meets the plan requirement of theequipment room.

l The workstations are arranged in order. To be specific, the workstations are in a line;adjacent workstations are close to each other; the table-boards are vertical.

l The terminals are connected to the uninterrupted power supply and kept away fromelectrical devices to avoid electromagnetic interference.

l The terminals and auxiliary devices with complete signs are available and their locationsmeet the design requirements.



2-9

3 Unpacking and Inspection

About This Chapter

The project supervisor should check the goods together with the customer when the goods arereceived.

3.1 Inspecting PackagesCheck whether the package is intact before inspecting the goods.

3.2 UnpackingUnpacking involves unpacking wooden crates, cartons, and boards.

3.3 InspectionThe project supervisor should check the goods together with the customer when the goods arereceived.

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide 3 Unpacking and Inspection


3-1

3.1 Inspecting PackagesCheck whether the package is intact before inspecting the goods.

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether the total number of goods is the same as that in the packing list attached to thepacking box.

Step 2 Check whether the package is intact and whether the chassis is placed correctly.

Step 3 Stop unpacking the cartons, and send feedback on the problems to local offices if any of thefollowing cases occurs:l The package is severely damaged or wet.

l The equipment is rusty or wet.

Step 4 If the cabinet is shaken violently, the outer package may not be damaged by vibration; however,the inside device may be damaged. In this case, check the vibration label on the cabinet. Thevibration label is red in the case of vibration. The red vibration label is the evidence for claim.

----End

3.2 UnpackingUnpacking involves unpacking wooden crates, cartons, and boards.

3.2.1 Unpacking Wooden CratesWooden crate is used to package up heavy goods such as cabinets and batteries.

3.2.2 Unpacking CartonsCartons are used to package up cables, circuit boards, and terminal devices.

3.2.3 Unpacking BoardsThe boards are delivered in antistatic bags. Therefore, when unpacking the board, take antistaticmeasures to avoid any damage.

3.2.1 Unpacking Wooden CratesWooden crate is used to package up heavy goods such as cabinets and batteries.

PrerequisiteA wooden crate is composed of the wooden board, angle steel, tongue, and foam corner protector.Before unpacking a wooden crate, move it to the equipment room or nearby (where there isenough space), to avoid damage to the cabinet when moving the crate. Fork truck isrecommended to move the crate. Refer to Figure 3-1.

3 Unpacking and InspectionHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 3-1 Moving the wooden crate with a fork truck

CAUTIONWhen moving or lifting the cabinet, hold the rigid parts of the cabinet with both hands, such asbrackets or major frames to avoid damage or injury. Do not hold the flexible parts such as cablebrackets and cable fixing beam. Remove the lining boards of the cabinet on the installation siteto avoid damage to signal cables and boards when moving or lifting the cabinet.

Procedure

Step 1 Place the wooden crate on the floor. Ensure that the side with the wooden rack faces downward.

Step 2 Insert the spanner into the tongue holes in the cover. Then, turn the spanner to straighten thetongues. Refer to Figure 3-2.



3-3

Figure 3-2 Straightening tongues (1)

SpannerTongue

Wooden boardAngle steel

Step 3 Alternatively, you can use straight screwdrivers to straighten the tongues. Refer to Figure 3-3and Figure 3-4.




Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Step 4 Lift and remove the covers after all tongues are straightened. Refer to Figure 3-5.

Figure 3-5 Lifting and removing covers

Get the carton out of the wooden crate if the carton is in the wooden crate. If the cabinet is inthe wooden crate without any carton, perform the following steps:

Step 5 Straighten the tongues on the surrounded wooden board. Then, remove the wooden board. Referto Figure 3-6.



3-5

Figure 3-6 Removing surrounded wooden boards

Step 6 Make the cabinet upright. Ensure that the side marked with BOTTOM faces downward.

Step 7 Remove the carton base with the wooden rack.

Step 8 Remove the foam corner protectors.

Step 9 Remove the package bags.

----End

3.2.2 Unpacking CartonsCartons are used to package up cables, circuit boards, and terminal devices.

Procedure

Step 1 Check the label on the carton to get information about the type and quantity of the componentsin the carton.

Step 2 Cut the straps with cutters.

Step 3 Cut the tapes along the seam of box cover with paper knife. Do not insert the knife too deep toavoid any scratch on internal devices.

Step 4 Open the carton to take out the foam blocks.

Step 5 Check the board labels to see if the quantity is the same as that marked on the carton label. Ifyes, take out the board boxes.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Step 6 Check the boards inside the board boxes against the packing list.

----End

ExampleFigure 3-7 shows the steps for unpacking the cartons.

Figure 3-7 Unpacking cartons

1

23

4 5

4

6

678

1. Pressure-sensitive adhesive tape 2. Strap 3. Carton label 4. Foam block

5. Board label 6. Board box 7. Antistatic bag 8. Board

Do not discard carton with components left inside. Before unpacking next carton, ensure thatthe current carton is empty.

3.2.3 Unpacking BoardsThe boards are delivered in antistatic bags. Therefore, when unpacking the board, take antistaticmeasures to avoid any damage.

Context

CAUTIONElectronic circuits and components are extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD).Therefore, wear a securely grounded antistatic wrist strap, and only hold the edge of boardswhen checking the components.



3-7

Note the effect of environment change on circuit boards. The drying agent in the antistatic bagis to keep dry inside. When boards are moved from a cold dry place to a hot damp place, waitat least 30 minutes before unpacking the boards. Otherwise, the condensed water on the surfacemay damage the boards.

Procedure

Step 1 Check that there is no evident damage on the board package.

Step 2 Wear an antistatic wrist strap and ground it securely.

Step 3 Open the package and check that the board is intact.

----End

3.3 InspectionThe project supervisor should check the goods together with the customer when the goods arereceived.

Procedure

Step 1 Open the case marked with the label indicating "Packing list inside", and take out the packinglist to check the goods against the list. In case any item is wrong or missing, fill in the GoodsError Feedback Form. In case any good is damaged, fill in the Goods Replacement ApplicationForm. and sign the Packing List page by page with the customer.

Step 2 Ensure that all unpacked components are placed on the ESD-preventive surface, such as ESD-preventive polyethylene bags and EPE foam. Perform the installation according to the followingdescription. In addition, ensure that all unpacked boards are stored with original packaging, andput them in a cool dry place without direct sunshine or strong electromagnetic radiation.

----End


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

4 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on theESD-Preventive Floor

About This Chapter

This describes how to install the N66-22 and H66-22 cabinets on the ESD-preventive floor.

PrerequisiteMake sure that the following preparations are completed before installing the cabinet.

l Ensure that the ESD-Preventive floor is clean.

l Room illumination meets the requirements for installation.

ContextFigure 4-1 shows the procedure for installing cabinets on the ESD-preventive floor.

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide



4-1

Figure 4-1 Installation procedure

Start

Remove package accessories

Position supports

Install expansion bolts

Install supports

Install cabinets on the ESD-preventive floor

Attach the cabinets

End

Pass?

Test the insulation

If the cabinets need tobe attached?

Yes

Yes

No

No

Figure 4-2 shows the installed cabinet.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 4-2 Cabinet after installation

After installing the cabinet, clean the installation site.

l Sort out the tools and put the tools to the specific positions.

l Clear the waste to keep the room tidy and clean.

l Collect the materials left over and send them back to the customer after the project iscompleted.

PostrequisiteAfter installing the cabinet on the ESD-preventive floor, you can connect the protection ground(PGND) cables and power cables for the cabinet.

4.1 Installation Specifications and PrecautionsRead this part carefully before installing the cabinets. Familiarize the installation specificationsand precautions to avoid reconstructing and damage or injury.

4.2 Removing Package AccessoriesThis describes how to remove the package before installing the cabinets. The delivered cabinetsare covered with wooden package.

4.3 Positioning SupportsPositioning supports refers to determining the position to install the supports on the floor.Positioning supports is the basic work for hardware installation. Accurate positioning is theprerequisite to guarantee the quality of the overall installation. Inaccurate positioning causesinconvenience for subsequent installation.

4.4 Installing Expansion BoltsTo fix the cabinet and the support on the floor, install the expansion bolts on the floor of theequipment room.

4.5 Installing SupportsThis describes how to fix and adjust the support.

4.6 Installing Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive Floor




4-3

This describes how to fix the cabinets on supports and level them.

4.7 Attaching the CabinetsThis describes how to attach the cabinets. When installing two or more cabinets side by side,connect them by using connecting plates. The connecting plates for combined cabinets arelocated at the top of the cabinet and delivered with the cabinet.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)


Installation Specificationsl Each row of cabinets along the main walkway must be straight. The vertical error cannot

exceed 3 mm [0.11 in.].l Each column of racks must be close and the rack surfaces are in the same line.

l Wear clean gloves when touching the surfaces of cabinets or frames.

NOTE

The cabinets without the front, back doors and the side panels are called racks.

Precautionsl Before installing cabinets, ensure that the related installation tasks performed above the

cabinet (such as cabling rack installation and cable layout) are completed. Therefore, thedust and metal scraps do not drop into the cabinets from above during installation. Thiseliminates the hidden risks in the normal running of the equipment.

l During installation, keep the surface of the cabinet from being scratched.


Procedure

Step 1 Remove the screws on the package accessories with a crosshead screwdriver.

Step 2 Remove all the screws on the package board, and then remove the package board.


Step 4 Put away the removed package accessories in a cardboard box.

----End

PostrequisiteAfter removing the package accessories, you can position the supports.





4-5

Prerequisitel Make sure that the required material is available. Make sure that the line drawing template

and floor plan are available.l Make sure that the tools such as spirit level, panel lifter, ink fountain, marking pen, are

available.

ContextThe N66-22 or H66-22 cabinet is installed on the S600A supports.

CAUTIONDetermine the installation position of the cabinets based on the construction engineeringdrawings. Keep sufficient space (not less than 800 mm, that is, 2.6 ft.) around the cabinets tofacilitate the maintenance and operation.

l The line drawing template is made from paper. Its shape is easy to be changed. Therefore,measure the template based on the construction plan before using this template. If the shapeof the line drawing template is changed, determine the positions of the expansion screwswith a spirit level.

l The half-circle gap on the template faces the front side of the cabinet.

Procedure

Step 1 Determine the positions of supports according to the construction engineering drawings.

CAUTIONl The distance between the front sides of two rows of cabinets is not less than 1800 mm [5.9

ft.].l The side of the cabinet that is closest to the wall is at least 800 mm [2.6 ft.] away from the

wall.l For front-access H66-22 cabinets, the back sides of the cabinets that are closest to the wall

are at least 50 mm [1.96 in.] away from the wall. The front sides are at least 800 mm [2.6 ft.]away from the wall.

l For rear-access N66-22 cabinets, the front sides and the back sides of the cabinets that areclosest to the wall are at least 800 mm [2.6 ft.] away from the wall.

l The equipment room must have the path that is 1000 mm [3.3 ft.] wide.

Step 2 Move the ESD-preventive floor on installation site with a panel lifter.

Step 3 Remove the supporting components of the ESD-preventive floor.

Step 4 Clean the installation site.

Step 5 Determine whether to draw lines with line drawing template.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

If ... Then ...

Draw lines with line drawing template Go to Step 6.

Draw lines without using line drawing template Go to Step 7.

Step 6 Use the line drawing template.

CAUTIONl The line drawing template is made from paper. Its shape is easy to be changed. Therefore,

measure the template based on the construction engineering plan before using this template.If the shape of the line drawing template is changed, determine the positions of holes ofexpansion bolts with a spirit level.


1. Determine the starting point of the front sides of the cabinets according to floor plan. Drawa baseline along the cabinet row based on the starting point.

2. Place the line drawing template on the floor based on the cabinet layout. Figure 4-3 showsthe method for installing the line drawing template. The half-circle gap on the templatefaces the front side of the cabinet.

Figure 4-3 Line drawing template (for installation on the ESD-preventive floor-unit: mm)

460 600

600

354

3. Mark the hole positions for four expansion bolts on the floor based on the template. Then,mark the hole positions of all expansion bolts.




4-7

4. Go to Step 8.

Step 7 If the on-site conditions cannot meet the requirements for using the line drawing template,perform the following steps:1. Determine the baseline (parallel to the front side of the cabinet) based on the floor plan.2. Choose the proper cabinet model to determine the positions of mounting holes.

l Draw the positions of supports and fixing holes for the N66-22 cabinets based on Figure4-4 or Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-4 Mounting holes of the supports for a single cabinet (unit: mm)

800

800

460 600

600

354

800

4 - 16

800




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 4-5 Mounting holes of supports for multiple cabinets in a row (unit: mm)

800

800

600

600800

800

354

460

600 600

354 354

4 - 16

l Draw the positions of supports and fixing holes for the H66-22 cabinets based on Figure

4-6, Figure 4-7, or Figure 4-8.

Figure 4-6 Mounting holes of the supports for a single cabinet (unit: mm)

50

800

460 600

600

354

800

4 - 16

800




4-9


50

800

600

600800 800

354

460

600 600

354 354

4 - 16

Figure 4-8 Mounting holes of supports for back-to-back cabinets in two rows (unit:mm)

800

800

600

600

800

800

354

460

600 600

354 354

4N - 16

600 600

460 600

140

Step 8 Check the position marks carefully to ensure accuracy.

----End




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

PostrequisiteAfter positioning the supports, you can install expansion bolts.


Prerequisitel Make sure that the spare part is available. The expansion bolts M12x30 are required.

l Make sure that the tool is available. The percussion drills (bit Ф14, bit Ф16), vacuumcleaners, glasses, dustproof coverings for electronic products, and rubber hammers arerequired.

Context

CAUTIONl When using the percussion drill, ensure that your eyes are at least 50 cm [19.7 in.] away from

the drill bit.l Keep the drill bit vertical to the ground during drilling, and hold the drill handle tightly with

two hands to keep it straight and stable; otherwise, vibrations may damage the floor or makea tilted hole.

l Remove the dust with a vacuum cleaner when drilling.

l Before the expansion tube is driven into the ground, the guiding rib on the expansion nutmust be inserted into the guiding slot on the expansion tube. After the expansion tube isdriven into the ground, the top of the tube must be flush with the ground.

Procedure

Step 1 If the ground is too hard or smooth to settle the drill bit, punch a sample pit first for easy drilling.Refer to Figure 4-9.




4-11

Figure 4-9 Method for drilling a hole

Step 2 Drill holes for the expansion bolts by using the percussion drill with bit φ16. The depth of theholes must be 52 mm [2.0 in.] to 60 mm [2.4 in.]. Make sure that all the holes are vertical andthe depths of them are the same. Refer to Figure 4-10.

Figure 4-10 Drilling a hole

Step 3 After drilling the holes, clean the dust inside and outside the holes.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Step 4 The depth of all the holes ranges from 52 mm [2.0 in.] to 60 mm [2.4 in.]; otherwise, adjust thedepth with the percussion drill. Then remove the dust inside and outside the holes with a vacuumcleaner.

Step 5 Measure the distance between the holes, and place the supports to check if the supports and holesmatch exactly. For the holes with big deviation, plan and drill new holes before installingexpansion bolts.

Step 6 Check the components of the expansion bolts. Figure 4-11 shows the appearance of theexpansion bolt. Insert the guiding rib on the expansion nut into the guiding slot of the expansiontube, and then vertically put expansion bolts into the hole.

Figure 4-11 Components of the expansion bolts

1

4

5

6

7

23

1. M12 bolt 2. Spring washer 12 3. Flat washer 12 4. Expansion tube

5. Expansion nut 6. Guiding slot 7. Guiding rib

Step 7 Use a claw hammer to strike the expansion tube into the hole completely. Refer to Figure4-12. Note that the expansion bolts are flush with the floor.




4-13

Figure 4-12 Installation of the expansion tube and the expansion nut (1)

Step 8 Use a spanner to unscrew the expansion bolt, spring washer, and flat washer. Refer to Figure4-13.


Step 9 Check whether the top of the expansion tube is flush with the floor. Refer to Figure 4-14.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Note if the expansion tube is not flush with the floor，use a claw hammer to strike the expansiontube into the hole completely.

Figure 4-14 Installed expansion bolts

----End


Prerequisitel Make sure that the support and guide rail are available.

l Make sure that the bolt M12x30, nut M12, bolt M12x60, spring washer 12, flat washer 12,and big flat washer are available.

l Make sure that the torque spanner, tape, and spanner are available.

Procedure

Step 1 Adjust the support.1. Measure the height between the cement floor and the top of the ESD-preventive floor.2. Adjust the support to make the support reading be the same as the measured height.3. Fasten the height-locking bolts in the middle, and then fasten the height-locking bolts at

two sides with a torque spanner. The torque spanner is set to 45 Nm. Refer to Figure4-15.




4-15

Figure 4-15 Adjusting the support

1

23

6

4

5

7

1. Upper support 2. Lower support 3. Height mark of the ESD-preventive floor

4. Height-locking bolt (middle) 5. Height-locking bolt (at twosides)

6. Mounting hole to the floor

7. Connection hole to guide rail

Step 2 Install guide rails.1. Assemble the support and the guide rail with the bolt M12x30, spring washer, and flat

washer. Adjust the support to make the diagonal lines A and B of the two guide rails areequal in length. Refer to Figure 4-16.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 4-16 Assembling supports and guide rails

1

A

B

2

3

4

5

1. Guide rail 2. Support 3. M12x30 bolt

4. Spring washer 12 5. Flat washer 12

2. Fasten all bolts with a spanner.

Step 3 Fix supports.

CAUTIONInstall all the supports before installing a row of cabinets.

1. Align the support installation holes with the mapping expansion bolt holes.

Align all supports by front side and keep the spacing between adjacent supports as 128 mm[5.0 in.] for convenience of combining cabinets. Refer to Figure 4-17.

If the installation holes and the expansion bolt hole are not in the same line, readjust theinstallation holes.




4-17

Figure 4-17 Positions of supports

128

128

2. Fit the spring washers and flat washers on bolts M12x30.

3. Insert the bolts vertically into the expansion bolt holes through the support installationholes.

4. Screw bolts M12x30 to 45 Nm with the torque spanner. Refer to Figure 4-18.

Figure 4-18 Fixing supports

1

2

3

4

5

1. Spirit level 2. M12x30 bolt 3. Spring washer 12

4. Big flat washer 5. Leveling washer




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Step 4 Level supports.

CAUTIONl Positioning supports is the basic work for hardware installation. Accurate positioning is the

prerequisite to guarantee the quality of the overall installation. Inaccurate positioning causesinconvenience for subsequent installation.

l Check the horizontal level of the supports after installing the supports for a row of cabinets.

l The washer for leveling the supports must be installed between the support and the floor.

l The horizontal deviation must be less than 5 mm [0.19 in.].

1. Check whether the guide rails in the front and at the back of the supports are horizontal byperforming the following steps.l Place the spirit level along the guide rails.

l Place the spirit level vertically on the guide rails.

l Place the spirit level in a cross manner.

Refer to Figure 4-18.2. Check the horizontal level of the supports. If the horizontal deviation is greater than 5 mm

[0.19 in.], loosen the expansion bolts with a torque spanner. Then, insert washers betweenthe supports and the floor to keep the cabinet horizontal.

Step 5 Install holder fixing components on the ESD-preventive floor.1. The holder fixing components must be fixed under the guide rails. Install one holder fixing

component under the front and back guide rail respectively. Refer to Figure 4-19.




4-19

Figure 4-19 Installing the holder fixing components

2

1

3

4 21

3

5

1. M12x30 bolt 2. Spring washer 12 3. Flat washer 12

4. Fixing component for front floor holder 5. Fixing component for side floor holder

2. Fasten all bolts with a spanner.

----End

PostrequisiteAfter installing the supports, fix the cabinet.

4.6 Installing Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive FloorThis describes how to fix the cabinets on supports and level them.

Prerequisitel Make sure that the cabinets are available.

l Make sure that the insulating plate, M12 bolt, M12 nut, spring washer 12, and flat washer12 are available.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

l Make sure that the carrying cart, spirit level, torque spanner, and crosshead screwdriver areavailable.

Context

CAUTIONTo ensure that the whole set of equipment is insulated from the ground before protectiongrounding cables are connected, the following requirements must be met: The insulating platesbetween each cabinet and the guide rail are installed. The insulation tubes for fixing holes onthe lower enclosure frame of the cabinet are installed.

Procedure

Step 1 Fix cabinets.1. Determine the front side of the cabinet. Place the cabinet on the guide rails. Align the four

fixing holes on the cabinet with the corresponding holes on the guide rails.2. Take off the plastic coverings on the fixing holes of the lower enclosure frame of the cabinet.

Align the four fixing holes on the cabinet with the corresponding holes on the guide rails.Refer to Figure 4-20.




4-21

Figure 4-20 Disassembling plastic coverings

3. Lift one side of the cabinet and place one insulating plate on each guide rail. Align the holes

on insulating plate with the corresponding expansion bolt holes. Two insulating plates areused for each cabinet (one for the front and one for the back of the cabinet). Refer to Figure4-21.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 4-21 Fixing cabinets

1

3

5

6

7

8

4

2

1. M12 bolt 2. Spring washer 12 3. Big flat washer 4. Insulation covering

5. Insulating plate 6. Leveling washer 7. Flat washer 12 8. Nut 12

4. Fix the spring washers on M12x45 bolts. The plain washer and insulation coverings arealready installed in the cabinet.

5. Insert the expansion bolt vertically into the connecting hole of the guide rail through thelower enclosure frame of the cabinet. Fix the flat washer and nut.

6. Fasten the bolts to 45 Nm. Fasten the bolts alternately to reduce stress between the boltsand the cabinet.




4-23

Step 2 Level cabinets.

CAUTIONl Leveling cabinets is fundamental to ensuring the quality of the whole hardware installation.

Inaccuracy causes inconvenience of subsequent installation.l When a row of cabinets are installed, install the first cabinet and level it horizontally and

vertically. Then, install other cabinets without leveling them. After installing all cabinets,combine and level them.

l In leveling cabinets, washers must be inserted between the insulating plate and the floor. Donot insert them between the insulating plate and cabinet. Otherwise, the insulation fails.

l The horizontal deviation must be less than 5 mm [0.19 in.], and the vertical deviation mustbe less than 3 mm [0.11 in.].

1. Place a spirit level on the door lintel on the top of the cabinet to check the horizontal levelof the cabinet. Refer to Figure 4-22. If the horizontal deviation is greater than 5 mm [0.19in.], loosen the expansion bolts with a torque spanner. Then, insert washers between theinsulating plate and the support to keep the cabinet horizontal.

Figure 4-22 Leveling cabinets (1)

2. Place a spirit level on the side panel of the cabinet to check the vertical level of the cabinet.

Refer to Figure 4-23. If the vertical deviation is greater than 3 mm [0.11 in.], adjust thewashers between the insulating plates and the floor to keep the cabinet vertical.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)


3. Check whether the horizontal and vertical deviations are within the specified range with a

spirit level. If not, adjust the washer. Then, fasten the expansion bolt to 45 Nm with a torquespanner.

Step 3 Test the insulation between expansion bolts and cabinets.1. Set the multimeter to megohm range.2. Connect one probe of the multimeter to the expansion bolt and the other to the grounding

bolt of a cabinet to measure the impedance between them. Refer to Figure 4-24.




4-25

Figure 4-24 Testing the insulation

CAUTIONIf the measured resistance is less than five mega ohms, remove all components, check ifany insulation part is damaged or not installed. Ensure that all the insulation parts areproperly installed. Fix the cabinet and measure the resistance again.

3. Insert the plastic covering to the mounting hole of the lower enclosure frame. Refer toFigure 4-25.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 4-25 Installing plastic coverings

----End


Context

CAUTIONl When the cabinets are combined with a DC power distribution cabinet, install the side panels

of the DC power distribution cabinet first, and then install other cabinets. Note that the sidepanels of the DC power distribution cabinet connected with other cabinets must be installed.

l When a row of cabinets are combined, the side panels of the cabinets in the middle are notinstalled and only the side panels of the cabinets on both ends are installed.

l Install the side panel first, and then lay out the cables for installation.

ProcedureStep 1 Check whether the connecting plates on the top of the cabinets are complete. Refer to Figure

4-26.




4-27

Figure 4-26 Connecting plates between cabinets

1

1. Connecting plate for combining cabinets

Step 2 Disassemble the connecting plates, and then reassemble them according to Figure 4-27. Ifmultiple H66-22 cabinets are installed in back-to-back way, refer to Figure 4-28.

Figure 4-27 Installing connecting plates for combined cabinets

1

2

3




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 4-28 Installing connecting plates for multiple H66-22 cabinets in back-to-back way

1 2

3

Step 3 Check whether the horizontal and vertical deviations of a row of cabinets are within the specifiedrange with a spirit level. Check whether the cabinets in rows are placed in a close and neat way.If the deviation exceeds the specified range, adjust the cabinets again.

----End




4-29

5 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets onthe ESD-Preventive Floor

About This Chapter

This describes how to install the normalized N66-22 cabinets on the ESD-preventive floor.

PrerequisiteMake sure that the following preparations are completed before installing the cabinet.

l Ensure that the ESD-Preventive floor is clean.


ContextFigure 5-1 shows the procedure for installing cabinets on the ESD-preventive floor.




5-1


Position cabinets

Start

Install supports

Install cabinets

Test the insulation

Position supports

Pass?

Combine cabinets

End

No

Yes

If the cabinetsneed to beattached?

Yes

No

Figure 5-2 shows a single cabinet installed on an ESD-Preventive floor.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 5-2 A single cabinet installed on an ESD-Preventive floor

Figure 5-3 shows several cabinets installed on an ESD-Preventive floor.

Figure 5-3 Several cabinets installed on an ESD-Preventive floor








5-3

PostrequisiteAfter installing the cabinet on the ESD-preventive floor, you can connect the protection ground(PGND) cables and power cables for the cabinet.






5.6 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive FloorThis describes how to fix the normalized N66-22 cabinet on the N6X support, level thenormalized N66-22 cabinet, and perform insulation tests.





Issue 02 (2009-01-09)


Installation Specificationsl Each row of cabinets along the main walkway must be straight. The vertical error cannot


l Wear clean gloves when touching the surfaces of cabinets or frames.

NOTE

The cabinets without the front, back doors and the side panels are called racks.


cabinet (such as cabling rack installation and cable layout) are completed. Therefore, thedust and metal scraps do not drop into the cabinets from above during installation. Thiseliminates the hidden risks in the normal running of the equipment.



Procedure

Step 1 Remove the four wooden packing accessories from the right and left of the rack respectively.Refer to Figure 5-4.




5-5

Figure 5-4 Removing the packing accessories

Step 2 Pull down the hook pin at the upper part of the front and rear doors and then remove the frontand rear doors. Refer to Figure 5-5.

Figure 5-5 Removing the cabinet doors




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Remove and place the cabinet doors on the floor and keep them unlock; otherwise, the lowerlatch will slide downwards and may bend and snap because of the weight of the doors. Refer toFigure 5-6.

Figure 5-6 Placing the cabinet doors

----End




5-7



Prerequisitel Make sure that the required material is available. Make sure that the line drawing template

and floor plan are available.

l Make sure that the tools such as spirit level, panel lifter, ink fountain, marking pen, areavailable.

Context

The normalized N66-22 cabinet is installed on the N6X normalized supports.

Procedure

Step 1 Determine the positions of supports according to the construction engineering drawings.

CAUTIONThe recommended distance between the back door of the front-access cabinet and the wall orthe obstacle is not less than 100 mm [4 in.].

Step 2 Move the ESD-preventive floor on installation site with a panel lifter.

Step 3 Remove the supporting components of the ESD-preventive floor.

Step 4 Clean the installation site.

Step 5 Determine whether to draw lines with line drawing template.

If ... Then ...



Step 6 Draw the line with the line drawing template.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)


measure the template based on the construction engineering plan before using this template.If the shape of the line drawing template is changed, determine the positions of holes ofexpansion bolts with a spirit level.



2. Place the line drawing template on the floor based on the cabinet layout. Figure 5-7 showsline drawing template.

Figure 5-7 Line drawing template for installation on the ESD-preventive floor (unit: mm)

Installation hole

448

504 600

600

3. Mark the hole positions for four expansion bolts on the floor based on the template.4. Lay out the templates side by side and ensure that there is 600 mm [23.6 in.] between the

center lines of two adjacent templates when combining cabinets. Use a marker pen to markinstallation holes on the cement floor. Refer to Figure 5-8.

Figure 5-8 Installing the side-by-side line drawing template for installation on the ESD-preventive floor (unit: mm)

600

5. Go to Step 8.

Step 7 If the on-site conditions cannot meet the requirements for using the line drawing template,perform the following steps:




5-9

1. Determine the baseline (parallel to the front side of the cabinet) based on the floor plan.2. Specify the holes for fixing the supports on the ground. Refer to Figure 5-9, Figure 5-10

or Figure 5-11.

Figure 5-9 Mounting holes of supports for a single cabinet (unit: mm)

Contour Lineof Cabinets

Installation hole

504

448

600

600



Installationhole

504

448 448448

600 600

The wall or Obstacles

600

600 600 600




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 5-11 Mounting holes of supports for back-to-back cabinets in two rows (unit: mm)

504 600

600

600 600

504

448 448

Installation hole


600

600

Step 8 After marking the reference lines, check the hole positions with a ruler.

----End

PostrequisiteAfter positioning the supports, you can install expansion bolts.



l Make sure that the tool is available. The percussion drills (bit Ф16), vacuum cleaners,glasses, dustproof coverings for electronic products, and claw hammer are required.




5-11

Context






Procedure

Step 1 If the floor surface is too hard or too smooth to settle the drill bit, use the chisel to punch a pitbefore drilling. Refer to Figure 5-12.

Figure 5-12 Settling the drill bit

Step 2 Drill holes for the expansion bolts by using the percussion drill with bit φ16. The depth of theholes must be 52 mm [2.0 in.] to 60 mm [2.4 in.]. Make sure that all the holes are vertical andthe depths of them are the same.

Clean the holes with a vacuum cleaner when drilling. Refer to Figure 5-13.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 5-13 Drilling holes

52 mm-60 mm

90。




Step 6 Check the components of the expansion bolts. Figure 5-14 shows the appearance of theexpansion bolt. Insert the guiding rib on the expansion nut into the guiding slot of the expansiontube, and then fasten the expansion bolt clockwise slightly until the guiding rib cannot fall outof the guiding slot. Then vertically put expansion bolts into the hole.




5-13


1

4

5

6

7

23

1. M12x60 bolt 2. Spring washer 12 3. Flat washer 12 4. Expansion tube



Figure 5-15 Installing the expansion tube

Step 8 Fasten the expansion bolt clockwise slightly until the nut cannot fall out of the bolt. Refer to 1in Figure 5-16. Turn the bolt counterclockwise, remove it and take off the spring washer andflat washer. Refer to 2 in Figure 5-16.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 5-16 Unscrewing the bolt and accessories

1 2




----End





5-15

Prerequisitel Make sure that the support and guide rail, are available.

l Make sure that the bolt M12x30, nut M12, bolt M12x60, spring washer 12, flat washer 12,and big flat washer are available.

l Make sure that the torque spanner, tape, and spanner are available.

Context

When the normalized N66-22 cabinet is installed on the ESD-preventive floor, the N6Xnormalized supports must be used.

Procedure

Step 1 Tighten the six M8x20 assembly screws. Refer to Figure 5-18.

Figure 5-18 Tightening the assembly screws

1

2

3

1. M8x20 combination screw 2. Height-locking bolt (side) 3. Height-locking bolt (middle)

Step 2 Adjust the height of the support.

1. Measure the height between the cement floor and the top of the ESD-preventive floor.

2. Adjust the support to make the support reading be the same as the measured height.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

3. Fasten the height-locking bolts in the middle, and then fasten the height-locking bolts attwo sides with a torque spanner. The torque spanner is set to 45 N•m. Figure 5-18 showsthe height-locking bolt.

Step 3 Install guide rails.1. Place the slide rails on the support. Align the installation holes of the slide rail with the

holes of the support.2. Assemble the support with the slide rail by using M12x30 bolts, spring washers, and flat

washers. Refer to Figure 5-19.3. Adjust the support location and ensure that the diagonal lines of the two slide rails are equal

in length. The deviation should be less than 2 mm.4. Use a combination spanner to screw all bolts.

Figure 5-19 Installing slide rails

1

2 3

4

5

1. Support 2. Slide rail 3. M12x30 bolt

4. Spring washer 5. Flat washer

Step 4 Level and fix the supports of a single cabinet.1. Align the installation holes of the support with the holes on the floor. Fix the spring washer

and flat washer on the M12x60 bolt. Refer to Figure 5-20.




5-17

Figure 5-20 Level and fix the supports of a single cabinet

1

2

9

3

45

6

78

1. Support 2. Slide rail 3. M12x60 bolt

4. Spring washer 5. Flat washer 6. Leveling washer

7. Expansion tube 8. Expansion nut 9. Spirit level

2. Insert the bolt into the expansion bolt hole vertically through the installation hole of the

support, and then adjust the support.3. Place the spirit level along the guide rails, vertically on the guide rails, and in a cross manner

on the guide rails. Check the horizontal level of the supports. If the support is not horizontal,put pads under the support.

4. Screw the four expansion bolts to 45 N•m with a torque spanner.

Step 5 Level and fix the side-by-side supports.1. Adjust supports before fixing them. Ensure that the front ends of the supports are in the

same line.2. Put the insulation plates on the two adjacent slide rails. Align the semicircular gaps of the

insulation plates with the holes of the two slide rails respectively and install the M12x35bolts to fix the insulation plates. Follow the same steps to adjust the space between thesupports by using the insulation plates.

Figure 5-21 shows the appearance of the insulation plate. Figure 5-22 shows the positionsof supports.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 5-21 Appearance of the insulation plate

1. Locating hole for supports of combined cabinets 2. Installation hole

Figure 5-22 Positions of supports

1. M12x35 bolt 2. Insulation plate

3. Check if the support is horizontal by using the spirit level. If the support is not horizontal,put pads under the support.

4. Fix the supports with height-locking bolts. Then, remove the bolts and insulation boards.Keep them well because they are used when you fix cabinets.

----End

PostrequisiteAfter installing the supports, fix the cabinet.

5.6 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the ESD-Preventive Floor

This describes how to fix the normalized N66-22 cabinet on the N6X support, level thenormalized N66-22 cabinet, and perform insulation tests.




5-19



l Make sure that the carrying cart, spirit level, torque spanner, socket spanner, and crossheadscrewdriver are available.

Context


Procedure

Step 1 Fix cabinets.

1. Push the lock of the air filter. Lift up the air filter slightly and take it out of the slide railfrom the bottom of the cabinet. Refer to Figure 5-23.

Figure 5-23 Removing the Air Filter




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

2. Place the cabinet on the slide rails and align the installation holes of the cabinet with theholes of the slide rails.

3. Fit the spring washer, flat washer, and insulation tube on the four M12x35 bolts. Insertthem into the installation holes and tighten the bolts a bit, but do not fasten them. Refer toFigure 5-24.

Figure 5-24 Placing the cabinet

1

2

3

4

5

1. Bolt 2. Spring washer 3. Flat washer

4. Insulation tube 5. Insulation plate

4. Lift one side of the cabinet and put two insulation plates under each cabinet. Align the holes

of the insulation plate with the holes of the slide rail.


1. Place spirit levels at the bottom of the cabinet and in the front of the side columns to checkwhether the cabinet is horizontal. If not, adjust the adjusting anchor by using a socketspanner. Refer to Figure 5-25.




5-21

Figure 5-25 Leveling the cabinet

1

2

3

1. M12×35 bolt 2. Adjusting anchor 3. Spirit level

2. When the cabinet is horizontal, fasten the four M12x35 bolts to 45 N•m with a torque

spanner. Fasten the bolts alternately to reduce stress between the bolts and the cabinet.

Step 3 Test the insulation between expansion bolts and cabinets.1. Set the multimeter to read mega ohms.2. Connect one probe of the multimeter to the expansion bolt and the other to the grounding





Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 5-26 Testing the insulation of the cabinet


3. Put the air filter back along the slide rail at the bottom of the cabinet, and then press downthe air filter to the lock. Refer to Figure 5-27.




5-23

Figure 5-27 Restoring the Air Filter

----End


Context

CAUTIONl When a row of cabinets are combined, the side panels of the cabinets in the middle are not

installed and only the side panels of the cabinets on both ends are installed.l Both the gap between cabinets and the vertical shift should be less than 3 mm.

l The rear access cabinet can not be combined back to back.

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether the connecting plates on the top of the cabinets are complete.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Step 2 Remove the connecting plates on the lintels of the front and rear doors and install them again asshown in Figure 5-28.

Figure 5-28 Installing the connecting plates

Step 3 Use the spirit level to check and ensure that the bottom line of the cabinet is horizontal and thefront line of the column is vertical. Place spirit levels at the bottom of the cabinets of a row andin the front of the side columns to check whether the horizontal and vertical errors are withinthe normal range (equal to or less than 3 mm) and whether supports in a row are well placed. Ifnot, adjust the cabinets properly. Refer to Figure 5-29.

Figure 5-29 Leveling the combined cabinets

----End




5-25

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on theCement Floor

About This Chapter

This describes how to install the N66-22 and H66-22 cabinets on the cement floor.

PrerequisiteBefore the installation, ensure that the following preparations are completed.

l The cement floor in the equipment room is clean.


ContextFigure 6-1 shows the procedure for installing cabinets on the cement floor.

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide 6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement Floor


6-1


Start

Removing packageaccessories

Locating cabinets

Installing expansion bolts

Fixing cabinets on the cementfloor

Testing the insulation

End

Attach the cabinets

Pass?

If the cabinets need tobe attached?

Yes

Yes

No

No

Figure 6-2 shows the installed cabinet.

6 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinets on the Cement FloorHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 6-2 Installed cabinets





PostrequisiteAfter installing the cabinet on the cement floor, proceed with 8 Connecting PGND cables andpower cables for cabinets.

6.1 Installation Specifications and PrecautionsRead this part carefully before installing the cabinets. Familiarizing with the installationspecifications and precautions can avoid reconstructing and damage to devices and injury tohuman bodies.


6.3 Positioning CabinetsPositioning cabinets refers to determining the position to install the cabinets on the floor.Positioning cabinets is fundamental in ensuring the quality of the whole hardware installation.Inaccuracy causes inconvenience in subsequent installation.


6.5 Fixing Cabinets on the Cement FloorThis describes how to fix the cabinets on the cement floor and level them.

6.6 Attaching the Cabinets



6-3

This describes how to attach the cabinets. When installing two or more cabinets side by side,connect them by using connecting plates. The connecting plates for combined cabinets arelocated at the top of the cabinet and delivered with the cabinet.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)


Installation Specificationsl Each row of racks along the main walkway must be straight. The vertical error cannot


l Wear gloves when touching the surfaces of cabinets or frames.

NOTE

The cabinets without the front, back and the side panels are called racks.


cabinet (such as cabling rack installation and cable layout) are completed. Therefore, thedust and metal scraps do not drop into the cabinet from above during installation. Thiseliminates the hidden risks in the normal running of the equipment.



Procedure


Step 2 Remove all the screws on the package board, and then remove the package board.


Step 4 Put away the removed package accessories in a cardboard box.

----End


6.3 Positioning CabinetsPositioning cabinets refers to determining the position to install the cabinets on the floor.Positioning cabinets is fundamental in ensuring the quality of the whole hardware installation.Inaccuracy causes inconvenience in subsequent installation.



6-5

Prerequisitel Make sure that line drawing template and floor plan are available.

l Make sure that the tools such as spirit level, ink fountain, and marking pen, are available.

Context

CAUTIONDetermine the installation position for the cabinets based on the construction plan. Keep at least800-mm [3.1 in.] space in the front and back of a cabinet for convenient maintenance andoperation.

Procedure

Step 1 Determine the positions of cabinets according to the construction engineering drawings.

CAUTIONl The distance between the front sides of two rows of cabinets is not less than 1800 mm [5.9

ft.].l The side of the cabinet that is closest to the wall is at least 800 mm [2.6 ft.] away from the

wall.l For a front-access H66-22 cabinet, the back sides of the cabinets that are closest to the wall

are at least 50 mm [1.9 in.] away from the wall. The front sides are at least 800 mm [2.6 ft.]away from the wall.

l For rear-access N66-22 cabinets, the front sides and the back sides of the cabinets that areclosest to the wall are at least 800 mm [2.6 ft.] away from the wall.

l The equipment room must have the path that is 1000 mm [3.3 ft.] wide.

Step 2 Determine whether to draw lines with the line drawing template.

If ... Then ...



Step 3 Use the line drawing template.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)


measure the template according to the construction plan before using this template. If theshape of the line drawing template is changed, locate the positions of the expansion boltswith a spirit level.



2. Place the line drawing template on the floor according to the cabinet layout. Refer to Figure6-3.

Figure 6-3 Line drawing template (unit: mm)

460 600

600

380

3. Mark the hole positions for four expansion bolts on the floor based on the template. Then,

mark the hole positions of all expansion bolts. Figure 6-4 shows the positions of allexpansion bolts.



6-7

Figure 6-4 Picture of line drawing template

4. Go to Step 5.

Step 4 If the on-site conditions cannot meet the requirements for using the line drawing template,perform the following steps:

1. Determine the baseline (parallel to the front side of the cabinet) based on the floor plan.

2. Choose the proper cabinet model.

l Draw the positions of supports and fixing holes for the N66-22 cabinets based on Figure6-5 or Figure 6-6.

Figure 6-5 Hole positions for installing a single cabinet (unit: mm)

800

800

460 600

600

380

800

4 - 16

800


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 6-6 Hole positions for installing cabinets in a row (unit: mm)

800

800

600

600800

800

380

460

600 600

380 380

4 - 16

l Draw the positions of supports and fixing holes for the H66-22 cabinets based on Figure6-7, Figure 6-8, or Figure 6-9.

Figure 6-7 Hole positions for installing a single cabinet (unit: mm)

800

800

460 600

600

380

800

4 - 16

800



6-9

Figure 6-8 Hole positions for installing cabinets in a row (unit: mm)

50

800

600

600800 800

380

460

600 600

380 380

4 - 16

Figure 6-9 Hole positions for installing back-to-back cabinets in a row (unit: mm)

800

800

600

600

800

800

380

460

600 600

380 380

4 - 16

600460

140

Step 5 Check the position marks carefully to ensure accuracy.

----End

PostrequisiteAfter positioning the cabinets, you can install expansion bolts.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)



l Make sure that the tool is available. The percussion drills (bit Ф14, bit Ф16), vacuumcleaners, glasses, dustproof coverings for electronic products, and rubber hammers arerequired.

Context






Procedure

Step 1 If the ground is too hard or smooth to settle the drill bit, punch a sample pit first for easy drilling.Refer to Figure 6-10.



6-11

Figure 6-10 Method for drilling a hole

Step 2 Drill holes for the expansion bolts by using the percussion drill with bit φ16. The depth of theholes must be 52 mm [2.0 in.] to 60 mm [2.4 in.]. Make sure that all the holes are vertical andthe depths of them are the same. Refer to Figure 6-11.

Figure 6-11 Drilling a hole



Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)



Step 6 Check the components of the expansion bolts. Figure 6-12 shows the appearance of theexpansion bolt. Insert the guiding rib on the expansion nut into the guiding slot of the expansiontube, and then vertically put expansion bolts into the hole.


1

4

5

6

7

23

1. M12 bolt 2. Spring washer 12 3. Flat washer 12 4. Expansion tube





6-13


Step 8 Use a spanner to unscrew the expansion bolt, spring washer, and flat washer. Refer to Figure6-14.




Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)



----End

6.5 Fixing Cabinets on the Cement FloorThis describes how to fix the cabinets on the cement floor and level them.



l Make sure that the carrying cart, spirit level, torque spanner, and crosshead screwdriver areavailable.

Context


ProcedureStep 1 Fix cabinets.

1. Determine the front side of the cabinet. Place the cabinet on the guide rails. Align the fouramounting holes at the bottom of the cabinet with the holes of the guide rail.

2. Take off the plastic coverings on the amounting holes of the lower enclosure frame of thecabinet. Refer to Figure 6-16.



6-15

Figure 6-16 Disassembling plastic coverings

3. Lift one side of the cabinet and lay out one insulating plate. Align the amounting holes of

the insulating plate with the holes of corresponding expansion bolts. Two insulating platesare used for each cabinet (one for the front and the other one for the back of the cabinet).Refer to Figure 6-17.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 6-17 Fixing cabinets on the cement floor

1

3

5

6

4

2

1. M12x60 bolt 2. Spring washer 12 3. Plain washer

4. Insulation covering 5. Insulating plate 6. Leveling washer

4. Fix the spring washers on M12x45 bolts. The big plain washers and insulation coverings

are already installed in the cabinet.5. Insert the expansion bolts vertically into the expansion bolt holes through the lower

enclosure frame of the cabinet.6. Fasten the bolts to 45 Nm. Fasten the bolts alternately to reduce stress between the bolts

and cabinets.




6-17

CAUTIONl Leveling cabinets is fundamental in ensuring the quality of the whole hardware installation.

Inaccuracy causes inconvenience in subsequent installation.l When a row of cabinets are installed, install the first cabinet and level it horizontally and

vertically. Then install other cabinets without leveling them. After all cabinets are installed,combine and level them.

l The washers must be inserted between the insulating plate and the floor. Do not insert thembetween the insulating plate and cabinet. Otherwise, the insulation fails.

l The horizontal deviation of the supports must be less than 5 mm [0.19 in.], and the verticaldeviation must be less than 3 mm [0.11 in.].

1. Place a spirit level on the door lintel on the top of the cabinet to check the horizontal levelof the cabinet. Refer to Figure 6-18. If the horizontal deviation is greater than 5 mm [0.19in.], loosen the expansion bolts with a torque spanner. Then, insert washers between theinsulating plate and the supports to keep the cabinet horizontal.


2. Place a spirit level on the side panel of the cabinet to check the vertical level of the cabinet.

Refer to Figure 6-19. If the vertical deviation is greater than 3 mm [0.11 in.], adjust thewashers between the insulating plates and the floor to keep the cabinet vertical.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)


3. Check whether the horizontal and vertical deviations are within the specified range with a

spirit level. If not, adjust the washer. Then, fasten the expansion bolts to 45 Nm with atorque spanner.

Step 3 Test the insulation between expansion bolts and cabinets.1. Set the multimeter to megohm range.2. Connect one probe of the multimeter to the expansion bolt and the other to the grounding




6-19

Figure 6-20 Testing the insulation


3. Insert the plastic covering to the mounting hole of the lower enclosure frame. Refer toFigure 6-21.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 6-21 Installing plastic coverings

----End

PostrequisiteThe installation of cabinet on the cement floor is completed. After installing the cabinet, proceedwith 8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets.


Context

CAUTIONl When the cabinets are combined with a DC power distribution cabinet, install the side panels

of the DC power distribution cabinet first, and then install other cabinets. Note that the sidepanels of the DC power distribution cabinet connected with other cabinets must be installed.

l When a row of cabinets are combined, the side panels of the cabinets in the middle are notinstalled and only the side panels of the cabinets on both ends are installed.

l Install the side panel first, and then lay out the cables for installation.



6-21

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether the connecting plates on the top of the cabinets are complete. Refer to Figure6-22.

Figure 6-22 Connecting plates between cabinets

1

1. Connecting plate for combining cabinets

Step 2 Disassemble the connecting plates, and then reassemble them according to Figure 6-23. Ifmultiple H66-22 cabinets are installed in back-to-back way, refer to Figure 6-24.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 6-23 Installing connecting plates for combined cabinets

1

2

3



6-23

Figure 6-24 Installing connecting plates for multiple H66-22 cabinets in back-to-back way

1 2

3

Step 3 Check whether the horizontal and vertical deviations of a row of cabinets are within the specifiedrange with a spirit level. Check whether the cabinets in rows are placed in a close and neat way.If the deviation exceeds the specified range, adjust the cabinets again.

----End


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

7 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets onthe Cement Floor

About This Chapter

This describes how to install the normalized N66-22 cabinets on the cement floor.


l The cement floor in the equipment room is clean.


ContextFigure 7-1 shows the procedure for installing normalized N66-22 cabinets on the cement floor.


7 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinets on the CementFloor


7-1


Position cabinets

Start

Install cabinets

Test the insulation

Pass?

Combine cabinets

End

No

Yes

If the cabinetsneed to beattached?

No

Yes

Figure 7-2 shows a single cabinet installed on a concrete floor.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 7-2 A single cabinet installed on a concrete floor

Figure 7-3 shows several cabinets installed on a concrete floor.




7-3

Figure 7-3 Several cabinets installed on a concrete floor





PostrequisiteAfter installing the cabinet on the cement floor, proceed with 8 Connecting PGND cables andpower cables for cabinets.


7.2 Removing the Grounding Cables and Cabinet DoorsThe front and back doors are delivered with the cabinet. Before installing the cabinet, removethe front and back doors for future use.


7.4 Attaching the Cabinets




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

This describes how to attach the cabinets. When installing two or more cabinets side by side,connect them by using connecting plates. The connecting plates for combined cabinets arelocated at the top of the cabinet and delivered with the cabinet.




7-5


Installation Specificationsl Each row of racks along the main walkway must be straight. The vertical error cannot


l Wear gloves when touching the surfaces of cabinets or frames.

NOTE

The cabinets without the front, back and the side panels are called racks.


cabinet (such as cabling rack installation and cable layout) are completed. Therefore, thedust and metal scraps do not drop into the cabinet from above during installation. Thiseliminates the hidden risks in the normal running of the equipment.


7.2 Removing the Grounding Cables and Cabinet DoorsThe front and back doors are delivered with the cabinet. Before installing the cabinet, removethe front and back doors for future use.

Context

CAUTIONl When cabinets are installed back to back, the rear doors are not to be removed.

l For the coming use, put away the front door, rear door, and side panels of the cabinet andbolts.

Procedure

Step 1 Remove the grounding cables from the front door, rear door and side panel. One end of thegrounding cable is connected with the cabinet door. Refer to Figure 7-4.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 7-4 Removing the grounding cables

Step 2 Pull down the hook pin at the upper part of the door panel and remove the front door. Refer toFigure 7-5.

Figure 7-5 Removing the doors of the rear access cabinet




7-7

NOTE

Follow the same steps to remove the rear door.

Step 3 Unscrew the eight M5x10 screws of the rear door. Refer to Figure 7-6.

Figure 7-6 Removing the doors of the front access cabinet

Step 4 Unscrew the eight M6x12 screws on the side panel. Refer to Figure 7-7.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 7-7 Removing the side panels

----End

PostrequisiteAfter removing the grounding cables and doors, you can position the supports.



l Make sure that the tool is available. The percussion drills (bit Ф16), vacuum cleaners,glasses, dustproof coverings for electronic products, and claw hammer are required.




7-9

Context






Procedure

Step 1 If the floor surface is too hard or too smooth to settle the drill bit, use the chisel to punch a pitbefore drilling. Refer to Figure 7-8.

Figure 7-8 Settling the drill bit

Step 2 Drill holes for the expansion bolts by using the percussion drill with bit φ16. The depth of theholes must be 52 mm [2.0 in.] to 60 mm [2.4 in.]. Make sure that all the holes are vertical andthe depths of them are the same.

Clean the holes with a vacuum cleaner when drilling. Refer to Figure 7-9.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 7-9 Drilling holes

52 mm-60 mm

90。




Step 6 Check the components of the expansion bolts. Figure 7-10 shows the appearance of theexpansion bolt. Insert the guiding rib on the expansion nut into the guiding slot of the expansiontube, and then fasten the expansion bolt clockwise slightly until the guiding rib cannot fall outof the guiding slot. Then vertically put expansion bolts into the hole.




7-11


1

4

5

6

7

23

1. M12x60 bolt 2. Spring washer 12 3. Flat washer 12 4. Expansion tube



Figure 7-11 Installing the expansion tube

Step 8 Fasten the expansion bolt clockwise slightly until the nut cannot fall out of the bolt. Refer to 1in Figure 7-12. Turn the bolt counterclockwise, remove it and take off the spring washer andflat washer. Refer to 2 in Figure 7-12.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 7-12 Unscrewing the bolt and accessories

1 2




----End





7-13

Context

CAUTIONl When a row of cabinets are combined, the side panels of the cabinets in the middle are not

installed and only the side panels of the cabinets on both ends are installed.l Both the gap between cabinets and the vertical shift should be less than 3 mm.

l The rear access cabinet can not be combined back to back.

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether the connecting plates on the top of the cabinets are complete.

Step 2 Remove the connecting plates on the lintels of the front and rear doors and install them again asshown in Figure 7-14.

Figure 7-14 Installing the connecting plates

Step 3 Use the spirit level to check and ensure that the bottom line of the cabinet is horizontal and thefront line of the column is vertical. Place spirit levels at the bottom of the cabinets of a row andin the front of the side columns to check whether the horizontal and vertical errors are withinthe normal range (equal to or less than 3 mm) and whether supports in a row are well placed. Ifnot, adjust the cabinets properly. Refer to Figure 7-15.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 7-15 Leveling the combined cabinets

----End




7-15

8 Connecting PGND cables and power cablesfor cabinets

About This Chapter

This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables and power cables forcabinets.


l The cabinets are installed and checked.

l The routing diagram and cable mode comply with the engineering design.

l Tools required during installation are available.

ContextFigure 8-1 shows the procedure for connecting PGND cables and power cables.

Figure 8-1 Connection procedure

Start

Connecting PGND cables andpower cables between cabinets

and DC power distribution cabinets

Connecting interconnected PGNDcables between cabinets

End

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide 8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinets


8-1

PostrequisiteAfter connecting the PGND cables and power cables, proceed with 9 Installing InternalComponents.

8.1 Installation Specifications and PrecautionsRead this part carefully before connecting the power cables and PGND cables for the cabinets.Familiarizing with the installation specifications and precautions can avoid reconstructing anddamage to devices and injury to human bodies.

8.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND CablesThis describes the connection relationship of the power cables and protection ground (PGND)cables between the UMG8900 and the power distribution frame (PDF), and the connectionrelationship of the PGND cables between the cabinets.

8.3 Cabling Mode of Power CablesThis describes the cabling mode of the power cables and the protection ground (PGND) cablesbetween the UMG8900 and the power distribution frame (PDF).

8.4 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables Between Cabinets and DC Power DistributionCabinetsThis describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables, RTN cables, and –48 Vpower cables between the cabinets and DC power distribution cabinets.

8.5 Connecting Interconnected PGND Cables Between CabinetsThis describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables between or in theUMG8900 cabinets.

8 Connecting PGND cables and power cables for cabinetsHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

8.1 Installation Specifications and PrecautionsRead this part carefully before connecting the power cables and PGND cables for the cabinets.Familiarizing with the installation specifications and precautions can avoid reconstructing anddamage to devices and injury to human bodies.

Installation Specificationsl Place the power cables and PGND cables away from other cables. Bind them separately.

l Ensure that the power cables and PGND cables are placed straightly and curved smoothlyif necessary. Arrange the cables with different colors and bind them every 200 mm [7.9in.].

l After laying out the power cables and protection ground (PGND) cables, cut the rubbercover to match the size of the remaining space of the cabling hole.

l The PGND bar of the DC power distribution cabinet must be properly connected with thenearest PGND bar offered by the customer through the PGND bus cable.

l Before connecting power cables and PGND cables, measure the distance between thePGND bar and the DC power distribution cabinet, and that between the DC powerdistribution cabinet and connecting terminals of the PDF in the cabinet. Ensure that thecables are long enough to avoid shortage in actual wiring. If a cable is not long enough,replace it with a new one. Do not splice cables by making connectors or soldering.

l Before installation, mark or stick labels on both ends of each power cable and PGND cableto identify the device that the cable is connected to, and to ensure correct connection. Stickthe labels 30 mm [1.2 in.] from the ends of the cables.

Precautionsl Ensure that all switches are off when installing the power cables and PGND cables.

l Replace broken power cables and PGND cables with new ones.

l Ensure that the power cables and the PGND cables do not have any connector.

l Cut the redundant parts of the PGND cables and the power cables. Do not twist them. It isnot recommended to cut the redundant part of the power cable connecting to the lighteningprotection box. You can twist it if necessary.

l Do not expose the copper at the wiring terminals and lugs of the power cables and PGNDcables in the air. Mount the wiring terminals properly.

l Perform insulation processing on all tools before power-on operation.

8.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND CablesThis describes the connection relationship of the power cables and protection ground (PGND)cables between the UMG8900 and the power distribution frame (PDF), and the connectionrelationship of the PGND cables between the cabinets.

Figure 8-2 shows the connection of power cables and PGND cables between the DC powerdistribution cabinet and the cabinets of the UMG8900.



8-3

Figure 8-2 Cable distribution in the DC power distribution cabinets and the cabinets of theUMG8900

3

-48V2

GND

PGND

-48V1

1

2

4

GND

3 3

PGND

-48V1-48V2

BGNDPGND

-48V1-48V2

BGNDPGND

-48V1-48V2

BGND

1. Connecting to DC distributor 2. DC power distribution cabinet

3. Cabinets of the UMG8900 4. PGND bar in the equipment room

8.3 Cabling Mode of Power CablesThis describes the cabling mode of the power cables and the protection ground (PGND) cablesbetween the UMG8900 and the power distribution frame (PDF).

Cabling Mode on the UMG8900 Sidel Overhead cabling mode

Connect PGND cables, –48 V DC power cables and RTN working grounding cables(marked with BGND for earlier devices) to the terminals of the PDF through the cable-through hole on the top of the cabinet.

l Underfloor cabling modeIn underfloor cabling mode, the power cables and the PGND cables are led into the cabinetthrough the cabling-through hole on the side of the side panel at the bottom of the cabinet.The cables are placed along the cabling troughs on the side columns. Then, the cables areled into the cabling-through hole on the top of the cabinet. After that, the arrangement ofcables is the same as that in overhead cabling mode.

Cabling Mode on the Power Distribution Cabinet Sidel Overhead cabling mode on the power distribution cabinet side

Refer to Figure 8-3.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 8-3 Overhead cabling mode on the power distribution cabinet side

l Underfloor cabling mode on the power distribution cabinet side




8-5

Figure 8-4 Underfloor cabling mode on the power distribution cabinet side

1

4

8

7

5

210

12

13

14

15

9

11

3

6

1. BGND output terminal block 2. –48 V1 lead-in terminal block 3. –48 V 1 output terminal block

4. BGND lead-in terminal block(underfloor cabling mode)

5. –48 V1 lead-in terminal block 6. –48 V 2 output terminal block

7. PGND output connecting terminal 8. PGND lead-in terminal block 9. –48 V 1 output terminal block

10. BGND output terminal block 11. –48 V2 output terminal block 12. –48 V1 lead-in terminal block

13. BGND lead-in terminal block(underfloor cabling mode)

14. –48 V2 lead-in terminal block 15. PGND output terminal


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

8.4 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables BetweenCabinets and DC Power Distribution Cabinets

This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables, RTN cables, and –48 Vpower cables between the cabinets and DC power distribution cabinets.

Prerequisitel The switches of all power distribution boxes are set to OFF.

l Make sure that the PGND cables and power cables are available.

l Make sure that the cable ties and paraffin hemp ropes are available.

l Make sure that the diagonal pliers, hand hacksaw, wire clipper, spanner, and crossheadscrewdriver are available.

ContextFix the OT terminal at the DC distribution cabinet side. To fix the OT terminal firmly and toensure secure contact, insert flat washers and spring washers. Refer to Figure 8-5.

Figure 8-5 Connections of the OT terminals

3

4

5

6

1

2

1. Cable 2. Heat-shrinkable tube 3. Nut

4. Spring washer 5. Flat washer 6. Connection bolt



8-7

When the DC power distribution cabinet is unavailable, the installation is as follows:l The power cables leading from the –48 V1 and –48 V2 wiring terminals are connected to

the –48 V DC negative total line banks of the DC distributor and DC power.l The power cables leading from the RTN (used to be BGND) wiring terminals are connected

to the –48 V DC positive total line banks of the DC distributor and DC power.l The PGND cables in the cabinets are laid in the same way as that when the DC power

distribution cabinet is available.

CAUTIONl If the cable is not long enough, replace it with a new one. Do not splice cables by connectors

or soldering.l Do not expose the naked wires and the OT terminal handles after the heat-shrinkable tube is

fixed.l Ensure that the air-breaker is off before connecting the power cable.

l When the underfloor cabling mode is used, lay out the cables at the side of the UMG8900.

Procedure

Step 1 Measure the distance between the DC power distribution cabinet and the wiring terminals of thepower distribution frame (PDF) of the cabinet. Reserve cables with proper length.

Step 2 For details on assembling the OT terminal, see B.1 Assembling Power Cable Connectors.

Step 3 Determine the position of the DC output wiring terminals in the DC power distribution cabinet.Figure 8-6 shows the wiring terminals in the power distribution cabinet. For details on theconnection relationship, see the User Manual delivered with the power distribution cabinet.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 8-6 Wiring terminals in the power distribution cabinet

2

7

1

5

6

9

8

4

3

7

95

5

6

6

Right view Rear view Left view

1. GND lead-in wiring terminal 2. –48 V1 power lead-in wiringterminal

3. –48 V 2 power lead-in wiringterminal

4. PGND lead-in wiring terminal 5. –48 V1 output wiring terminal 6. –48 V2 output wiring terminal

7. GND output wiring terminal 8. PGND output terminal 9. GND lead-in wiring terminal forunderfloor cabling

Step 4 Determine the cabling mode in the DC power distribution cabinet. Figure 8-7 and Figure 8-8show the overhead cabling mode.



8-9

Figure 8-7 Overhead cabling of the DC power distribution cabinet (1)

3

1

4

2

5

6

1. –48 V2 power lead-in wiringterminal


3. BGND lead-in wiring terminal

4. PGND lead-in wiring terminal 5. –48 V1 power lead-in wiringterminal



Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 8-8 Overhead cabling of the DC power distribution cabinet (2)

-48 V outputterminal block

Step 5 Determine the cabling modes of the PGND cables and power cables at the side of theUMG8900.

Step 6 Determine the positions of PGND cables in the DC power distribution cabinet. Lead out thePGND cables from the protection grounding bar. Refer to Figure 8-9. Note that the PGND cablescannot be crossed. It is recommended to place the cables from the bottom up to facilitate capacityexpansion.



8-11

Figure 8-9 Terminal positions of the PGND cables

Step 7 Connect the PGND cables(yellowish green) to the PGND terminals on the power distributionbox of the UMG8900 cabinet. Fasten the bolts.

Step 8 Determine the position of the wiring terminal of the RTN (black). Connect the cord end terminalsof the RTN to the wiring terminals marked with RTN1 and RTN2 in the PDF. Then fasten thescrew.

Step 9 Connect the other end of the RTN cable to the output wiring terminal marked with GND in theDC power distribution cabinet. Fasten the screws. Refer to Figure 8-10.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 8-10 RTN connections (at the power distribution cabinet side)

Step 10 Determine the positions of wiring terminals of –48 V power cable (blue). Connect the terminalsof the power cable to the wiring terminals marked with –48 V1 and –48 V2 in the PDF. Fastenthe screws.

Step 11 Determine the positions of terminals. Connect the other end of the power cables to the outputwiring terminal of –48 V1 and –48 V2 powers in the DC power distribution cabinet. Fasten thescrews. Figure 8-11 shows the appearance after installation.

Figure 8-11 –48 V terminals at the power distribution cabinet side

Step 12 After the power cables and PGND cables are laid, cut the rubber cover to cover the remainingspace of the cable-through hole at the UMG8900 cabinet side.

Step 13 Separate cables of different colors. Bind the cables every 200 mm [7.9 in.].

Step 14 Check whether the cables are connected properly with the multimeter.



8-13

Step 15 The labels must be attached 30 mm [1.2 in.] from the ends.

Step 16 Check the installation. The cabling of the power cables and PGND cables must be straight, even,and not crossed. The bend radius must be smooth.

----End

PostrequisiteAfter connecting the PGND cables and power cables between the cabinets and the DC powerdistribution cabinets, you can connect the interconnected grounding cables between cabinets.

8.5 Connecting Interconnected PGND Cables BetweenCabinets

This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables between or in theUMG8900 cabinets.

Prerequisitel The output switches of PDF-related output terminals are set to off.

l Make sure that the PGND cables are available.

l Make sure that the crosshead screwdrivers are available.

ContextWhen connecting the interconnected grounding cables between cabinets, pay attention to thefollowing:

l The core diameter of the interconnected cables must be 10 AMG and 300 mm [11.8 in.]long.

l Fix the interconnected grounding cable between the cabinets before placing the signalcables.

l You do not need to fix the side panels of the combined cabinets. Therefore, use the oldPGND cable connecting to the side panel as the grounding cable for the combined cabinets.

Cascading the equipotential grounding cables. Refer to Figure 8-12.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 8-12 Cascading the equipotential grounding cables

PostrequisiteThe connections of PGND cables and power cables are completed. After connecting the PGNDcables and power cables, proceed with 9 Installing Internal Components.



8-15

9 Installing Internal Components

About This Chapter

This describes how to install internal components of the cabinet.

PrerequisiteBefore the installation, ensure that following preparations are completed.l The cabinet is installed.

l The power cables and the PGND cables of the cabinets are connected.

l The engineers must wear the ESD-preventive wrist strap during installation.

l All the internal components are available.

PostrequisiteAfter installing the cabinet, clean the installation site.l Sort out the tools and put the tools to specific positions.


9.1 Installation Specifications and PrecautionsThis describes the installation specifications and precautions.

9.2 Installing SSM FramesThis describes how to install the SSM frames.

9.3 Installing Boards in SSM FramesThis describes how to install the boards.

9.4 Installing Boards in the UA FramesThis describes how to install the boards in the user access (UA) frames.

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide 9 Installing Internal Components


9-1

9.1 Installation Specifications and PrecautionsThis describes the installation specifications and precautions.

Installation Specificationsl The positions of the components must comply with the requirements of the engineering

design documents.

l Filler panels must be installed at the unoccupied places of the cabinets.

l Earth the device correctly according to the requirements.

l Always wear an ESD wrist strap during the operation.

l Tighten the wrist strap around your wrist so that the metal tab makes good contact withyour skin. Then attach the ground core of the wrist strap to the designated grounding point.Refer to Figure 9-1.

Figure 9-1 Wearing an ESD-preventive wrist strap correctly

l Check the wrist strap. Its resistance must be within 0.75 megohm to 10 megohms. If thevalidity period (often two years) of the wrist strap expires or the resistance fails to meetrequirements, replace the wrist strap.

l Do not touch boards with your clothing to avoid static electricity beyond the protectionscope of the wrist strap.

Precautionsl When installing internal components, place each component with care into corresponding

guide rails in the cabinet. Then, insert it slightly into the cabinet.

l When fixing internal components and filler panels, put the bolts into the installation holeson the mount angles of each component. Then, fix the component on the mount angles at

9 Installing Internal ComponentsHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

both sides of the cabinet. If there are more than two bolts for a component, first fix the fourbolts at the four corners in diagonal direction, and then fasten other bolts in sequence.

l The filler panel is fixed on the mount angles at both sides of the cabinet by lockers. To pullout the filler panel, press down the lockers, and then loose them.

l Make sure that the mount angles are in correct order during installation. Keep even spacebetween components, between filler panels, and between components and filler panels.

9.2 Installing SSM FramesThis describes how to install the SSM frames.

ContextWhen the SSM-4 frames and the media gateway controller (MGC) are installed in one cabinet,note the following:

l The SSM-4 frame must be installed apart from the MGC. Otherwise, the SSM-4 frame mayaffect the ventilation of the MGC.

l When installing the SSM-4 frame, close the folded rack-mounting ear. Insert the SSM-4frame until it comes to the outside of the columns. Then, open the folded rack-mountingear to fix the SSM-4 frame to the mount bar inside the cabinet.

Procedure

Step 1 Lift the SSM frame on corresponding guide rails and slowly push it into the cabinet.

Step 2 Fix the mount angles at two sides with four panel screws respectively to the mount bars at twosides of the cabinet.




9-3

Figure 9-2 Installing SSM frames

2

1

Step 3 Put the screws in each mounting hole of the frame with screwdriver and fasten them slightly.

Step 4 Fasten the four screws in diagonal order.

Step 5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 to install all frames.

----End

9.3 Installing Boards in SSM FramesThis describes how to install the boards.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Context

CAUTIONOpen the ejectors before pulling out the board. When a board is powered on, pull out the boardafter the blue hot-pluggable indicator OFFLINE turns on to avoid possible damage to the device.After the OFFLINE indicator turns on, pull out the board, and insert it. Then, power on thedevice. Do not insert the board forcedly when the ejector levers are not in correct contact withthe frame beam. Otherwise, you might damage the ejector levers.

Procedure

Step 1 Wear an antistatic wrist strap. Connect the grounding end of the antistatic wrist strap to theelectrostatic discharge (ESD) jack on the rack. Take out the new board from the antistatic boxor bag. Check and ensure that the board is intact. When removing the board, do not touch theprinted board or surface of components.

Step 2 Set the DIP switches and jumpers on the board.

Step 3 Loosen the installation screws counter-clockwise on the board to be installed with a screwdriver.

Step 4 Hold the ejector levers with your hands. Hold down the red locking key on the upper ejectorlever and the red tact switch on the lower ejector lever with your thumbs. Then, the ejector leversare ejected from the locking key.

Step 5 Hold the upper ejector lever with one hand, and hold the board with the other hand. Do not touchthe printed board. Insert the board along the guide rails of the slot into the frame. Ensure thatthe board is not inserted conversely. Refer to 1 in Figure 9-3.

Step 6 When feeling the inward clasping force from the ejector levers after the board is inserted intothe frame completely, clasp the ejector levers inward quickly. Refer to 2 in Figure 9-3. Ensurethat the hooks on the ejector levers are hitched over the square holes in the mount angle, and theboard is connected to the backplane properly.

Step 7 Fasten the screws clockwise at the top and bottom of the panel. Refer to 3 in Figure 9-3.

Step 8 Repeat steps 1 to 7 to install all the boards. Refer to Figure 9-3.



9-5

Figure 9-3 Installing boards

----End

PostrequisiteThe installation of the internal components is completed. After installing the internalcomponents, proceed with 10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for InternalComponents.

9.4 Installing Boards in the UA FramesThis describes how to install the boards in the user access (UA) frames.

ContextFigure 9-4 shows the appearance of the boards in the UA frames.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 9-4 Panels

1. Locking key 2. Ejector lever

Procedure

Step 1 Remove the filler panel with a screwdriver.

Step 2 Put on an ESD-preventive wrist strap, and take the board to be installed out of the antistatic bag.

Step 3 Set the DIP switches and jumpers on the board.

Step 4 Hold the ejector levels on the panel and then make them move outwards as shown in (2) inFigure 9-4. Then, insert the board smoothly along the slot guide rail until the locating pin onthe front panel touches the pin locating hole on the rack.

Step 5 Press the ejector levers inwards as shown in (1) in Figure 9-4. Insert the board into the rack bythe pressing force until the inner sides of the ejector levers contact the fore end of the rack. Then,push the ejector levers a little harder. The board will be completely inserted into the rack whenyou hear a "tick" sound.

Step 6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to install all boards.

----End



9-7

10 Connecting PGND Cables and PowerCables for Internal Components

About This Chapter

This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables and power cables forinternal components.

PrerequisiteMake the following preparations before connecting the cables:

l Internal components of the cabinet are installed.

l Tools required during installation are available.

l Air breakers of each power distribution frame (PDF) are off.

ContextClean equipment room

l Sort out the tools and put the tools to specific positions.


10.1 Installation Specifications and PrecautionsConform to the following specifications when installing power cables and protection ground(PGND) cables for internal components

10.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of Internal Components in Front-AccessCabinets

10.3 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of Internal Components in Rear-AccessCabinets

10.4 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for the SSM Frames

10.5 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for the UA FramesThis describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cable and power cable from thepower distribution frame (PDF) to the UA frame.


10 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for InternalComponents


10-1

10.6 Connecting the PGND Cables and Power Cables of Low-Density UA Fan FrameThis describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables and power cables of low-density UA fan frame.

10.7 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for Monitoring BoxesThis describes how to connect the cables from the power distribution frame (PDF) to theenvironment monitoring box in the cabinet.

10.8 Connecting AC Power CablesThis describes how to connect the AC power cable. When the UMG8900 is placed on the table,the AC power cable is needed.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

10.1 Installation Specifications and PrecautionsConform to the following specifications when installing power cables and protection ground(PGND) cables for internal components

Installation Specificationsl Internal power cables of the N68-22 cabinet are connected to the wiring terminals of power

distribution frames (PDFs) before delivery. After installing the internal components,connect the other ends of the power cables to the components.

l The PGND cables must be yellow or yellow and green plastic insulation copper core wiresthat are the same as those of power supply cables.

Precautionsl Before installation, mark or label both ends of each power cable and PGND cable to identify

the devices that the cables are connected to. Therefore, correct cable connections areguaranteed. For details on how to mark cables and paste labels, see C Introduction toEngineering Labels.

l Only trained professionals can perform hot-line operations on devices with –48 V powerterminals such as PDFs and service frames.

l Installation engineers must wear ESD-preventive wrist straps during the installation.

10.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables ofInternal Components in Front-Access Cabinets

Connections of Power Cables Between Components and Front-Access PDFs in TG-Only Application

NOTEInternal power cables of the H66-22 cabinet are connected to the wiring terminals of power distributionframes (PDFs) before delivery. After installing the internal components, connect the other ends of thepower cables to the components. The PDF provides two channels of power supply for SSM frames, andone channel of power supply to UA frames.

Connecting power cables of internal components refers to connecting the power cables betweenPDFs and SSM frames, and those between UA frames and environment monitoring boxes. Twoinput power cables are available between the PDFs and the SSM frames, and one input powercable is available between the PDF and the environment monitoring box.

Figure 10-1 shows the connection of power cables of internal components in the H66-22 cabinetin TG-only application.




10-3

Figure 10-1 Connections of power cables between components and front-access PDFs in TG-only application

SSM3

SSM2

SSM1

ESC

-48V Cable

RTN Cable

1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+ESC- ESC+

The three power switches (SW1 to SW3) on the front panel of the PDF control correspondingSSM frames. Refer to Table 10-1.

Table 10-1 Relationships between components and power control switches in front-accesscabinets

Frame Name Power Control Switch Remarks

SSM frame 1 SW2, SW3 The frame is poweredon when thecorresponding powerswitches are on.

SSM frame 2 SW1, SW3

SSM frame 3 SW1, SW2




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Connections of Power Cables Between Components and Front-Access PDFs inLow-Density AG Application

Figure 10-2 shows the connections of power cables of internal components in the H66-22 cabinetin low-density AG application.

Figure 10-2 Connections of power cables between components and front-access PDFs in low-density AG application

-48V Cable

RTN

UAFM

UAFS(1)

UAFS(2)

ESC

SSM

POWER

POWER

POWER

Cable





10-5

Table 10-2 Relationships between components and power control switches in the H66-22cabinet


UAFS(1) and UAFS(2) SW2 The frame is poweredon when thecorresponding powerswitches are on.

UAFM SW1

SSM frame SW1, SW2

Connections of Power Cables Between Components and Front-Access PDFs inHigh-Density AG Application

Two HABD frames, one HABF frame, and one SSM-4 frame are configured in the H66-22cabinet in high-density AG application. Figure 10-3 shows the connections of power cables ofcomponents.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 10-3 Connections of power cables between components and front-access PDFs in high-density AG application

-48V Cable

RTN Cable

HABD (1)

HABF

HABD(2)

ESC

SSM

PWRIO(-48V)

PWRIO(-48V)

PWRIO(-48V)

To: HABF

To: HABD(1)

To: ESC

To: HABD(2)

ESC(-) ESC(+) 1- 1+ 2- 2+ 3- 3+

To: SSM leftpower supply

To: SSM tightpower supply




10-7


Table 10-3 Relationships between components and power control switches in the H66-22cabinet


HABD (1) SW1 The frame is poweredon when thecorresponding powerswitches are on.

HABF SW1

HABD (2) SW2

SSM frame SW2, SW3

10.3 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables ofInternal Components in Rear-Access Cabinets

Connections of Power Cables Between Components and Rear-Access PDFsFigure 10-4 shows the connections of power cables of internal components in the N66-22 cabinetin low-density application.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 10-4 Connections of power cables between components and rear-access PDFs

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5

SSM

HGB

HIB(1)

HIB(2)

HIB(3)

HIB(4)

FAN1

JD2JD1JF1

JF1

JF1

JF1

JF1

JD1JD2

JD1JD2

JD1JD2

JD1JD2

-48V CableRTN Cable

Ground Ground

ESC JP3

FAN2

Five power switches (SW1 to SW5) on the front panel of the PDF control corresponding SSMframes. Refer to Table 10-4.

Table 10-4 Relationships between power control switches and components


SSM frame SW4, SW5 The frame is poweredon when thecorresponding powerswitches are on.

RSP14 (3) and RSP14 (4) SW3

RSP14 (1) and RSP14 (2) SW2




10-9


RSP10 and environmentmonitoring box

SW1

Fan 1 SW5

Fan 2 SW4

Connections of Power Cables Between Components and Rear-Access PDFs inHigh-Density Application

Figure 10-5 shows the connections of power cables of internal components in the N66-22 cabinetin high-density application.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 10-5 Connections of power cables between components and rear-access PDFs in high-density application

PDF

-48V1 BGND -48V2 BGND -48V3 BGND-48V4 BGND

SSM

HABA (1)

power1

power2

JP1

JP2

ESC JP3

HABA (2)

power1

power2

JP1

JP2

-48V CableRTN Cable

PGND




10-11

Two power switches (SW1 to SW2) on the front panel of the PDF control corresponding SSMframes. Refer to Table 10-5.

Table 10-5 Relationships between power control switches and components


SSM frame SW1, SW2 The frame ispowered on when thecorresponding powerswitches are on.

HABA (1) SW1

HABA (1) SW2

Environment monitoring box SW1

10.4 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for theSSM Frames

Context

CAUTIONl The connecting holes are on the terminal bar on the top of the power distribution frame (PDF).

Connect the cables according to the connection diagram.l Pay attention to the marks at two ends, one end is RTN and the other end is –48 V. Wrong

connection causes damage to the device.l The power of the device is high. Therefore, all the power cables must be fastened.

l The OT terminals of unused power cables must be covered with insulation coverings, andthen bound to the cabinet. The unavailability of insulation coverings causes severe short-circuit accidents.

Procedurel Connect the power cable between the PDF and the SSM frame.

1. The PDF on the top of the cabinet is off.2. Connect the power cable from the PDF to the SSM frame based on the cable connection

diagram in 10.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of InternalComponents in Front-Access Cabinets and 10.3 Connections of Power Cables andPGND Cables of Internal Components in Rear-Access Cabinets. Connect the bluepower cable (cord end terminal) to –48 V wire post of the PDF and the black RTNcable to the RTN wire post at the back of the PDF.

3. Insert the type-D 3PIN connector to the power input interface of the power module inthe SSM frame. Insert the connector into the socket slowly and straightly. Do not insertit forcibly. In such case, pull the connector out and check if it is inserted in a wrongdirection or its pins are distorted.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

4. Check whether the connection is correct, and then check whether the captive screwsand nuts are tightened.

5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to connect all power cables for the SSM frame. Bind the cablesafter checks.

l Connect the PGND cables of the SSM frame.1. Connect one end of the UL1015 10AWG yellowish green PGND cable to the

grounding point of the SSM frame.2. Connect the other end of the PGND cable to the grounding bars at two side of the

cabinet.

Figure 10-6 shows the cable connection.

Figure 10-6 Connections of the PGND cables in the SSM frames

ALARM FAN_48V

Service framegrounding point

MONITOR

Cabinet grounding barCabinet grounding bar

SSM frame

RTN-48VRTN-48V

----End

10.5 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables for the UAFrames

This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cable and power cable from thepower distribution frame (PDF) to the UA frame.




10-13

Context

CAUTIONl The connecting holes are on the terminal bar on the top of the PDF. Connect the cables

according to the connection diagram.l Pay attention to the marks at two ends, one end is RTN and the other end is –48 V. Wrong

connection causes damage to the device.l The power of the device is large. Therefore, all the power cables must be fastened.

l The OT terminals of unused power cables must be covered with insulation coverings, andthen bound to the cabinet. The unavailability of insulation coverings causes severe short-circuit accidents.

Procedurel Connect the power cable from the PDF to low-density UA frame in front-access cabinet.

1. The PDF on the top of the cabinet is off.2. Connect the power cable from the PDF to the UA frame based on the cable connection

diagram in 10.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of InternalComponents in Front-Access Cabinets. Connect the blue power cable (cord endterminal) to –48 V wire post of the PDF and the black RTN cable to the RTN wirepost at the back of the PDF.

3. Insert the other end of the cable to the power interface of the filtering board in the UAframe. Insert the connector into the socket slowly and straightly. Do not insert itforcibly. If the connector cannot be inserted smoothly, pull it out and check whetherit is inserted in wrong direction or whether its pins are distorted.


5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to connect all power cables for the UA frame. Bind the cables afterchecks.

l Connect the power cable from the PDF to high-density UA frame in the front-accesscabinet.1. The PDF on the top of the cabinet is off.2. Connect the power cable from the PDF to the UA frame based on the cable connection

diagram in 10.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of InternalComponents in Front-Access Cabinets. Connect the blue power cable (cord endterminal) to –48 V wire post of the PDF and the black RTN cable to the RTN wirepost (cord end terminal) at the back of the PDF.

3. Insert the other end of the cable to the PWRIO-1(+5V) input interface of the fan boxin frame HABD 1. Insert the connector into the socket slowly and straightly. Do notinsert it forcibly. If the connector cannot be inserted smoothly, pull it out and checkwhether it is inserted in wrong direction or whether its pins are distorted.


5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to connect all power cables for frame HABF and HABD 2. Bindthe cables after checks.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

l Connect the power cable from the PDF and low-density UA frame in rear-access cabinet.1. The PDF on the top of the cabinet is off.2. Connect the power cable from the PDF to the UA frame based on the cable connection

diagram in 10.3 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of InternalComponents in Rear-Access Cabinets. Connect the blue power cable (cord endterminal) to –48 V wire post of the PDF.

3. Connect the black RTN cable (OT terminal) to the grounding bars at two sides of thecabinet.

4. Insert the two big 4PIN connectors respectively to power input interfaces JD1 andJD2 in the UA frame. Insert the connector into the socket slowly and straightly. Donot insert them forcibly. If the connector cannot be inserted smoothly, pull it out andcheck whether it is inserted in wrong direction or whether its pins are distorted.


6. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to connect all power cables for the UA frame. Bind the cables afterchecks.

l Connect the power cable from the PDF to high-density UA frame in rear-access cabinet.1. The PDF on the top of the cabinet is off.2. Connect the power cable from the PDF to frame HABA 1 based on the cable

connection diagram in 10.3 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables ofInternal Components in Rear-Access Cabinets. Connect the blue power cable (cordend terminal) to –48 V wire post of the PDF and the black RTN cable (cord endterminal) to the RTN wire post at the back of the PDF.

3. Insert the other end of the cable to power input interface JP1 of frame HABA 1. Insertthe connector into the socket slowly and straightly. Do not insert it forcibly. If theconnector cannot be inserted smoothly, pull it out and check whether it is inserted inwrong direction or whether its pins are distorted.


5. Repeat the preceding steps to connect the second power cable of frame HABA 1 andtwo power cables of frame HABD 2. Bind the cables after checks.

l Connect the PGND cable for low-density UA frame in the rear-access cabinet.1. Connect one end of the yellowish green PGND cable to the grounding point of the

environment monitoring box.2. Connect the other end of the yellowish green PGND cable to the grounding bars at

two side of the cabinet.


Figure 10-7 Connections of the PGND cables of the UA frames in the rear-accesscabinet

HGB/HIB JL1

Ground




10-15

----End

10.6 Connecting the PGND Cables and Power Cables ofLow-Density UA Fan Frame

This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables and power cables of low-density UA fan frame.

Context

CAUTIONl The connecting holes are on the terminal bar on the top of the power distribution frame (PDF).

Connect the cables according to the connection diagram.

l Pay attention to the marks at two ends, one end is RTN and the other end is –48 V. Wrongconnection causes damage to the device.The power of the device is high. Therefore, all thepower cables must be fastened.

Procedure

Step 1 The PDF on the top of the cabinet is off.

Step 2 Connect the power cable from the PDF to the fan frame based on the cable connection diagramin 10.3 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables of Internal Components in Rear-Access Cabinets. Connect the blue power cable (cord end terminal) to –48 V wire post of thePDF.

Step 3 Insert the two big 2PIN connectors respectively to power input interfaces of the fan frame. Insertthe connector into the socket slowly and straightly. Do not insert them forcibly. If the connectorcannot be inserted smoothly, pull it out and check whether it is inserted in wrong direction orwhether its pins are distorted.

Step 4 Check whether the connection is correct, and then check whether the captive screws and nutsare tightened.

Step 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to connect all power cables for the fan frame. Bind the cables after checks.

----End

10.7 Connecting PGND Cables and Power Cables forMonitoring Boxes

This describes how to connect the cables from the power distribution frame (PDF) to theenvironment monitoring box in the cabinet.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Context

CAUTIONl The connecting holes are on the terminal bar on the top of the PDF. Connect the cables

according to the connection diagram.l Pay attention to the marks at two ends, one end is RTN and the other end is –48 V. Wrong

connection causes damage to the device.

NOTE

For low-density and high-density configurations in front-access cabinet, the methods for connecting thepower cables are similar.

Procedurel Connect the power cable from the PDF to the environment monitoring box in front-access

cabinet.1. The PDF on the top of the cabinet is off.2. Connect the power cable from the PDF to environment monitoring box based on the

cable connection diagram in 10.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cablesof Internal Components in Front-Access Cabinets. Connect the blue power cable(cord end terminal) to –48 V wire post of the PDF and the black RTN cable (cord endterminal) to the RTN wire post at the back of the PDF.

3. Insert the 4PIN connector to into the power socket of the panel on environmentmonitoring box slowly and straightly. Do not insert it forcibly. If the connector cannotbe inserted smoothly, pull it out and check whether it is inserted in wrong directionor whether its pins are distorted.

l Connect the power cable from the PDF to environment monitoring box in rear-accesscabinet.1. The PDF on the top of the cabinet is off.2. Connect the power cable from the PDF to environment monitoring box based on the

cable connection diagram in 10.3 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cablesof Internal Components in Rear-Access Cabinets. Connect the blue power cable(cord end terminal) to –48 V wire post of the PDF and the black RTN cable (cord endterminal)to the RTN wire post at the back of the PDF.

3. Connect the black RTN cable (OT terminal) to the grounding bars at two sides of thecabinet.

4. Insert the other end of the cable into the JP3 interface of environment monitoring box.Insert the connector into the socket slowly and straightly. Do not insert it forcibly. Ifthe connector cannot be inserted smoothly, pull it out and check whether it is insertedin wrong direction or whether its pins are distorted.


6. Repeat the preceding steps to connect all power cables for the environment monitoringbox. Bind the cables after checks.

l Connect the PGND cable for environment monitoring box in rear-access cabinet.




10-17

1. Connect one end of the yellow PGND cable to the grounding point of the environmentmonitoring box.

2. Connect the other end of the yellow PGND cable to the grounding bars at two side ofthe cabinet.


Figure 10-8 Connections of PGND cables of the environment monitoring box in therear-access cabinet

ESCJP1

NOTE

l For low-density and high-density configurations in rear-access cabinet, the methods forconnecting the PGND cables are similar.

l The protection ground (PGND) cable of the environment monitoring box is not required for front-access cabinets.

----End

10.8 Connecting AC Power CablesThis describes how to connect the AC power cable. When the UMG8900 is placed on the table,the AC power cable is needed.

ContextFigure 10-9 shows the position of the AC power supply module in the SSM-4 frame.




Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 10-9 Position of the AC power supply module

1

2

33

1. Frame lintel 2. Fan box 3. Power supply module

Figure 10-10 shows the appearance of the AC power supply module.

Figure 10-10 Appearance of the AC power supply module

1 2

3 4

1. Mount bar 2. Indicator 3. AC power connector 4. Power switch

NOTEDue to the different standards of each country or area, the electrical specifications of the AC power cableand socket are different. Install the AC power cable based on the actual condition.

Procedure

Step 1 Connect one end of the cable to the AC power connector.

Step 2 Then, connect the other end to the socket of the AC power supply.

----End




10-19

11 Connecting Signal Cables

About This Chapter

This describes how to connect the signal cables of the UMG8900.

PrerequisiteMake sure that the following preparations are completed before connecting the signal cables.l The cabinet is installed.

l The components in the cabinet are installed.

l The power cables and PGND cables are connected.

l The signal cables to be connected are available.

l The output switches in the PDF are off.

l Make the tools available. The tools include the crosshead screwdriver, straight screwdriver,diagonal pliers, cable peeler, crimping pliers, high-speed wire stripper for coaxial cables,extraction tool, cable tester, multimeter, fiber bundling tape, cable tie, antistatic gloves,antistatic wrist strap, ladder, and vacuum cleaner.

ContextFigure 11-1 shows the procedure for connecting the signal cables.

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide 11 Connecting Signal Cables


11-1

Figure 11-1 Connection Procedure

Start

Connect monitoring cables

Connect trunk cables

Connect clock cables

Connecting singal cables forservice access of UA frames

Connecting service bearernetwork cables

Connecting service beareroptical fibers

End

PostrequisiteAfter connecting the signal cables, proceed with 12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 CabinetFittings.

11.1 Installation Specifications and PrecautionsThis describes the installation specifications including wiring and binding principles that mustbe followed when you connect signal cables. The disorder connections of signal cables maydegrade the signal quality and shorten the service life of cables.

11.2 Connecting Signal CablesThis describes how to connect the signal cables.

11.3 Connecting Monitoring CablesThis describes how to connect the monitoring cables.

11.4 Connecting Trunk CablesThe trunk cables are used for the trunk connection of the TDM signals. The trunk cable includesthe E1/T1 trunk cables between the SSM frame and the UA frame, tailor-made internal trunkcables between the SSM-4 frame and the UA frame, internal HW trunk cables in the UA frame,E3/T3 trunk cables.

11.5 Connecting Signal Cables of Access Service in the UA Frame

11.6 Connecting BITS Clock CablesThis describes how to connect the BITS clock cable that is used to access the synchronous clocksignals provided by external BITS.

11 Connecting Signal CablesHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

11.7 Connecting Service Bearer Network CablesThis describes how to connect the service bearer network cables that connect the UMG8900 andthe local maintenance terminal (LMT), media gateway controller (MGC), or anotherUMG8900.

11.8 Connecting Service Bearer Optical FibersThis describes how to connect the service bearer optical fibers that connect the UMG8900 andthe external optical distribution frame (ODF), the external optical interface, or the transmissiondevice.



11-3

11.1 Installation Specifications and PrecautionsThis describes the installation specifications including wiring and binding principles that mustbe followed when you connect signal cables. The disorder connections of signal cables maydegrade the signal quality and shorten the service life of cables.

Upward and Downward Cabling modes

There is one rectangle cabling hole at each of the four corners on the top of cabinet and the fourcorners at the bottom of the cabinet. The rectangle cabling hole is used for laying signal cablein or out the cabinets. Refer to Figure 11-2 and Figure 11-3.

Figure 11-2 Cabling holes at the top and bottom of the N68-22 cabinet


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 11-3 Cabling holes at the top and bottom of the N68E-22 cabinet

The cables of the UMG8900 are laid from the back of the cabinet. Lead the cables into the cabinetthrough the cabling holes, and then lay them along the side columns of the cabinet to thecorresponding SSM frames. After that, lay the cables to the corresponding interface boards alongthe cabling trough. Arrange the cables in order, bind them, and fix them in the wire bushing.

Cabling holes are equipped with rodent-proof nets. Before you lead the cables, remove thesenets. After you lead all the cables through the cabling holes, bind them together. Then, place therodent-proof nets back onto the cabling holes. Draw the cabling area on the rodent-proof nets,and cut it out with a pair of scissors. Install the rodent-proof nets again to make sure there is nogap around the cables.

Based on the actual conditions of the equipment room, cables can be laid along the lowerenclosure frame or in overhead cabling mode and underfloor cabling mode.

l Overhead cabling modeLead the cables in or out the cabling holes of the two sides on the top of the cabinet. Laythe cables along the side columns at two sides of the cabinet in the downward way to connectto related devices. Refer to Figure 11-4.Overhead cabling mode is recommended in the equipment rooms with cement floors.



11-5

Figure 11-4 Overhead cabling mode

Lay the cables outside the cabinet along cabling troughs and cabling racks. When thedistance between the cabling rack and the top of the cabinet is longer than 0.8 m [2.6 ft.],the downward cable ladder must be fixed. Refer to Figure 11-5.

Figure 11-5 Downward cable ladder


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Bind the cables in bundle or in square on the cabling rack without any crossover. The cablesmust be straight and tight. Refer to Figure 11-6.

Figure 11-6 Layout of cables on the cabling rack

l Underfloor cabling mode

Lead the cable in or out the cabling holes of the two sides at the bottom of the cabinet. Laythe cables along the side columns at two sides of the cabinet in the upward way to connectto related devices. Refer to Figure 11-7.Underfloor cabling mode is recommended in the equipment rooms with ESD-preventivefloor.When the underfloor cabling mode is applied, ensure that the height of the piled cables onthe ESD-preventive floor cannot exceed the 3/4 height of the space under the ESD-preventive floor.



11-7

Figure 11-7 Underfloor cabling mode

l Cabling along the lower enclosure frame

The clock cables and cascading cables are recommended to be laid along the lowerenclosure frame.When combined cabinets are installed, the clock cables and the cascading cables must beconnected to the neighbor cabinet through the lower enclosure frame of the cabinet. Referto Figure 11-8.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 11-8 Cabling along the lower enclosure frame

Arrangement Principles

Conform to the following specifications when laying cables:

l Before being connected, each cable must be marked or have engineering labels at both endsto ensure correct connections. For details, see C Introduction to Engineering Labels.

l The signal cables must be intact. Do not use the broken signal cable.

l When cables are laid vertically, they must be bound and placed along the side columns ofthe cabinet. When cables are laid horizontally, they must be bound and placed along thecabling trough.

l When power cables and signal cables are laid in groove, it is prohibited to bind themtogether. At least 30 mm [1.2 in.] between them must be ensured.



11-9

l Do not put the signal cables on the heat dissipation net. Otherwise, the heat dissipation ofthe cabinet and the service life of the cable are affected.

l When laying the signal cable outside the cabinet, you must use the corrugated plasticprotection tube. Bind, fix, and polish two ends of the protection tubes.

l The signal cables must be laid vertically or horizontally without any crossover. (The signalcable can be crossed within one meter outside the cabinet). In addition, the signal cablescannot be folded. Ensure that the bending radians of the signal cables are the same andleave proper length of cable at the bend radius.

l The rodent-proof nets are on the cable-through holes of the cabinet. Cut the rodent-proofnets when inserting the signal cables. Make sure that the holes on rodent-proof nets are ofproper size.

l Connectors must be secure and in good contact.

Binding PrinciplesConform to the following specifications when bundling cables:

l Bind the cables in an equal, tidy, and nice way and ensure the proper tightness. The cableties face the same direction. Bind the cables outside the cabinet every 200 mm [7.9 in.]with a cable tie. Bind the cables inside the cabinet less than 200 mm [7.9 in.] with a cabletie.

l When fixing cables on the wire bushing, you must put cable ties inside the wire bushing.Otherwise, the side panels of the cabinet cannot be well installed. Refer to Figure 11-9.

Figure 11-9 Cable ties inside the wire bushing

l Trim cable ties to avoid sharpness. Figure 11-10 and Figure 11-11 show the trimming

method.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 11-10 Method for trimming the cable tie

Figure 11-11 Trimmed cable tie

l Bind cables such as power cables, signal cables, and grounding cables separately. When

cables are laid inside cabinet, power cables and grounding cables must be bound along theinside cabling trough. Signal cables must be bound along the outside cabling trough.

Cable Bending Principles

Conform to the following specifications when bending cables:

l The cables cannot be over-bended at the bend radius to prevent the damage to the core wire.

l When the cable is bended, the radius of curvature is longer than two times of the cablediameter. The radius of curvature is longer than four to six times of the cable diameteraround the exit of the connection component.

l Do not fix a cable tie at the bend radius. Leave the cable with proper length at the bendradius. Refer to Figure 11-12.



11-11

Figure 11-12 Fixing the cable tie on the signal cable

No cable tie atthe turve

Cableties

R

Precautions

Pay attention to the following when connecting signal cables:

l Do not wear conductive accessories such as the watch, bracelet, bangle, or ring duringinstallation.

l Wear the ESD-preventive wrist strap to prevent the damage to the sensitive componentscaused by the body static. In addition, the other end of the ESD-preventive wrist strap iswell grounded.

l Before connecting the cables, check if the cables and cable labels are consistent with theactual conditions.

l When connecting the optical fibers, do not stare at or get close to the egress of the opticalfibers.

l The unused connector of the optical fiber must be covered with the protection tube to avoidthe pollution.

l The ways that the cables are laid in or out the cabinet are the same.

11.2 Connecting Signal CablesThis describes how to connect the signal cables.

11.2.1 Connections of Monitoring CablesThis describes the monitoring cables that are connected inside the cabinet. The methods forconnecting the monitoring cables vary with the applications.

11.2.2 Connections of UAM CablesThis describes the user access module (UAM) cables including the trunk cables between theUAM and the service switching module (SSM), and the HW cables between the main frame andthe subframe.

11.2.3 Connections of Internal Cables in UA FramesThis describes the test and alarm cables that must be connected in the UA frame to realize thefunction of test and alarm report. The LVDS cables must be connected when HABD and HABFhigh-density UA frames are installed in the H66-22 cabinet.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

11.2.1 Connections of Monitoring CablesThis describes the monitoring cables that are connected inside the cabinet. The methods forconnecting the monitoring cables vary with the applications.

Front-Access Cabinets in TG-Only ApplicationThe front-access cabinet is H66-22 cabinet. Figure 11-13 shows the connections of monitoringcables in TG-only application.

Figure 11-13 Connections of monitoring cables for environment monitoring boxes in front-access cabinets in TG-only application

ESC ALARM BOXJTD1JTD2JTD3JTD4

JTM1SIO2

BGND -48V DC

Power DistributionFrame

Monitor Port

1

2 3

4

JTD5JTD6

MIUALM ESC FE01FE02FE03FE04FE05 FE00FE11FE12FE13FE14FE15 FE10COM0COM1

MIU

1. Monitoring cable for PDF 2. Access control monitoring cable

3. Straight through network cable 4. MMIU in the SSM frame on the top of the cabinet

Front-Access Cabinets in Low-Density AG ApplicationThe front-access cabinet is H66-22 cabinet. Figure 11-14 shows the connections of monitoringcables in AG application.



11-13

Figure 11-14 Connections of monitoring cables for environment monitoring boxes in front-access cabinets in low-density AG application


Monitor Port

FANUAFS(1) cabling area

FANUAFS(2) cabling area

FAN ESC0 ESC1UAFM cabling area

ESC ALARMBOX

JTD1JTD2JTD3JTD4

JTM1SIO2

BGND -48V DC

JTD5JTD6JTD7JTD8

JTD9

RSP/PV8

1

2 3

3 3

44


3. Monitoring cable for fan box 4. Straight through network cable

Front-Access Cabinets in High-Density AG ApplicationThe front-access cabinet is H66-22 cabinet in which high-density UA frames such as the HABDand HABF are configured. Figure 11-15 shows the connections of monitoring cables.

Figure 11-15 Connections of monitoring cables for environment monitoring boxes in front-access cabinets in high-density AG application


Monitor Port

ESC AlarmBoxJTD1JTD2JTD3JTD4

JTM1SIO2

BGND -48V DC

JTD5JTD6JTD7JTD8

JTD9

RSP/PV8

1

2



Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

In addition, the test box and alarm cable are required between the environment monitoring boxand the high-density UA frames such as the HABD and HABF. For details on connections, see11.2.3 Connections of Internal Cables in UA Frames.

Rear-Access Cabinets in Low-Density AG ApplicationThe rear-access cabinet N66-22 is configured in narrowband AG-only configuration. Figure11-16 shows the connections of monitoring cables in AG application.

Figure 11-16 Connections of monitoring cables for environment monitoring boxes in rear-access cabinets in low-density AG application

1

H301ESIB

JTM1

JTD1JTD2 JC1

JC3

RSP10JC2

JC3

Fan box (2)H303DFC

2

33

4

4

Fan box (1)H303DFC

JTD3JTD4

JTD5JTD6JTD8 JTD7

JTD9JTD10JTD11JTD12

JAK1JAB1

1. Access control alarm cable of the alarm box incabinet

2. Access control communication cable between cabinets


Rear-Access Cabinets in High-Density AG ApplicationThe HABA high-density UA frame is configured in N66-22 rear-access cabinet in high-densityAG application. Figure 11-17 shows the connections of monitoring cables.



11-15

Figure 11-17 Connections of monitoring cables for environment monitoring boxes in rear-access cabinets in high-density AG application

Rearaccesscontrol

2

3

Front access control

JTM1

JTD1JTD2JTD3JTD4

JTD5JTD6JTD7JTD8JC1

JC3

Environmentmonitoring box

JD3N-ESC

JD3N-ESC

PWR-ALM FAN-ALM TEST

JD0JD1JD2

PWR-ALM FAN-ALM TEST

JD0JD1JD2

HABA (1)

HABA (2)

3

44

1

5

1. Monitoring cable of the ESC 2. Access control alarm cable of the alarm box incabinet


5. Access control communication cable between cabinets

11.2.2 Connections of UAM CablesThis describes the user access module (UAM) cables including the trunk cables between theUAM and the service switching module (SSM), and the HW cables between the main frame andthe subframe.

The UMG8900 can serve as a local exchange in the traditional PSTN upgrading and expansionor as a large capacity AG in the NGN. The UMG8900 consists of two modules, SSM and UAM.Refer to Figure 11-18.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 11-18 UMG8900 structure

SSM

Mainframe

Directframe

RSAframe......

TDMConnection

MGC

MGW

Subframe

RSA subframe

UAM

POTS/ISDN/XDSL/DDN User

Table 11-1 lists the modes of the UAM frames.

Table 11-1 Modes of the UAM frame

Mode Description

Main frame It is directly connected to the SSM and can be connected to the subframe.The UA frame in which the main control board is the RSU8 or RSU4 canserve as the main frame.The frames that can be configured as the main frames include the UAFM,UAM, HABA_UP, HABD, HABL, RSP_10, or RSP_12 frames.

Subframe It is directly connected to the main frame and cannot be connected to thesubframe. The main control board of the subframe of the low-density UAframe is the RSP. No main control board is configured in the subframe ofthe high-density UA frame.The frames that can be configured as the subframes include the UAFS,UAS, HABA_UP, HABA_DOWN, HABB_UP, HABB_DOWN, HABE,HABF, RSP_10, RSP_12, RSP_14, RSP_15, or RSP_19 frames.

Direct frame It is directly connected to the SSM frame and cannot be connected to thesubframe. The UA frame in which the main control board is the RSP orRSA (The main control board of the RSB and the RSB_HK is the RSA)can serve as the direct frame.The frames that can be configured as the direct frames include the UAFM,UAFS, UAM, UAS, RSP_10, RSP_12, RSP_14, RSP_15, RSP_19,RSP_60A, RSP_160B, RSB, or RSB_HK.



11-17

Mode Description

RSA frame It is directly connected to the SSM and can be connected to the RSAsubframe. The UAM frame in which the main control board is the RSAcan serve as the RSA frame.Only the RSA_22 and the RSA_26 frames can be configured as the RSAmain frame.

RSA subframe It is directly connected to the RSA main frame and cannot be connectedto the subframe. The UAM frame in which the main control board is theDRV can serve as the RSA subframe.Only the USR16 and the USR19 frames can be configured as the RSAsubframe.

The SSM and the UAM are usually connected in the following three ways:

l The SSM and the UAM are directly connected with each other through cables.If SSM frames and UA frames are in the same cabinet, the SSM and UAM can be directlyconnected with each other through internal cables. If the UA frame is a rear-access frame,connect the internal trunk cable to E1 interface on the MOMD in the front of the cabinet,and then lead the cable to the back of the cabinet to connect the interface on the backplaneof the rear-access UA frame.

l The SSM and the UAM are connected with each other through the digital distribution frame(DDF).If the DDF is available in the equipment room, the E1/T1 cables of the SSM and the UAMcan be connected to the DDF through the jumper on the DDF.

l The SSM and the UAM are connected with each other through the SDH transmissionequipment.If the UAM is located at the remote end, the SSM and the UAM can be connected to theircorresponding transmission devices through E1/T1 cables. The transmission devices at bothends are connected through the transmission network.

E1 Connections of SSM FramesThe SSM frame is connected to the UA frame through the E1 interface on the MOMD. EachMOMD can provide 24 E1 interfaces. Figure 11-19 shows the E1 interfaces on the MOMD.

Figure 11-19 E1 interfaces on the MOMD.

OM

D

OFFLIN

E

AC

T

RU

NA

LM

OMC2M_IN

2M_OUT

E1/T1_0-7E1/T1_8-23

OM

D

FE1 FE0

Table 11-2 lists the description of E1 interfaces on the MOMD.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Table 11-2 Description of E1 interfaces on the MOMD.

Silkscreen E1 Interface No. E1 Timeslot No.

E1/T1_0-7 0–7 0–255

E1/T1_8-23 8–23 256–767

Each MOMD can provide 24 E1 interfaces. By default, the system reserves 1024 E1 timeslotsfor each MOMD.

l When timeslots 0 to 1023 are occupied, you can calculate the timeslot No. through E1interface No. in the following way:Suppose the E1 interface No. is n, the start timeslot No. is n x 32 and the end timeslot No.is n x 32 + 31.Suppose the SSM frame is connected to the UA frame through E1 interfaces that arenumbered n to m (n<m), the corresponding timeslot Nos. of these interfaces are n x 32 tom x 32 + 31.

l When timeslots 1024 to 2047 are occupied, you can calculate the timeslot No. through E1interface No. in the following way:Suppose the E1 interface No. is n, the start timeslot No. is n x 32 + 1024 and the end timeslotNo. is n x 32 + 31 + 1024.Suppose the SSM frame is connected to the UA frame through E1 interfaces that arenumbered n to m (n<m), the corresponding timeslot Nos. of these interfaces are n x 32 +1024 to m x 32 + 31 + 1024.

These formulas are useful when you configure TDM terminations with ADD TDMIU.

E1 Connections of UA Framesl E1 interfaces of the UAFM frames

Figure 11-20 shows the E1 interfaces of the UAFM frames.

Figure 11-20 E1 interfaces of the UAFM frame

PV4E1

PV8E1

Table 11-3 lists the meaning of E1 interfaces in Figure 11-20.



11-19

Table 11-3 Positions of E1 interfaces of the UAFM frame

InterfaceSilkscreen

PV8 Slot E1 Interface No. Remarks

PV4 E1 Slot 5 1–4 The first four E1interfaces of twoPV8 boards or E1interfaces of twoPV4 boards

Slot 6 1–4

PV8 E1 Slot 5 5–8 The last four E1interfaces of twoPV8 boardsSlot 6 5–8

l E1 interfaces of the RSP10 frames

E1 interfaces of the RSP10 frame are on the backplane. Refer to Figure 11-21.

Figure 11-21 E1 interfaces of the RSP10 frame

PV8LPV8R

A

B

C

D

Table 11-4 lists the meaning of E1 interfaces in Figure 11-21.

Table 11-4 Positions of E1 interfaces of the RSP10 frame

Label Name PV8 Slot E1 Interface No. Pins

A Slot 10 1, 5, 2, 6 17–24

B Slot 10 3, 7, 4, 8 25-32

C Slot 9 1, 5, 2, 6 17–24

D Slot 9 3, 7, 4, 8 25–32


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

E1 Connections from SSM Frames to UA FramesTo prevent the most of the UAM from losing communication due to the fault on the MOMD,the E1 interfaces on one MOMD must be connected to two main control boards in a UA frame.

If the SSM frames are connected through DDF, check the instructions to DDF connections, andthen find out the connections between the E1 cables from the UA frame and interfaces on theMOMD. This part does not describe it in detail.

This describes the method for determining the E1 interface No. between the SSM and the UAframes when they are connected through dedicated internal cables.

l Connecting the UAFM frame.The SSM frame is connected to the UAFM frame through E1 interfaces on the MOMD.The MOMD provides the E1 cables with two types of connectors, that is, DB44 and DB78connectors.Figure 11-22 shows the dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB44 connectors.

Figure 11-22 8 E1 Cables of Low-Density Frames in Front-Access CabinetsPos 1

Pos 44

X1

W

X2 Pos 1

Pos 50

Table 11-5 lists the dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB44 connectors.

Table 11-5 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB44 connectors

No. of FOMDE1 InterfaceConnected toX1

No. of PV4 E1InterfaceConnected to X2


PV8 Slot ThatProvides E1Interfaces

0 1 5 Slot 5

1 2 6

2 3 7

3 4 8

4 1 5 Slot 6

5 2 6



11-21





6 3 7

7 4 8

Figure 11-23 shows the dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors.

Figure 11-23 16 E1 Cables of Low-Density Frames in Front-Access Cabinets

Pos 1

Pos 1

Pos 50

Pos 50

W1

W2X2

X3

Pos 1

Pos 78

X1

Table 11-6 lists the dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (fromconnectors X1 to X2).

Table 11-6 Dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors (from connectorsX1 to X2)





8 1 5 Slot 5

9 2 6

10 3 7

11 4 8

12 1 5 Slot 6

13 2 6

14 3 7

15 4 8



Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)


No. of FOMD E1InterfaceConnected to X1




16 1 5 Slot 5

17 2 6

18 3 7

19 4 8

20 1 5 Slot 6

21 2 6

22 3 7

23 4 8

l Connecting the RSP10 frameThe SSM frame is connected to the UAFM frame through E1 interfaces on the MOMD.The MOMD provides the E1 cables with two types of connectors, that is, DB44 and DB78connectors.Figure 11-24 shows the dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB44 connectors.

Figure 11-24 8 E1 cables of low-density frames in rear-access cabinets

Pos1

Pos44

12345678

12345678

abcd

abcd

X2

X3

X1W2

W1




11-23


No. of FOMD E1Interface Connected toX1

No. of E1 Interface forUpper Header Pins 17–24 Connected to X2


0 1 3

4 5 7

1 2 4

5 6 8



No. of FOMD E1Interface Connected toX1



2 1 3

6 5 7

3 2 4

7 6 8

Figure 11-25 shows the dedicated internal E1 cables that use the DB78 connectors.

Figure 11-25 16 E1 cables of low-density frames in rear-access cabinets

Pos 1

Pos 78

X 1

W 1

W 2

X 2

X 3

X 4

X 5

abcd12345678

abcd12345678


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)



No. of MOMD E1Interface Connected toX1



8 1 3

12 5 7

9 2 4

13 6 8






10 1 3

14 5 7

11 2 4

15 6 8






16 1 3

20 5 7

17 2 4

21 6 8



11-25






18 1 3

22 5 7

19 2 4

23 6 8

l Connecting to the HABD frameThe tailor-made internal trunk cable that connects the SSM-4 and the HABD frames are oftwo types. All these two cables are twisted pair cables with characteristic impedance as 120ohms. They are used to transmit the 16E1 signal.– The cable provides 16E1 interfaces. The DB68 interface at one end is connected to the

E1 transfer interface of the E1TF in the HADB frame. Two DB44 interfaces at the otherend are connected to the 8E1 interface of the two FOMDs in the SSM-4 frame.

– The cable provides 16E1 interfaces. The DB68 interface at one end is connected to theE1 transfer interface of the E1TF in the HADB frame. The DB78 interface at the otherend is connected to the 16E1 interface of the FOMD in the SSM-4 frame.

Figure 11-26 shows the connections of the trunk cables between the SSM-4 frame and theHABD frame in standard configuration.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 11-26 Connecting trunk cables between the SSM-4 frame and HABD frame

16E1 (DB78-DB68)

16E1 (DB44-DB68)

OMD

E1TF

HABD(1)

HABF

HABD(2)

SSM-416E1

H66-22 H66-22

E1TF

HABD(1)

HABF

HABD(2)

E1TF

HABD(1)

HABF

HABD(2)

H66-22

l Connecting to the HABA frame

The tailor-made internal trunk cable that connects the SSM-4 and the HABA frames are of8E1 and 16E1. All these two cables are twisted pair cables with characteristic impedanceas 120 ohms.– The cable provides 8E1 interfaces. The DB44 interface at one end is connected to the

8E1 interface (DB44) of the FOMD in the SSM frame. The DB44 interface at the otherend is connected to the E1 transfer interface of the HWCB in the HABA frame.

– The cable provides 16E1 interfaces. The DB78 interface at one end is connected to the16E1 interface (DB78) of the FOMD in the SSM frame. Two DB44 interfaces at theother end are connected to the E1 transfer interface of the HWCB in two HABA mainframes.

Figure 11-27 shows the connections of trunk cables between the SSM-4 frame and HABAframe in standard configuration.



11-27

Figure 11-27 Connecting trunk cables between the SSM-4 frame and HABA frame

N66-22 N66-22

HABA

HABA

HABA

HABA

SSM-4

N66-22

HABA

HABA

16E1

8E1

8E1

HWCB板

OMD

HWCB板 HWCB板

Connecting HW Cables Between UAM Main Frames and UAM SubframesThe main frame of the UAM connects to the subframe with HW cables.

l Cascading the UAFM frame with the UAFS frameFigure 11-28 shows the cascading between the UAFM frame and the UAFS frame.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 11-28 Cascading between the UAFM main frame and UAFS subframe

HWCAHWCA

UAFM

HW

UAFS3

HW

UAFS4

HW

UAFS1

HW

UAFS2

1#HWC8HW-1

1#HWC8HW-2

Table 11-14 lists the description of cascading between the UAFM main frame and theUAFS subframe.

Table 11-14 Description of cascading between the UAFM main frame and the UAFSsubframe

SubframeNo.

Cascaded HWCALocation (FrontView)

HW Nos. for theRSP Board in Slot3

HW Nos. for theRSP Board in Slot 4

UAFS1 At the left side 16–19 20–23

UAFS2 At the left side 24–27 28–31

UAFS3 At the right side 32–35 36–39

UAFS4 At the right side 40–43 36–39

l Cascading the RSP10 frame with the RSP14 frameFigure 11-29 shows the cascading between the RSP10 frame and the RSP14 frame.



11-29

Figure 11-29 Cascading between the RSP10 main frame and RSP14 subframe

HWC

A

B

C

D

H

E

F

G

a

b

c

d

RSPR RSPL

HGB

HIB

The HGB is the backplane of the RSP10 frame. The HGB provides HWC interfaces tocascade the subframe. Table 11-15 lists the HWC interfaces of the RSP10 frame.

Table 11-15 Description of HWC interfaces of the RSP10 frame

Interface ID HW No. Pins

A 16–19 1–8

B 20–23 9–16

C 24–27 17–24

D 28–31 25–32


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Interface ID HW No. Pins

E 32–35 25–32

F 36–39 41–48

G 40–43 49–56

H 44–47 57–64

The HIB is the backplane of the RSP14 frame. The HIB provides HW interfaces to cascadethe main frame. Table 11-16 lists the HW interfaces of the RSP14 frame.

Table 11-16 Description of HW interfaces of the RSP14 frame

Interface ID Slot No. for theRSP Board

No. in the RSPBoard

Pins

a 10 1–4 17–24

b 10 5–8 25–32

c 9 1–4 17–24

d 9 5–8 25–32

At present, there is another kind of HW cable that provides two connectors to connect withsubframes. Refer to Figure 11-30.

Figure 11-30 HW cable with two connectors

RIGHTRSP(DOWN)(17~24)/

(25~32)

LEFTRSP(DOWN)(17~24)/

(25~32)

HWC

Refer to Table 11-17.



11-31

Table 11-17 Description of HW cables with two connectors

ID Location HW No.

LEFT RSP(DOWN)(17–24)/(25–32) RSPL The first two HW Nos. ofthe HWC interface

RIGHT RSP(DOWN)(17–24)/(25–32)

RSPR The last two HW Nos. of theHWC interface

If the connector labeled "HWC" connects to pins 1 to 8 of the HWC interface of the RSP10frame, HW Nos. 16 and 17 are allocated for the RSP board in slot 9, and HW Nos. 18 and19 are allocated for the RSP board in slot 10.

l Cascading the high-density main frame HABD with the extended frame HABF in the front-access cabinet

Figure 11-31 shows the connections of the HW cables between high-density UA framesin the front-access cabinet H66-22.

Figure 11-31 Connections of the HW cables between high-density UA frames in the front-access cabinet

HABF

HW cable

HABD(1)

HABD(2)

(1)

HWCF

HWTF

HWTF

(1)

(1)

(1): Cabling-out area forsubscriber cables

l Cascading high-density main frame HABA with HABA in the rear-access cabinet

Figure 11-32 shows the connections of the HW cables between high-density UA framesin the rear-access cabinet N66-22.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 11-32 Connections of the HW cables between high-density UA frames in the rear-access cabinet

HW Cable

HWCB

HABA

HWCB

HWHABA

HW

11.2.3 Connections of Internal Cables in UA FramesThis describes the test and alarm cables that must be connected in the UA frame to realize thefunction of test and alarm report. The LVDS cables must be connected when HABD and HABFhigh-density UA frames are installed in the H66-22 cabinet.

Connecting Test and Alarm Cables in Low-Density and Front-Access CabinetsFigure 11-33 shows the connections of the test and alarm cables when three front-access UAframes are installed in the H66-22 cabinet.



11-33

Figure 11-33 Connections of test and alarm cables between three front-access UA frames

TES

T&E

RR

OR

TES

T&E

RR

OR

UAFS cabling area

TES

T&E

RR

OR

TES

T&E

RR

OR

TEST&ERROR

UAFM cabling area

UAFS cabling area

Figure 11-34 shows the connections of the test and alarm cables when two front-access UAframes are installed in the H66-22 cabinet.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 11-34 Connections of test and alarm cables between two front-access UA frames

TES

T&E

RR

OR

TES

T&E

RR

OR

UAFS cabling areaTE

ST&

ER

RO

RTE

ST&

ER

RO

R

UAFS cabling area

Connecting Test and Alarm Cables in High-Density and Front-Access CabinetsFigure 11-35 shows the connections of the test and alarm cables when HABD and HABF high-density UA frames are installed in the H66-22 cabinet.



11-35

Figure 11-35 Connections of test and alarm cables between high-density and front-accesscabinets

HABD(2)

HABD(1)

HABF

ESC

HWCF

HWTF

HWTF

SIO2JTD8JTD7JTD9

RSP/PV8

(1)

(1)

(1)


Connecting Test and Alarm Cables Between Rear-Access CabinetsFigure 11-36 shows the connections of the test and alarm cables when five rear-access UAframes are installed in the N66-22 cabinet.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 11-36 Connections of test and alarm cables for rear-access UA cabinets

RSP10

JB3

JB4

JA2JA1JA5JA4

JT1JT2

RSP14

RSP14

RSP14

RSP14

JA2JA1JA5JA4

JT1JT2

JA2JA1

JA5JA4

JT1JT2

JA2JA1JA5JA4

JT1JT2

JA2JA1

JA5JA4

JT1JT2Alarm cable

Test cable

NOTE

The test and alarm cables are not required in rear-access and high-density cabinets.

Connecting LVDS CablesFigure 11-37 shows the connections of the LVDS cables when high-density UA frames such asthe HABD and HABF are installed in the H66-22 cabinet.



11-37

Figure 11-37 Connections of LVDS cables

HABD(2)

(1)

HABD(1)

HABF

HLAF0

HLAF1

HLAF2

HLAF3

HLEF0

HLEF1

HLEF2

HLEF3

(1)

(1)


11.3 Connecting Monitoring CablesThis describes how to connect the monitoring cables.

ContextThe monitoring cables can be connected in the following applications:

l Front-Access Cabinet in TG-Only Application

l Front-Access Cabinet in Low-Density AG Application

l Front-Access Cabinet in High-Density AG Application

l Rear-Access Cabinet in Low-Density AG Application

l Rear-Access Cabinet in High-Density AG Application

The monitoring cables are connected before delivery. Check the connections according to 11.2.1Connections of Monitoring Cables.

11.4 Connecting Trunk CablesThe trunk cables are used for the trunk connection of the TDM signals. The trunk cable includesthe E1/T1 trunk cables between the SSM frame and the UA frame, tailor-made internal trunkcables between the SSM-4 frame and the UA frame, internal HW trunk cables in the UA frame,E3/T3 trunk cables.

11.4.1 Connecting E1/T1 Cables in the SSM FrameThis describes how to connect the E1/T1 cables in the SSM frame.

11.4.2 Connecting E1/T1 Cables in the UA FrameThis describes how to connect the E1/T1 cables in the UA frame.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

11.4.3 Connecting Tailor-Made Internal Trunk Cables Between the SSM-4 Frame and the UAFrame

11.4.4 Connecting Internal HW Trunk Cables in the UA Frame

11.4.5 Connecting E3/T3 Trunk CablesThis describes how to connect the E3/T3 trunk cables.

11.4.1 Connecting E1/T1 Cables in the SSM FrameThis describes how to connect the E1/T1 cables in the SSM frame.

ContextThe internal E1/T1 trunk cables are the 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 trunk cable and 100-ohm T1 trunkcable. These cables use the DB44 or DB78 connector. The DB44 connector provides 8 E1/T1signals and the DB78 connector provides 16 E1/T1 signals.

Connect one end of the E1/T1 trunk cable to the MOMD board of the UMG8900(UG01MOMD), and connect the other end to the cable distribution frame.

The E1/T1 cable connected to the MOMD board is taken as an example to describe theconnections of trunk cables. Refer to Figure 11-38.

Figure 11-38 Connections of E1/T1 trunk cables1

2

OM

D

OFFLIN

E

AC

T

RU

NA

LM

OMC2M_IN

2M_OUT

E1/T1_0-7E1/T1_8-23

OM

D

FE1 FE0

1. E1/T1 cable of the DB78 connector 2. E1/T1 cable of the DB44 connector

ProcedureStep 1 Insert the DB78 connector of trunk cables to the 16E1 interface on the MOMD board. Insert the

DB44 connector of trunk cables to the 8E1 interface on the MOMD.

Step 2 Place the trunk cables outside the cabinet to the digital distribution frame (DDF) along the cablingrack or cabling trough.

If the trunk cable is 75-ohm coaxial cable, make the SMB connector on spot and connect thecable to the DDF. If the trunk cable is the 120-ohm twisted pair cable, use the wire punch downtool to fix the twisted pair cable to the DDF.



11-39

The length of the cables to be laid is decided during the site survey. The proper redundancy isrequired. If the cable is not long enough, you must replace it with the proper cable. In somespecial cases, you can use the dedicated coaxial cable connector to splice cables. Soldering isprohibited.

----End

11.4.2 Connecting E1/T1 Cables in the UA FrameThis describes how to connect the E1/T1 cables in the UA frame.

Context

Figure 11-39 shows the connections of E1/T1 cables in the UAFM frame.

Figure 11-39 Connections of E1/T1 cables in the UAFM frame

PV4E1

PV8E1

W1-Left PV8/PV4W2-Right PV8/PV4

W2-Right PV8/PV4 (5～8)E1

W1-Left PV8/PV4

W1 W2

W1W2

(5～8)E1

(1～4)E1 (1～4)E1


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

11.4.3 Connecting Tailor-Made Internal Trunk Cables Between theSSM-4 Frame and the UA Frame

ContextThe UMG8900 provides the tailor-made internal trunk cable that connects the SSM-4 and theUA frames.

Procedurel Connect the trunk cables between the SSM-4 frame and the low-density UA frame (UAFM)

in front-access cabinet.1. Insert the DB44 or DB78 connector at one end of the trunk cable to the E1 interface

on the MOMD.2. Place the trunk cables to the related frames along the vertical cabling troughs on the

columns at two sides.3. Insert the D-50PIN-male connector of the trunk cable to the E1 interface of the UAFM

frame.l Connect the trunk cables between the SSM-4 frame and the low-density UA frame (RSP10)

in rear-access cabinet.1. Insert the DB44 or DB78 connector at one end of the trunk cable to the E1 interface

on the MOMD.2. Place the trunk cables to the related frames along the vertical cabling troughs on the

columns at two sides.3. Insert the 4x8PIN female connector of the trunk cable to the E1 interface of the RSP10

frame.l Connect the trunk cables between the SSM-4 frame and the high-density UA frame

(HABD) in front-access cabinet.1. Insert the two DB44 connectors of the 16E1 cable of the first type respectively to the

8E1 interfaces of two MOMD in the SSM-4 frame.2. Place the trunk cables to frame HABD (1) on the top of the cabinet along the vertical

cabling troughs on the columns at two sides.3. Insert the DB68 interface of the 16E1 cable of the first type to the E1 transfer interface

on the E1TF in frame HADB (1).4. Insert the DB78 interface of the 16E1 cable of the second type to the 16E1 interface

on the MOMD in the SSM-4 frame.5. Place the trunk cables to frame HABD (1) on the top of the cabinet along the vertical

cabling troughs on the columns at two sides.6. Insert the DB68 interface of the 16E1 cable of the second type to the E1 transfer

interface on the E1TF in frame HADB (1).7. Repeat Step 4 to Step 6 to connect the trunk cable between the SSM-4 frame and the

HABD frame of adjacent cabinets.l Connect the trunk cables between the SSM-4 frame and the high-density UA frame

(HABA) in rear-access cabinet.1. Insert the DB78 interface of the 16E1 cable to the 16E1 interface on the MOMD in

the SSM-4 frame.



11-41

2. Place the trunk cables along the vertical cabling troughs on the columns at two sides.3. Insert two D44 connectors at the other end of the 16E1 cable respectively to the E1

transfer interface on the HWCB of two HABA main frames in the current cabinet andthe adjacent cabinet.

4. Insert the DB44 interface of the 8E1 cable to the 8E1 interface on the MOMD in theSSM-4 frame.

5. Place the trunk cables along the vertical cabling troughs on the columns at two sides.6. Insert the DB44 interface at the other end of the 8E1 cable to the E1 transfer interface

on the HWCB of the HABA main frame in the third cabinet.

----End

11.4.4 Connecting Internal HW Trunk Cables in the UA Frame

ContextFor details on connecting the internal HW trunk cables in the UA frame, see 11.2.2 Connectionsof UAM Cables.

11.4.5 Connecting E3/T3 Trunk CablesThis describes how to connect the E3/T3 trunk cables.

Context

One end of the E3/T3 internal trunk cables of the UMG8900 has the SMB female connector,and the other end has no connector. The SMB connector is inserted at the E3/T3 receiving andtransmitting ends on the MOMD (UG02MOMD). The idle end is connected to the relatedtransmission device through the cable distribution frame. Make the proper connector at the idleend based on the type of the cable distribution frame in the equipment room.

The E3/T3 cable connected to the UG02 MOMD is taken as an example to describe theconnections of trunk cables. Refer to Figure 11-40.

Figure 11-40 Connections of E3/T3 trunk cables

OM

D

OFFLIN

E

AC

T

RU

NA

LM

OMC2M_IN

2M_OUT

OM

D

ACTLINK

RX TX FE1 FE0

1

2 3

1. Connection to cable distribution frame 2. Signal receiving end 3. Signal transmitting end


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Procedure

Step 1 Insert the SMB connector of the E3/T3 cable to the E3/T3 receiving and transmitting ends onthe MOMD.

Step 2 Place the trunk cables outside the cabinet to the digital distribution frame (DDF) along the cablingrack or cabling trough. Make the proper connector based on the type of the cable distributionframe in the equipment room.

The length of the cables to be laid is decided during the site survey. The proper redundancy isrequired. If the cable is not long enough, you must replace it with the proper cable. In somespecial cases, you can use the dedicated coaxial cable connector to splice cables. Soldering isprohibited.

----End

11.5 Connecting Signal Cables of Access Service in the UAFrame

11.5.1 Connecting POTS Subscriber Cables

11.5.2 Connecting ATI Subscriber Cables

11.5.3 Connecting SDL Subscriber Cables and Trunk Cables

11.5.4 Connecting HSL Subscriber Cables

11.5.1 Connecting POTS Subscriber Cables

Context

Comply with the following rules when arranging cables:

l Place the cables in order and keep the sheath intact.

l Ensure the necessary redundancy on the cable length.

l Route different types of cables separately.

l Ensure the cables comply with the planned scale, path, cross sectional area and position.

l Consider maintenance and expansion in the future.

11.5.2 Connecting ATI Subscriber Cables

Context

Comply with the following rules when arranging cables:

l Place the cables in order and keep the sheath intact.



11-43

l Ensure the necessary redundancy on the cable length.

l Route different types of cables separately.

l Ensure the cables comply with the planned scale, path, cross sectional area and position.

l Consider maintenance and expansion in the future.

11.5.3 Connecting SDL Subscriber Cables and Trunk Cables

Context

The 32–port SDL subscriber cable is equipped with a DB68 connector at one end, and the otherend is connected to the cable distribution frame.

Connect the subscriber cable as follows:

l Connect the 3 x 8-PIN connector at the line card side to pin rows 1–8 or 9–16 of the upperHEADER and pin rows 17–24 or 25–32 of the lower HEADER on the correspondingbackplane.

l Connect the other end (bare wire) to the DDF.

11.5.4 Connecting HSL Subscriber Cables

Context

The HSL subscriber cable is equipped with a DB64 connector at one end, and the other end isconnected to the cable distribution frame.

Connect the subscriber cable as follows:

l Connect the 3 x 8-PIN connector at the line card side to pin rows 25–32 of the lowerHEADER on the corresponding backplane.

l Connect the other end (bare wire) to the DDF.

11.6 Connecting BITS Clock CablesThis describes how to connect the BITS clock cable that is used to access the synchronous clocksignals provided by external BITS.

Context

One end of the BITS clock cable is connected to the MOMD of the UMG8900. The other endis connected to the digital distribution frame (DDF). The clock signals between the externalclock device and the UMG8900 must be transferred through the DDF.

Figure 11-41 shows the connections of BITS clock cables.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 11-41 Connections of BITS clock cables

OM

D

OFFLIN

E

AC

T

RU

NA

LM

OMC2M_IN

2M_OUT

E1/T1_0-7E1/T1_8-23

OM

D

FE1 FE0

1

2 3

1. Connection to DDF 2. 2 Mbit/s clock cable (input) 3. 2 Mbit/s clock cable (output)

ProcedureStep 1 Insert the connector of the BITS clock cable to the 2M_IN interface of the MOMD.

Step 2 Put the cables in the cabling trough, and then distribute them to the left and right sides. Afterthat, place the cables through the cable-through holes on the top of the cabinets along the verticalcabling troughs on the columns at two sides.

Step 3 Place the signal cables outside the cabinet to the DDF along the cabling rack or the cablingtrough.

Step 4 Make the connector to connect the other end of the BITS clock cable to the DDF according tothe project planning.

Step 5 Arrange the signal cables in order, bind them, and fix them in the cabling trough and wirebushing.

Step 6 Check that the cables are connected correctly and the labels are intact.

----End

11.7 Connecting Service Bearer Network CablesThis describes how to connect the service bearer network cables that connect the UMG8900 andthe local maintenance terminal (LMT), media gateway controller (MGC), or anotherUMG8900.

ContextThe service bearer network cables include the network cables that are used to carry and controldata (maintenance, signaling, and H.248). When the UMG8900 is directly connected to the PC,router, or MGC, use crossover network cables. When they are connected through the hub orEthernet switch, use straight-through network cables.

When laying the service bearer network cables, note the following:



11-45

l Before laying the service bearer network cable, measure the cable length to choose a propercable.

l When the service bearer network cables are laid in underfloor cabling mode, leave properlength of the cable at the bending area at the bottom of the cabinet. You cannot stretch thecables tight when they are laid outside. When the service bearer network cables are laid inoverhead cabling mode, place the external network cables along two sides of the cabinet,and then distribute them to the frames one by one. Note that the cables cannot be placedinto the cabinet from other positions or directions.

l When the service bearer network cables are in overhead cabling mode, leave proper lengthof the cable at the bending area at the bottom of the cabinet. When the cabling ladder isused, place the cables at the side of the cabling ladder. When the distance between thecabling ladder and the cabling trough on the top of the cabinet is less than 0.8 m [2.6 ft.],place the cables in the cabling trough on the top of the cabinet through the cabling ladder.When the distance between the cabling ladder and the cabling trough on the top of thecabinet is more than 0.8 m [2.6 ft.], fix the cables on the downward cabling ladder to avoiddamage caused by the excessive force.

Table 11-18 lists the pin assignment of service bearer network cables in different centralizedforwarding modes.

Table 11-18 Pin assignment of service bearer network cables

CentralizedForwardingMode

Position 1 Position 2 Remarks

Convergence FE0 bearer interface onthe MOMD.

Related devices suchas the PC, router, orMGC

For all controldata(maintenance,signaling, and H.248) and bearerdata

Dichotomy OMC interface on theMOMD

For maintenancedata, signaling,and H.248

FE0 bearer interface onthe MOMD

For bearer data

Trisection OMC interface on theMOMD

Foe maintenancedata

FE1 bearer interface onthe MOMD

For bearer data

FE0 control interface onthe MVPD

For other controldata (signalingand H.248)

See the construction file for the pin assignment.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Procedure

Step 1 Make the connector and check that it is good.

Step 2 Insert the RJ45 connector of the service bearer cable to FE interfaces or OMC interfaces on theMOMD.

Step 3 Put the network cables in the cabling trough, and then distribute them to the left and right sides.After that, place the network cables through the cable-through holes on the top of the cabinetsalong the vertical cabling troughs on the columns at two sides.

Step 4 Place the network cables outside the cabinet to the related device along the cabling rack or thecabling trough.

Step 5 Connect the other end of the network cables to the DDF or related device according to the projectplanning.

Step 6 Arrange the network cables in order, bind them, and fix them in the cabling trough and wirebushing. Note the following:

l The bending radians of the network cables are the same.

l The labels and cable ties face the same direction.

l Do not fold the network cables and leave proper length of the cables at the bending area.

l Bind the cables with straps in an equal way and leave proper length of the cables at thebending area.


----End

11.8 Connecting Service Bearer Optical FibersThis describes how to connect the service bearer optical fibers that connect the UMG8900 andthe external optical distribution frame (ODF), the external optical interface, or the transmissiondevice.

Context

When the UMG8900 is interconnected with the peer device and the connection is achievedthrough the jumper, make sure that the interface type on the UMG8900 side is the LC/PC andthe interface type of the other end is the same as that of the interconnected device.

Choose a fiber connector based on the optical interface type of the peer device that is connectedto the network interface module of the UMG8900. The single-mode optical interface (yellow)can only use the single-mode fiber and the multi-mode optical interface can only use the multi-mode fiber. Before connecting optical fibers, make sure that the connector type and fiber typeare applicable to the type of the adopted optical interface.

When using the optical fiber, note the following:

l Make sure that the tail fiber is not pressed or stretched for a long time (such as hangingheavy things).

l Note the tightness when binding the tail fibers with the strap.



11-47

l Fix the flange and fiber attenuator in the planned positions and make sure that the fixing isproper to facilitate daily maintenance and capacity expansion in the future.

l Make sure that the connections of the optical connector and optical interface are reliable.


l When the optical fiber is laid, you must use the corrugated plastic protection tube or otherprotection tubes to prevent the damage to the fiber. In addition, polish the ends of theprotection tubes.

l Make sure that there is no burr and sharp thing around the optical fiber.

l Twist the redundant tail fiber in a roll with fiber tray. Note that the roll cannot be too smalland the number of circles must be minimal. The radius of the roll is not less than 20 timesof outer diameter of the optical fiber. For examples, the minimal curvature radius of 2 mm[0.08 in.] single-core indoor fiber cannot be less than 40 mm [1.6 in.]. The minimalcurvature radius of 3 mm [0.1 in.] single-core indoor fiber cannot be less than 60 mm [2.4in.].

CAUTIONThe service bearer optical fibers are external optical fibers of the UMG8900. You need to connectthe service bearer optical fibers from the UMG8900 to the peer end such as the ODF, externaloptical interface, or transmission device. Then, coil the tail fibers at the peer end.

The external optical fibers are laid from the optical module interfaces on the subboards of theMOMD of the UMG8900. The fibers are connected to the external ODF, external opticalinterface, or transmission device. See the construction file for the pin assignment.

CAUTIONl When the optical fiber is laid, you must use the corrugated plastic protection tube or other

protection tubes to prevent the damage to the fiber.

l When connecting the optical fibers, do not stare at or get close to the outlet of the opticalfibers.


Procedure

Step 1 Insert the LC/PC connectors of the service bearer optical fiber to interfaces on the optical moduleof the MOMD subboard.

Step 2 Put the optical fibers in the cabling trough, and then distribute them to the left and right sides.After that, place the optical fiber through the cable-through holes on the top of the cabinets alongthe vertical cabling troughs on the columns at two sides. Coil and hang the redundant tail fibersat the ODF, external optical interface, or transmission device.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Step 3 Place the optical cables outside the cabinet to the ODF or related device along the cabling rackor the cabling trough. When the optical fiber is laid outside the cabinet, you must use thecorrugated plastic protection tube and polish the ends of the protection tube.

Step 4 Connect the other end of the optical cables to the ODF or related device according to the projectplanning. You can also twist the redundant tail fibers on the ODF.

Step 5 Arrange the optical fibers in order, bind them, and fix them in the cabling trough and wirebushing. Do not bind the fibers with the plastic strap. Bind them with the special fiber strap. Theoptical fibers from different boards must be bound separately. Bind the fibers in the cabinet withspecial plastic strap to protect the fibers.


----End



11-49

12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 CabinetFittings

About This Chapter

This describes how to install N66-22 or H66-22 cabinet fittings.

12.1 Installation Specifications and PrecautionsRead this part carefully before installing the cabinet to avoid the reconstruction and damage todevices and injury to human bodies.

12.2 Introduction to Fittings of Cabinet DoorsThis describes the fittings of cabinet doors.

12.3 Installing Door LintelsThe door lintels may be installed before delivery. Therefore, this part is optional.

12.4 Installing Cabinet Side PanelsThis describes how to install cabinet side panels.

12.5 Installing Front and Back DoorsThis describes how to install front and back doors.

12.6 Connecting PGND Cables for Cabinet DoorsThis describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables for cabinet doors.

12.7 Recovering the ESD-Preventive FloorAfter installing the cabinet on the ESD-preventive floor, install the floor holder to support theantistatic floor around the cabinet, and then recover the antistatic floor around the cabinet.

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide 12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinet Fittings


12-1


Installation Specificationsl Make sure that the cabinet doors can be opened and closed easily after they are installed.

l Grounding cables and grounding terminals of the cabinet door are securely connected.

Precautionsl Transport and install the cabinet doors with care to avoid damage.

l Wear antistatic gloves and antistatic wrist strap during installation.

12.2 Introduction to Fittings of Cabinet DoorsThis describes the fittings of cabinet doors.

Figure 12-1 shows the fittings of cabinet doors, including side panels, front door, and back door.

Figure 12-1 Fittings of cabinet door

1 23

1. Left door 2. Right door 3. Side panels

NOTE

The opening handle is located on the right door.

12 Installing N66-22 or H66-22 Cabinet FittingsHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

12.3 Installing Door LintelsThe door lintels may be installed before delivery. Therefore, this part is optional.

Context

An N66-22 cabinet has four door lintels. They are installed on the upper and lower enclosureframes at the front and back of the cabinet. An H66-22 cabinet has two door lintels. They areinstalled on the upper and lower enclosure frames at the front of the cabinet.

Procedure

Step 1 Align the door lintels with the mount brackets on the upper and lower enclosure frames, and putthe hooks of the door lintels into the slots of the mount brackets. Refer to Figure 12-2.

Figure 12-2 Installing door lintels

51

23

4

1. M3 countersunk screw 2. Door lintel 3. Support 4. Door lintel hook 5. Mount bracket slot

Step 2 Use four M3 countersunk screws to fasten the door lintels.

Figure 12-3 shows the cabinet with door lintels.



12-3

Figure 12-3 Cabinets with top covers

1. M3 countersunk screw

----End

12.4 Installing Cabinet Side PanelsThis describes how to install cabinet side panels.

Context

Side panels must be installed at both ends of a row of cabinets. Side panels include left and rightpanels.

Procedure

Step 1 Loosen the clamping pole on the flat column.

Step 2 Make the slot of a side panel onto the clamping pole downward. Then buckle the side panel intothe open slot of the mount bracket.

Step 3 Align the installation holes and fasten the two M6 countersunk screws.

----End

12.5 Installing Front and Back DoorsThis describes how to install front and back doors.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Context

CAUTIONBefore installing the front and back doors, complete the installation of all kinds of frames,internal components, and circuit boards, as well as the connection of cables. The front and backdoors can be installed after all other hardware devices are installed completely.

The front door and back door of the cabinet are double-swing doors.

Figure 12-4 shows the installation of the front and back doors.

Figure 12-4 Installing the front and back doors

A

A

1

2



12-5

Procedure

Step 1 Align the lower pin on the door with the pin hole on the lower enclosure frame, and install thedoors, as shown in (1) in Figure 12-4. Figure 12-5 shows the front and back doors after beinginstalled on the cabinet.

Figure 12-5 Installing the bottom of front and back doors

Step 2 Pull down the shuffle pin on the top of the door. Then, align the hole of the shuffle pin with thepin hole on the upper enclosure frame. Release the shuffle pin to let the shuffle pin return to theoriginal position through spring. Thus, the door panel is installed on the cabinet, as shown in (2)in Figure 12-4. Figure 12-6 shows the shuffle pin.

Figure 12-6 Shuffle pins

Step 3 Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to install the doors of all cabinets.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

NOTE

l The shuffle pins are installed on the door panels before delivery.

l After the front and back doors and side panels are installed, connect PGND cables at the positions oflower pins to ensure reliable grounding for the cabinet. For more details, see 12.6 Connecting PGNDCables for Cabinet Doors.

l After the front and back doors are installed, stick the product brand in the concave on the upper partof the front door.

Step 4 After the front and back doors are installed, check if the doors can be opened and closedsmoothly.

Opening the lock, refer to Figure 12-7.

Figure 12-7 Opening the lock

Closing the lock, refer to Figure 12-8.

Figure 12-8 Closing the lock

----End

12.6 Connecting PGND Cables for Cabinet DoorsThis describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables for cabinet doors.

Procedure

Step 1 Connect PGND cables around the lower pins of the side panels and doors. Connect the groundingpoints on the door panels and the grounding bolt on the cabinet base. Fasten the bolt. Refer toFigure 12-9 to Figure 12-14.



12-7

Figure 12-9 Cabinet door before the PGND cable is connected

Figure 12-10 Loosening the PGND bolt of the door


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 12-11 Connecting the PGND cable of the door

Figure 12-12 Installing the washer



12-9

Figure 12-13 Fastening the bolt

Figure 12-14 Cabinet door with the PGND cable connected

Step 2 Contact the door panel and grounding bolt on the cabinet base with the black pencil and redpencil of the multimeter. Check whether the PGND cable is in good contact. Refer to Figure12-15.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 12-15 Testing the Insulation

----End

12.7 Recovering the ESD-Preventive FloorAfter installing the cabinet on the ESD-preventive floor, install the floor holder to support theantistatic floor around the cabinet, and then recover the antistatic floor around the cabinet.

Prerequisitel Make sure that the floor holder components and M12x30 bolt are available.

l Make sure that spring washers 12 and flat washers 12 are available.

l Make sure that the spanner is available.

ContextThe holder (in the floor holder-slide rail assemblies) is used to support antistatic floor aroundthe cabinet.

Procedure

Step 1 The floor holder (in the floor holder-guide rail assemblies) is used to support antistatic flooraround the cabinet. The holder includes front floor holder, back floor holder, and side floorholder. Front and back floor holders are fixed on the holder fixing components, and side floorholders are fixed on the supports at both ends of a cabinet row. Use M12 bolts, spring washers,and flat washers to fix the front and back floor holders of each cabinet onto the holder fixingcomponents. Insert M12x30 bolts through the bolt holes of front and back floor holders to fixthe side floor holders onto the supports at both ends of a cabinet row. Refer to Figure 12-16.



12-11

Figure 12-16 Fixing floor holders and guide rails

1

2

3 12

3

25

4

67

1. M12x30 bolt 2. Spring washer 12 3. Flat washer 12 4. Fixing component for front floorholder

5. Bolt 12 6. Fixing component for side floorholder

7. Side floor holder

Step 2 Loosen the bolts M12, and then adjust the height of the floor holder to make its upper plane onthe same height as the lower plane of the antistatic floor. After that, tighten the bolts M12.

Step 3 Cut the antistatic floor around the cabinet to match the border of the cabinet according to actualconditions at site offices, and then recover the floor.

----End


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

13 Installing Normalized N66-22 CabinetFittings

About This Chapter

This describes how to install normalized N66-22 cabinet fittings.


13.2 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Side PanelsThis describes how to install normalized N66-22 cabinet side panels.

13.3 Installing Front and Rear Doors of Normalized N66-22 CabinetsThis describes how to install front and back doors of the normalized N66-22 cabinets.

13.4 Connecting PGND Cables for Normalized N66-22 Cabinet DoorsThis describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables for normalized N66-22cabinet doors.

13.5 Recovering the ESD-Preventive FloorAfter installing the normalized N66-22 cabinet on the ESD-preventive floor, install the floorholder to support the antistatic floor around the cabinet, and then recover the antistatic flooraround the cabinet.

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide 13 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Fittings


13-1


Installation Specificationsl Make sure that the cabinet doors can be opened and closed easily after they are installed.

l Grounding cables and grounding terminals of the cabinet door are securely connected.

Precautionsl Transport and install the cabinet doors with care to avoid damage.

l Wear antistatic gloves and antistatic wrist strap during installation.

13.2 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet Side PanelsThis describes how to install normalized N66-22 cabinet side panels.

Context

CAUTIONl For combined cabinets, you need to install the side panels of only the border cabinets in a

row.

Procedure

Step 1 Install the grounding cable at the side panel.

Step 2 Install the side panels and use eight M6x12 screws to fasten the side panels. Refer to Figure13-1.

13 Installing Normalized N66-22 Cabinet FittingsHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 13-1 Installing side panels

----End

13.3 Installing Front and Rear Doors of Normalized N66-22Cabinets

This describes how to install front and back doors of the normalized N66-22 cabinets.

Context

CAUTIONBefore installing the front and back doors, complete the installation of all kinds of frames,internal components, and circuit boards, as well as the connection of cables. The front and backdoors can be installed after all other hardware devices are installed completely.

Procedurel Install the rear access cabinet doors

1. Align the lower pin of the door panel with the pin hole (the small hole) on the lowerenclosure frame and insert the pin into the pin hole.



13-3

2. Pull down the hook pin at the upper part of the door panel. Align the hole of the hookpin with the pin hole (the small hole) on the upper enclosure frame. Release the hookpin and it bounces back to the original position. Refer to Figure 13-2.

Figure 13-2 Installing the rear access cabinet doors

3. Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to install the rear door.

l Install the front access cabinet doors1. Refer to the steps for installing front door of the rear access cabinet to install the front

door of the front access cabinet.2. Install the rear door and use eight M5x10 screws to fasten the rear door. Refer to

Figure 13-3.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 13-3 Installing the rear door of the front access cabinet

----End

13.4 Connecting PGND Cables for Normalized N66-22Cabinet Doors

This describes how to connect the protection ground (PGND) cables for normalized N66-22cabinet doors.

Procedure

Step 1 Loosen the bolts of the grounding terminals on the cabinet doors with a crosshead screwdriver.Refer to Figure 13-4.



13-5

Figure 13-4 Loosening the PGND bolt of the door

Step 2 Connect the OT terminals of the PGND cables to the grounding terminals of the cabinet doors.Then, install flat washers, spring washers, and nuts in order. Refer to Figure 13-5.

Figure 13-5 Connecting the PGND cable of the door

Step 3 Tighten the bolt with a crosshead screwdriver. Refer to Figure 13-6.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 13-6 Fastening the bolt

Step 4 Contact the door panel and grounding bolt on the cabinet base with the black pencil and redpencil of the multimeter. Check whether the PGND cable is in good contact. Refer to Figure13-7.

Figure 13-7 Testing the Insulation

Figure 13-8 shows the connected PGND cables of the front and back doors and side panels.



13-7

Figure 13-8 Connected PGND Cables

Step 5 Contact the door panel and grounding bolt on the cabinet base with the black pencil and redpencil of the multimeter. Check whether the PGND cable is in good contact.

----End

13.5 Recovering the ESD-Preventive FloorAfter installing the normalized N66-22 cabinet on the ESD-preventive floor, install the floorholder to support the antistatic floor around the cabinet, and then recover the antistatic flooraround the cabinet.

Prerequisitel Make sure that the floor holder components and M12x30 bolt are available.

l Make sure that spring washers 12 and flat washers 12 are available.

l Make sure that the spanner is available.

ContextNOTE

l The antistatic floor has been removed before you mark the installation position of the supports.

l For underfloor cabling, place the cables before you restore the antistatic floor.

Procedure

Step 1 Installing the front pallets


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Fix the front pallet on the support by using the M12x30 bolts, spring washers, and flat washers.Refer to Figure 13-9.

Figure 13-9 Installing the front pallets

M12x30

Step 2 Cut the antistatic floor according to the size of the cabinet. Restore the antistatic floor. Refer toFigure 13-10.

Figure 13-10 Cutting and restoring the antistatic floor



13-9

----End


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

14 Installing Peripherals

About This Chapter

This describes how to install peripherals including terminals, alarm boxes, and EAC-2environment monitoring device.

14.1 Installation Specifications and PrecautionsRead this part carefully before installing the peripherals. Familiarizing with the installationspecifications and precautions can avoid reconstructing and damage to devices and injury tohuman bodies.

14.2 Installing TerminalsThis describes the connection mode and how to install the terminals.

14.3 Installing Alarm BoxesThis describes the connection mode and how to install the alarm boxes.

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide 14 Installing Peripherals


14-1

14.1 Installation Specifications and PrecautionsRead this part carefully before installing the peripherals. Familiarizing with the installationspecifications and precautions can avoid reconstructing and damage to devices and injury tohuman bodies.

Installation Specificationsl The terminals are generally powered by 220 V AC power supply system. The system must

have a protection grounding end and adopt 3-core plugs and sockets.l The terminal and the UMG8900 can be connected with the communication cables such as

network cables (with RJ45 connectors), RS232 and RS422 serial port cables. The localmaintenance terminal (LMT) and the UMG8900 must be well grounded. The protectiongrounding cables of the LMT and the UMG8900 cabinet must be connected to the sameprotection grounding bar. The cross section of the protection grounding cable is not lessthan 4 mm2.

PrecautionsAll the peripherals must be well grounded to ensure personnel safety.

14.2 Installing TerminalsThis describes the connection mode and how to install the terminals.

ContextThe UMG8900 manages and maintains the devices through local maintenance terminal(LMT). The LMT adopts the universal PC as its hardware system. You need to install relatedhardware system to manage the device. The UMG8900 is often connected with multipleLMTs, through which the UMG8900 manages and maintains the devices. LMTs can beconnected to the UMG8900 locally or remotely. Refer to Figure 14-1.

Figure 14-1 Connection modes for the LMT

Router 1 Router 2LAN switch 1 LAN switch 2LMTUMG8900

LMTLAN switch

UMG8900

Local connection mode

Remote connection mode

14 Installing PeripheralsHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

If an LMT is connected to the UMG8900 locally, it indicates that the LMT is connected to theOMC interface of the UMG8900 through LAN. That is, the PC with LMT software is connectedto the LAN Switch through straight through network cable, and then connected to the OMCinterface on the MOMD. If the LMT and the UMG8900 are not in the same network segment,use remote connection mode. That is, connect the LMT to the OMC interface of theUMG8900 through routers.

CAUTIONThe terminals are generally powered by 220 V AC power supply system. The system must havea protection grounding end and adopt 3-core plugs and sockets. Ensure that the power is offbefore pulling or inserting the cable that connects to the serial or parallel ports of the computer.

Procedure

Step 1 Place the workstations in the specified location of the maintenance and monitoring room.

Step 2 Install the computers and peripherals, such as the external modem, on workstations.

Step 3 Connect the connection cables, such as the power cables of the terminals and signal cables tothe monitor.

Step 4 Connect one end of the cables to the terminals. Connect the other end of the cables to relateddevices in the equipment room through cabling trough or cabling rack. The cabling principlesare similar to those of the external cables such as external signal cables and trunk cables.

Step 5 Connect the terminals to the protection grounding bar in the maintenance and equipment roomwith the PGND cable.

Step 6 Check whether the cables are connected and bound correctly. Make sure that the labels are pasted.

----End

14.3 Installing Alarm BoxesThis describes the connection mode and how to install the alarm boxes.

ContextThe UMG8900 adopts universal alarm box provided by Huawei to implement alarm promptfunction during the operations and service maintenance. The universal alarm box is of box-typestructure and features high maneuverability, maintainability, and security. Figure 14-2 showsthe appearance of the alarm box.



14-3

Figure 14-2 Appearance of universal alarm boxes

The alarm box can be connected in two modes:

l Connecting to the alarm management system of the local maintenance terminal (LMT)

If the alarm box is connected to the alarm management of the LMT, the UMG8900 reportsalarm information to the LMT. Then, the LMT forwards the information to the alarm box.The PC with alarm management system of the LMT communicates with the alarm boxthrough RS232 serial ports.

l Connecting to the UMG8900

If the alarm box is directly connected to the UMG8900, the UMG8900 is connected to theserial port of the alarm box through the ALARM interface provided on the transfer box ofthe main control frame. The interface complies with the RS422 standard. The alarminformation can be reported to the alarm box directly through the ALARM interfaceprovided by the main control frame.

For details on the method for installing the alarm box and connecting the cables, see the UniversalAlarm Box User Manual delivered with the alarm box.

CAUTIONl When the equipment is connected to the 110 V AC or 220 V AC power, ensure the red rocker

switch is in the correct position before powering on the equipment. When the equipment isconnected to the 220 V AC, the rocker switch must be in "230" position. When the equipmentis connected to the 110 V AC, the rocker switch must be in "115" position.

l Choose proper fuse. Connect the equipment to the 110 V AC with the fuse of F, 2A, H, 250V.Connect the equipment to the 220 V AC with the fuse of F, 1A, H, 250V.

l Replace fuses with those of the same type.

14 Installing PeripheralsHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Procedure

Step 1 Drill four holes with diameter as 6 mm [0.2 in.] on the wall of the maintenance and monitoringroom by using a percussion drill, according to the location specified in the engineering designfile. In general, the bottom panel of the alarm box is 1500 mm [59 in.] above the floor after theinstallation.

Step 2 Insert four φ6×26 plastic expansion tubes into the fours holes separately. Insert four ST4.2×25tapping screws into the plastic expansion tubes with 6 mm [0.2 in.] exposed to the air.

Step 3 Hang the alarm box on the tapping screws. Fasten the tapping screws.

Step 4 For details on the method for connecting the cables of the alarm box, see the Universal AlarmBox User Manual delivered with the alarm box.

Step 5 Check whether the cables are connected correctly. If yes, affix the labels. Place the cables inorder and bind them.

----End



14-5

15 Checking Installation

About This Chapter

This describes how to check the installation.

PrerequisiteAfter the entire hardware installation work is completed, you must check the installation and thepower-on conditions. Ensure that the entire installation work complies with the specificationsbefore software installation and system commissioning.

ContextThe checks include installation checking and power-on checking. The checking items covercabinets, cable distribution, connectors, sockets, labels, and on-site environment. Afterinstallation checking, power-on checking must be conducted. You must follow the operationprocedure to power on each component in sequence. Thus, the electrical safety is ensured.

15.1 Checking Specifications and PrecautionsThis describes the checking specifications and precautions.

15.2 Checking Cabinet InstallationThis describes how to check the cabinet installation.

15.3 Checking Connections of PGND Cables and Power CablesThis describes the method for checking the PGND cables and the power cables.

15.4 Checking Connection of Signal CablesThis describes the procedure for checking the connection of signal cables.

15.5 Checking Installation of Connectors and SocketsThis describes how to check the installation of connectors and sockets.

15.6 Checking Installation of PeripheralsThis describes how to check the installation of peripherals.

15.7 Checking Installation of Other ComponentsThis describes how to check the installation of other components.

15.8 Checking the Power Supply

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide 15 Checking Installation


15-1

This describes how to check the power supply.

15 Checking InstallationHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

15.1 Checking Specifications and PrecautionsThis describes the checking specifications and precautions.

Checking SpecificationsThe checking specifications are based on the actual requirements and the related hardwarequality standards.

PrecautionsBefore power-on checking, make sure that the switches of all the power distribution cabinetsand power distribution frames (PDFs) are off.

15.2 Checking Cabinet InstallationThis describes how to check the cabinet installation.

ProcedureStep 1 The cabinets in a row are placed in the same line in a close and neat way.

Step 2 All the screws are fastened tightly. Each screw has a flat washer and a spring washer. The twowashers are fixed in correct order.

Step 3 The components of the cabinets are installed well. The cables are intact without any scratch. Alllabels are correct and clear.

Step 4 There are no surplus cable ties, stubs or other sundries in the cabinets The front door, back doorand side panel are tidy without any stain or handprint.

Step 5 After the cables are connected, push the cover plates to cable-through holes at the top and bottomof the cabinet to prevent animals and dust from entering.

----End

15.3 Checking Connections of PGND Cables and PowerCables

This describes the method for checking the PGND cables and the power cables.

ContextAll the power cables and grounding cables are connected firmly. The polarity is correct. Thecables are in good contact. The grounding cables include those between DC power distributioncabinet and the PDF on the top of the cabinet, those between the PDF and service frames, andthose in all service frames.

If the AC power supply is adopted, check whether the AC power cables and grounding cablesare connected firmly. Check whether the polarity is correct and whether the cables are in goodcontact.



15-3

Power cables, grounding cables cannot be bound with signal cables.

15.4 Checking Connection of Signal CablesThis describes the procedure for checking the connection of signal cables.

Context

For the internal cables such as the clock cable, check the following items:

l The cables are connected correctly. The connectors are tight.

l Cables are bound correctly. Cable ties are in correct positions and are spaced properly.

l The cable ties inside and outside the cable bundle cannot be overlapped. Cable ties aretrimmed and polished.

For the trunk cables, optical fibers, and network cable, check the following items:

l The cables cannot be stretched at the bending area.

l Cables are laid according to the specifications. Make sure that the binding space is the same.

l Cables must be laid smoothly and orderly. Cables inside the cabinets cannot be twisted.Cables outside the cabinets must be bound separately based on the cabinet that the cablesbelong to.

l Cables in cabling troughs or along the cabling ladders must be bound and laid in order. Theexternal coats of cables must be intact.

l Keep redundant cables for future use. Cable ties are well tied and trimmed without sharpends.

15.5 Checking Installation of Connectors and SocketsThis describes how to check the installation of connectors and sockets.

Context

Check the following items:

l The latches of cable connectors are tightly locked. The connector of coaxial cable is tight.

l Check the trunk cable sockets, network cable sockets, and HEADER sockets for allbackplanes. The pins of all sockets must be complete and not bent.

l Fix the protection caps to the connectors that are temporarily unused.

15.6 Checking Installation of PeripheralsThis describes how to check the installation of peripherals.

Context

Check the following items:


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

l Check whether the terminal and alarm box are placed according to the actual engineeringdesign documents.

l Check whether the voltage of terminal and alarm box complies with the specifications.

l The alarm box is firmly fixed on the wall and in horizontal level. The paint of the alarmbox is intact.

l The PVC trough is installed for the power cables and signal cables of the alarm box.

15.7 Checking Installation of Other ComponentsThis describes how to check the installation of other components.

ContextCheck the following items:

l All labels are tidy and affixed in correct positions. The marks on the labels are clear.

l Sundries, such as the cable ties, stubs, and drying agent, are removed from the following:cabling trough, bottom of the cabinet, cabling rack, top of the cabinet, and place below themovable floor around the cabinet.

l Sundries are removed from the equipment room. All things are arranged neatly.

15.8 Checking the Power SupplyThis describes how to check the power supply.

ContextYou must follow the procedure strictly during power-on checking, that is, power on the cabinetfirst; power on the frames (including the components such as LAN Switch) secondly; power onthe boards finally. If you need to power off the equipment during checking or after checking,perform the following steps: power off the boards first; power off the frames secondly; poweroff the cabinet finally.

Figure 15-1shows the procedure for power-on checking.



15-5

Figure 15-1 Procedure for power-on checking

Start

Check the power supply tothe cabinets

Check the power supply tothe frames

Check the power supplyand running of the boards

End

15.8.1 Checking the Power Supply to CabinetsThis describes how to check the power supply to cabinets.

15.8.2 Checking the Power Supply to FramesThis describes how to check the power supply to frames.

15.8.3 Checking the Power Supply to Boards and Running StateThis describes how to check the power supply to boards and running state.

15.8.1 Checking the Power Supply to CabinetsThis describes how to check the power supply to cabinets.

Context

Check the following:

l Check whether the electrical failure such as short circuit occurs to the output power cableof the power distribution cabinet.

l Check whether the input DC voltage of the cabinets is normal.

l Check whether the function of visual and audible alarm of PDFs is normal.

l Check whether the electrical failure such as short circuit occurs to the output power cableand whether input voltage of internal components is normal.

Procedure

Step 1 Shut down the DC power distribution cabinet. Set all the AC sockets and the power supplies tobe off.

Step 2 Check whether the short circuit exists between power supplies (–48 V1, –48 V2) of DC powerdistribution cabinet, or between the BGND and the PGND cables. Ensure that the power supplies


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

are disconnected with the ground. Ensure that the short circuit fault does not exist among thephase line (live line), the earth line, and the neutral line.

Step 3 Make sure that the power of the PDF on the cabinet is off. Connect the power supply of DCpower distribution cabinet. In no-load current, check whether the output voltage of the DC powerdistributed cabinet is within the voltage range with a multimeter.

l For the N66-22 cabinet, the LED alarm indicator on the PDF blinks. If the buzzer switch isset to ON, the buzzer rings.

l For the H66-22 cabinet, set the buzzer switch of the ESC monitoring box to ON, and thenthe buzzer rings.

----End

PostrequisiteAfter checking the power supply to cabinets, you can check the power supply to frames.

15.8.2 Checking the Power Supply to FramesThis describes how to check the power supply to frames.

PrerequisiteBefore checking the power supply to frames, check the power supply to cabinets.

Procedure

Step 1 Make sure that all the slots in the frames are not configured with boards.

Step 2 Power on the PDF by setting the switch to ON.

At this time, there must be no power alarm. In other words, the green RUN indicator on the PDFblinks and the red ALM indicator is off. The power buzzer does not ring. The fan frame mustrun normally without any noise.

Step 3 Check whether the components in the cabinet have power supply and whether the voltage iswithin normal range. If the voltage is normal, it indicates that power supply between cabinetsand frames is normal.

----End

PostrequisiteAfter checking the power supply to frames, you can check the power supply to boards andrunning state.

15.8.3 Checking the Power Supply to Boards and Running StateThis describes how to check the power supply to boards and running state.

PrerequisiteBefore checking the power supply to boards, check the power supply to frames.



15-7

ContextAfter the board is powered on, you can check the working state of the board through the indicatoron the front panel. For the meaning of each indicator, see HUAWEI UMG8900 Universal MediaGateway Hardware Description.

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether the –48 V power input, output cables are connected correctly.

Step 2 Power off the cabinet by setting the switch on the PDF to OFF. Insert the boards to the slots onthe backplane and then fasten the ejector levels.

Step 3 Set the power switches controlling the frames to ON. At this time, all board indicators must benormal. If the indicators of all boards do not light up after the power switches are turned on, itindicates no –48 V DC input or error of the input terminal connection. If the power switch jumpsupon being closed, it indicates that there would be short-circuit of payload or connection erroron the output terminal (short circuit).

----End

PostrequisiteThis describes the installation and powering-on checks. After all the checks, the hardwareinstallation is completed. You can start software installation and system commissioning.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

16 Installing LMT Software

About This Chapter

This describes the procedure for installing the LMT software, installation preparations, and stepsfor installing/uninstalling the software.

Context

CAUTIONBefore installing/uninstalling/upgrading the LMT software, make sure that all the LMTapplications are terminated.

The LMT system can maintain and manage the UMG8900. In addition, interfaces to theUMG8900 are available. The LMT software package contains a graphical installation wizardfeaturing perfect operability. This document mainly describes the procedure for installing theLMT software. Figure 16-1 shows the connection between the LMT and the UMG8900.

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide 16 Installing LMT Software


16-1

Figure 16-1 Connection between the LMT and the UMG8900

LMT

Router

LAN Switch

Modem

Remotemaintenance

agency

Remotemaintenance

system

Modem

UMG8900

iManager

InternetPSTN

16.1 Installation ProcedureThis describes the LMT software installation procedure.

16.2 Preparation for LMT Software InstallationThis describes the preparatory work for installing the local maintenance terminal (LMT)software.

16.3 Installing LMT SoftwareThis describes the procedure for installing the LMT software.

16.4 Checking InstallationThis describes the method for checking the LMT installation.

16.5 Uninstalling LMT SoftwareThis describes the method for uninstalling the LMT software.

16 Installing LMT SoftwareHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

16.1 Installation ProcedureThis describes the LMT software installation procedure.

Figure 16-2 shows the LMT software installation procedure.

Figure 16-2 LMT software installation procedure

Start

Installation preparations

Install hardware

Install operating system

Install LMT Software

Check Installation

End

16.2 Preparation for LMT Software InstallationThis describes the preparatory work for installing the local maintenance terminal (LMT)software.

Context

The LMT uses a personal computer (PC) as its hardware platform. To ensure the reliability andhigh performance of the system, the recommended configurations are listed in Table 16-1.

Table 16-1 Recommended configurations of the hardware and system for LMT software

Item Requirement

CPU P4 1.9 G



16-3

Item Requirement

Hard disk 40 G

Memory 512 M

Operating system Windows 2000 Professional

Network card 10/100 M bit/s auto-adaptive

Monitor 19" flat plane monitor

Other peripherals CD-ROM, integrated audio adapter, and sound box

Procedurel Check installation.

1. Check the operating system of the host.

The LMT serves as the client software for data configuration, and operation,maintenance and management of the UMG8900. The LMT is usually installed on aPC where Windows 2000 runs. It can also be installed on a PC where Windows NTor Windows XP runs.

2. Check networking and IP address configuration.

Check whether the networking is in line with the networking diagram and IP addressesare properly assigned.

The LMT can be directly connected to the operation and maintenance center (OMC)interface on the network packet switch unit (NET) of the UMG8900 through standardcrossover network cables.

The LMT can also be connected to the OMC interface of the UMG8900 by way of anIP network or hub/switch through straight through cables.

l Prepare necessary materials.

Prepare the networking diagram, version configuration table, and installation disk.

The LMT software can also be installed in other workstations if connecting to theUMG8900 correctly.

l Install hardware.

The hardware installation includes PC installation and connections of signal cables.

1. Install PC hardware, connect and check the power supply, and connect the LMT tothe UMG8900.

2. Connect multiple LMTs through an Ethernet switch or a hub.

Check all the connections, and then power on the devices to test if the hardwareinstallation is accomplished.

l Install operating system.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

CAUTIONNote that the Chinese LMT must be installed with the Chinese operating system and theEnglish LMT be installed with the English operating system.

It is to install the operating system in the PC for the LMT. If the PC operating system isavailable, just set network parameters for the PC.

1. Set network parameters. Configure the IP address and mask for the PC as the data planrequires.

2. Ping the IP address of the OMC interface of the UMG8900 host after the pingcommand is available in the operating system. If it is successful, it indicates theconnection is normal.

Windows 2000 professional operating system is recommended here. Both the Chineseversion and the English version are available. You can choose the proper version. For detailson the installation of operating system, see the installation manual that delivered with theWindows 2000 product.

NOTE

l If the OMU and NET work normally, the connection between PC and OMC interface is reachable,and you can ping through. If the OMU and NET cannot start up normally, see 19 Loading OMUSoftware Manually.

l After installing the operating system, set system resolution to 1024 x 768 and small font (default)to have a better display.

----End

PostrequisitePerform installation if the preparatory work is completed.

16.3 Installing LMT SoftwareThis describes the procedure for installing the LMT software.

Context

The LMT graphical installation software package offers a user-friendly interface to facilitate thesoftware installation in the interactive mode.

Procedure

Step 1 Start the installation program. Choose proper language before installation. Refer to Figure16-3.

Select English or other languages in the drop-down list, and click OK.



16-5

Figure 16-3 Language selection

Step 2 Click Next to start to install the UMG8900 LMT on your computer. Refer to Figure 16-4.

Figure 16-4 Welcome to the Installshield Wizard for Huawei LMT

Step 3 Enter the Copyright Notice window. Refer to Figure 16-5.

Read the related stipulations carefully. If you cannot accept the terms, check I don't acceptthese terms, and then click Cancel to exit. To install the LMT, check I accept these terms, andthen click Next.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 16-5 License agreement

Step 4 The Select installation directory window is displayed. Refer to Figure 16-6.

The default installation directory of the LMT system is D:\HW LMT. You can click Browse tochoose and set the path again. When the setting is completed, click Next to enter the Thefollowing components will be installed window.

Figure 16-6 Selecting installation directory

NOTE

If the LMT systems of different versions are installed on the LMT, the target directory and the browse inFigure 16-6 are dimmed. In this case, you cannot make any modification.

Step 5 The The following components will be installed window is displayed, and the components arelisted. Refer to Figure 16-7. Click Next.



16-7

Figure 16-7 Components to be installed

Step 6 The Please Input CD KEY window is displayed. Refer to Figure 16-8. For the CD KEY, querythe CD KEY list delivered with the UMG8900.

Enter the CD KEY. If it is correct, click Next. Otherwise, the system prompts accordingly.

Figure 16-8 Entering CD KEY

Step 7 The Installation information confirmation window is displayed. Refer to Figure 16-9. Checkwhether parameter values are correct. If yes, click Next to copy the installation programs;otherwise, click Previous to change the value.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 16-9 Confirm Installation

Step 8 The Copying files, please wait… window is displayed. Refer to Figure 16-10. During theinstallation, the system displays the copied file name and its copying progress. When the copyingis completed, the installation program starts to initialize components.

Figure 16-10 Copying files

Step 9 When the installation is completed, the Figure 16-11 window appears. Click Finish, and theinstallation of the LMT software system is completed.



16-9

Figure 16-11 Installation completed

----End

Postrequisite

After the installation, you need to set some basic parameters, including office ID and userinformation. Correct office ID setting ensures the connection between the LMT system and thehost; proper user information setting prevents illegal users from logging in to the system. Fordetails on the setting and operation instructions of the LMT system, see online help of theLMT.

16.4 Checking InstallationThis describes the method for checking the LMT installation.

Context

When the installation of the LMT is completed, you need to check the installation to ensure thenormal running of the system.

1. 16.4.1 Checking System ComponentsThis describes the system components of the LMT software.

2. 16.4.2 Checking Software VersionsThis describes the method for checking the software version of the LMT.

3. 16.4.3 Checking Running Status of LMT Service ManagerThis describes the method for checking running status of local maintenance terminal(LMT) Service Manager.

16.4.1 Checking System ComponentsThis describes the system components of the LMT software.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

ContextCheck whether the system components are installed completely. Click Start > Programs >HUAWEI local maintenance terminal. The system displays the component menu of theLMT system. A complete set of the LMT system includes the following components:

l UMG8900 Debug Tool

l UMG8900 Alarm Transmit Tool

l UMG8900 Performance Management System

l UMG8900 Tone File Process Tool

l FTP Client

l LMT Service Manager

l local maintenance terminal

l Trace Viewer

l Monitor Viewer

l Uninstall local maintenance terminal

16.4.2 Checking Software VersionsThis describes the method for checking the software version of the LMT.

ContextTo ensure that the software version of the LMT system meets the running requirements, youneed to check the software version of the LMT system.

Procedure

Step 1 Select Start > Programs > HUAWEI local maintenance terminal > local maintenanceterminal . The UMG8900 local maintenance terminal window appears.

Step 2 Select Help > About . The About window appears. Refer to Figure 16-12.



16-11

Figure 16-12 About window

Step 3 Check whether the version shown in the About window is consistent with the required version.Make sure the version meets the requirement for the running.

----End

16.4.3 Checking Running Status of LMT Service ManagerThis describes the method for checking running status of local maintenance terminal (LMT)Service Manager.

ContextLMT Service Manager is an important component of the LMT software. Its running status candirectly affect the running of the LMT system software.

When the installation is successfully completed, the system automatically starts up the LMTService Manager program.

Procedure

Step 1 When the LMT software is installed successfully, the LMT Service Manager Icon appearsat the right corner of the taskbar in the operating system.

Step 2 Click . The LMT Service Manager window appears. Refer to Figure 16-13.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 16-13 LMT Service Manager window

The LMT Service Manager window includes two parts, namely, service name and status.

l If the status of two services is Started, it indicates that the system runs normally.

l If status of any service is Stopped, it indicates that the system is abnormal or the installationis unsuccessful. In this case, contact Huawei Technical Support to handle the fault. Reinstallthe software if necessary.

----End

16.5 Uninstalling LMT SoftwareThis describes the method for uninstalling the LMT software.

Context

When the LMT system needs to be upgraded, you need to uninstall the old LMT system, andthen install new LMT system. The system provides the convenient uninstalling operation.

CAUTIONl Close all the running programs before uninstalling the LMT system to avoid failure or

incomplete uninstall.

l When deleting the old LMT system, restart the computer when prompting to restart, and theninstall the new LMT system. If the restart follows the installation of new LMT system, it islikely that the LMT system cannot run.

l The version of the UMG8900 LMT system is UMGS UMG8900V100R007.

Procedure

Step 1 Click Start > Programs > HUAWEI local maintenance terminal > Uninstall localmaintenance terminal , and the uninstalling window appears. Refer to Figure 16-14.



16-13

Figure 16-14 Uninstalling programs

Step 2 The system provides the option of uninstalling components. If you want to uninstall the wholesoftware system, select HUAWEI local maintenance terminal and click Next. The systemstarts uninstalling.

----End


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

17 Loading Host Software

About This Chapter

This describes the loading procedure, loading steps, loading method, loading check, andexception handling.

17.1 Loading ProcedureThis describes the procedure for loading the host software.

17.2 Software Loading PreparationThis describes the preparatory work for loading the host software.

17.3 Loading Host SoftwareThis describes the steps for loading the host software.

17.4 Loading the License FileThis describes the procedure for loading the license file.

17.5 Loading Tone Files DynamicallyThis describes operation steps for loading tone files dynamically.

17.6 Loading PV8 SoftwareThis describes the procedure for loading software to the PV8.

17.7 Loading RSP SoftwareThis describes the procedure for loading software to the RSP board.

17.8 Checking Loading ResultThis describes the method for checking the version consistency.

17.9 Problems HandlingThis describes the method for dealing with problems that may occur during loading or afterloading.

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide 17 Loading Host Software


17-1

17.1 Loading ProcedureThis describes the procedure for loading the host software.

If not loaded with the OMU software correctly, the OMU cannot start normally. In this case,you need to load the OMU software manually. For details, see 19 Loading OMU SoftwareManually. Other boards can be automatically loaded only when the master OMU runs normally.

Figure 17-1 shows the procedure for installing host software.

Figure 17-1 Procedure for installing host software

Start

Loading preparationscompleted

Load host software

Load LICENSE file

Load tone files

Load software to PV8boards

Load software to RSPboards

Checking versionconsistency

End

17.2 Software Loading PreparationThis describes the preparatory work for loading the host software.

17.2.1 System Hardware PreparationThis describes the system hardware required for loading the software.

17 Loading Host SoftwareHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

17.2.2 System Software PreparationThis describes the system software required for loading the software.

17.2.3 Configuring MML Batch FilesThis describes the method for modifying the MML batch files.

17.2.4 Setting FTP ServerThis describes the method for configuring the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server and the TrivialFile Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server.

17.2.5 Setting the HyperTerminalThis describes the method for setting the HyperTerminal.

17.2.6 Configuring IP address on OMC InterfaceThis describes the method for configuring the IP address on the OMC interface of theUMG8900.

17.2.7 Configuring LMT Office DirectionThis describes the method for configuring the office direction on the local maintenanceterminal (LMT).

17.2.8 Modifying MML Timeout SettingsThis describes the method for setting the man-machine language (MML) timeout on the localmaintenance terminal (LMT).

17.2.1 System Hardware PreparationThis describes the system hardware required for loading the software.

Context

Before powering on and loading the system, make the following preparations:

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether the hardware installation is completed.

Check whether the physical connections of primary boards are correct, whether the positions ofboards are correct, and whether the boards pass the power-on test.

Step 2 Check whether the sequence to start the frames is correct in multiframe cascading mode.

The startup sequence is the main control frame → the central switching frame → other frames.

If the central switching board does not start up normally, other boards cannot finish loading.

Step 3 Check whether the frame No. is set.

When configuring the frame data, ensure that the frame number is consistent with that of thedial in-line package switch (DIP switch). Otherwise, the frame cannot be loaded with thesoftware and data. For details on the setting of DIP switch, see the HUAWEI UMG8900Universal Media Gateway Hardware DescriptionFrames.

Step 4 Use the crossover cable to connect the OMC interface on the NET with the network port on thePC. If the UMG8900 is connected with the network port through the HUB or the local areanetwork (LAN), use straight through cables.



17-3

Step 5 Connect the debug serial interface COM0 on the OMU and the serial port of the PC with theserial interface cable.

----End

17.2.2 System Software PreparationThis describes the system software required for loading the software.

ProcedureStep 1 Copy all the files under the BAM directory of the software installation package to the directory

C:\BAM of the computer. The directory includes all the configuration files of the version andnecessary target files.

Step 2 Check whether the software and hardware versions are correct according to version consistencytable. Make sure the component configurations of all the boards are correct. The master OMUuses the configuration table of the host software components to load the software to the board.

NOTE

The configuration table of the host software components is written into the OMU hard disk before thedelivery of the UMG8900 OMU. Change the configuration file only when the configuration of the boardsoftware components needs changing.

----End

17.2.3 Configuring MML Batch FilesThis describes the method for modifying the MML batch files.

ContextThe MML batch file is a text file that records MML commands.

ADD IPADDR must be configured in the mml.txt file. The command is used to set the IPaddress of the BAM maintenance port on the OMU, namely, the OMC interface on the NET.After the OMU starts and becomes the master board, you need to use the IP address to log in tothe BAM of the OMU through the MML command line or the graphic interface of the LMT.

NOTE

The default address configured for this command is 129.1.1.1. Before uploading the mml.txt file to theOMU, you can modify the IP address according to the need.

ProcedureStep 1 Open the mml.txt file, and modify ADD IPADDR. Configure the IP address of the master OMU

interface (the OMC interface on the NET) for ADD IPADDR. Modify the IP address and themask information according to the actual conditions.ADD IPADDR: IPT=OMC, IPADDR="10.110.86.224",MASK="255.255.255.0", FLAG=MASTER, INVLAN=NO;

Step 2 Put the mml.txt file in the folder C:\bam on the FTP server. The MML batch files function whenthe OMU is restarted. For details on the FTP server configuration, see 17.2.4 Setting FTPServer.

----End


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

17.2.4 Setting FTP ServerThis describes the method for configuring the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) server and the TrivialFile Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server.

ContextThe loading server provides all software for the UMG8900 host software system. TheUMG8900 supports the FTP server and the TFTP server.

l Set the FTP server: You can use the FTP tool to set the user name, password and servicedirectory of the server, and place the files necessary for the installation environment in thedirectory C:\BAM of the PC for the FTP server. The BAM directory is already createdwhen the version is released and cannot be modified. You need to set the service directoryof the FTP server to BAM directory.

l Set the TFTP server: You can use the TFTP tool to set the service directory of the TFTPserver to C:\BAM.

NOTE

When the uploading file is the dynamic tone file or the UA software (the upper-layer software of the RSP/PV8), the UMG8900 does not support the TFTP protocol.

CAUTIONWindows 2000, Windows NT and Windows XP require the authentication. The user name andpassword of the FTP server must be recognized by the operating system, and the communicationmust be successful. Otherwise, the connection will fail. Windows 98 has no restriction on theFTP server.

If the built-in firewall of Windows XP is started and the UMG8900 cannot communicate withthe FTP server of the computer, loading the files may fail. Refer to Figure 17-2. You need toclick the Advanced tab in the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box to set the firewall.



17-5

Figure 17-2 Disabling firewall

For Windows XP and Windows 2000, the setting of TCP/IP filtering rules may also cause failurein loading files. As shown in Figure 17-3, you need to deselect check box Enable TCP/IPFiltering (all adapters) in the TCP/IP Filtering dialog box.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 17-3 TCP/IP filtering

Procedurel Set the FTP tool

The UMG8900 uses the FTP tool WFTPD. You can start this tool by double-clicking thewftpd32.exe file released with the software version.

1. Double-click the wftpd32.exe file and a window appears. Refer to Figure 17-4.



17-7

Figure 17-4 WFTPD window

2. Click Security > Users/rights…, then a dialog box appears. Refer to Figure 17-5.

Figure 17-5 Users/rights… dialog box

3. Click New User…, then a dialog box appears. Refer to Figure 17-6. Enter the user

name and click OK.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 17-6 Configuring the user name

4. Click Change Pass…, then a dialog box appears. Refer to Figure 17-7. Enter thepassword and click OK.

Figure 17-7 Entering the password

NOTE

When using LOD TOBAM to upload files, make sure that the parameters configured in thecommand are the same as the entered user name and password.



17-9

5. In the Home Directory dialog box, set the directory for uploading file. When usingLOD TOBAM to upload files, set the file directory to C:\BAM. If you upload filesthrough the debug port, set the file directory to C:\. Refer to Figure 17-8.

Figure 17-8 Setting the path to upload the file

6. Click Done to complete the WFTPD setting.

l Set the TFTP tool.

The TFTP tool used by the UMG8900 is the TFTPD. You can start this tool by double-clicking the Tftpd32.exe file released with the software version.

1. Double-click the Tftpd32.exe file and a window appears. Refer to Figure 17-9.

Figure 17-9 TFTPD window


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

2. Click Settings. Then, a dialogue appears. Refer to Figure 17-10. Set the path to uploadthe file in Base Directory. When using LOD TOBAM to upload files, set the filedirectory to C:\BAM. Then, click OK.

Figure 17-10 Setting the path to upload the file

----End

17.2.5 Setting the HyperTerminalThis describes the method for setting the HyperTerminal.

Context

The control operation of the OMU can be implemented through its serial port. It is recommendedto use the HyperTerminal tool provided by the Windows2000 to connect to the serial port(COM0) through serial cables to implement control operation of the OMU.

When you configure the HyperTerminal in Windows, set the parameters as follows:

l Baud rate: 57,600 bit/s

l Data bit: 8

l Stop bit: 1

l Parity: none

l Flow control: none

l Terminal emulation: VT100 (or automatically)

Procedure

Step 1 Establish a connection between serial ports. Connect the PC serial port with the configurationserial port COM0 on the master OMU through the standard EIA/TIA-232 serial port cable. Referto Figure 17-11.



17-11

Figure 17-11 Establishing physical environment

PC MGW

EIT/TIA-232 serial port

Step 2 Open the HyperTerminal on the PC and set up the corresponding serial port connection. Referto Figure 17-12.

Figure 17-12 Establishing serial port connection

Step 3 Set the parameters for the HyperTerminal. Refer to Figure 17-13.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 17-13 Setting parameters for the HyperTerminal

Step 4 Select File > Attributes . Set the terminal type to VT100 or Auto detect In the displayed dialogbox. Refer to Figure 17-14.



17-13

Figure 17-14 Setting attributes

Step 5 Set ASCII. Click ASCII Setup... in the Settings tab. Refer to Figure 17-15.

Figure 17-15 Setting ASCII


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Step 6 Log in to the HyperTerminal. Use the default super user name and password. They can bemodified on the graphical LMT.

----End

17.2.6 Configuring IP address on OMC InterfaceThis describes the method for configuring the IP address on the OMC interface of theUMG8900.

ContextLoad the software to the OMU through the OMC interface. When the OMU starts up normally,modify the IP address on the OMC interface of the OMU, and make sure the LMT can log in tothe OMU and maintain the BAM. The following two methods are available.

Procedurel Run MOD OMCIP to modify the IP address on the OMC interface.

1. Run dbgexit under the command prompt characters of the HyperTerminal, and enterthe MML mode.dbgexit;

2. Run lgi under the command prompt characters of the HyperTerminal.lgi:op="admin",pwd="9061mgw";

3. Run MOD OMCIP in the environment of the HyperTerminal, and modify the IPaddress of the OMC interface.

For example, modify IP address 129.1.1.1 of the interface on the OMU to10.110.86.224, and subnet mask to 255.255.255.0.

MOD OMCIP: OLDIP="129.1.1.1", NEWIP="10.110.86.224",NEWMASK="255.255.255.0";

4. Enter dbg in the HyperTerminal, and exit from the MML mode.dbg;

l Run RMV IPADDR and ADD IPADDR to add and delete IP address of OMC interface.1. Run dbgexit under the command prompt characters of the HyperTerminal, and enter

the MML mode.dbgexit;

2. Run lgi under the command prompt characters of the HyperTerminal.lgi:op="admin",pwd="9061mgw";

3. Run LST IPADDR in the HyperTerminal environment, and check the default IPaddress of the OMC interface.LST IPADDR: BT=OMU;

4. Run RMV IPADDR in the HyperTerminal environment, and delete the above defaultIP address of the OMC interface. The default IP address configured for OMU is129.1.1.1.RMV IPADDR: BT=OMU, BN=0, IFT=ETH, IFN=0, IPADDR="129.1.1.1",INVLAN=NO;

5. Run ADD IPADDR under the HyperTerminal environment, and configure the IPaddress of the OMC interface.



17-15

ADD IPADDR: BT=OMU, BN=0, IFT=ETH, IFN=0, IPADDR="1.1.1.1",MASK="255.255.255.0", FLAG=MASTER, INVLAN=NO;

6. Enter dbg in the HyperTerminal, and exit from the MML mode.dbg;

----End

17.2.7 Configuring LMT Office DirectionThis describes the method for configuring the office direction on the local maintenanceterminal (LMT).

Context

When logging in to the LMT for the first time, you need to add an office. Set the office IP addressto the IP address specified in the MML.txt file, and then log in to the UMG8900 host throughthe IP address to install software online.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose Start > Programs > HUAWEI local maintenance terminal > local maintenanceterminal.

Figure 17-16 shows the user login window.

Figure 17-16 User login

The users are of two types, that is, domain users and local users. The domain users are managedby the N2000 and the local users are managed by the UMG8900. The account of the domainuser is recommended for routine maintenance. The account of the local user is used for theemergency purpose only.

The UMG8900 can judge whether the user is the domain user based on the login information.If yes, the UMG8900 sends the user login request to the N2000.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

The domain users can request to change their passwords to the UMG8900 through the LMTafter the login succeeds. In this case, the UMG8900 sends the request for changing the passwordto the N2000.

When the domain users log out of the UMG8900, the UMG8900 sends the logout packet to theN2000.

Step 2 Choose System > Office Management. Add the office information in the OfficeManagement dialog box. Refer to Figure 17-17. Input an office name, and the length ofcharacters is 1 to 60. When the length is over 60, the system denies the input of extra characters.The input IP address is that of the OMC interface on the OMU.

Figure 17-17 Setting the office information

Step 3 Input the user name and password, and choose the login office in the window. Refer to Figure17-17. Then, click OK. After login, choose Authority > Change Password to change the adminpassword immediately. Choose Authority > Account to add and modify user accounts.

----End

17.2.8 Modifying MML Timeout SettingsThis describes the method for setting the man-machine language (MML) timeout on the localmaintenance terminal (LMT).

ContextBefore loading software, set MML Command Timeout(s) in the menu bar of LMT to avoidthe timeout prompt. Click System > Command Timeout Setting, and the Timeout Settingdialog box appears. Refer to Figure 17-18. Set MML Command Timeout(s) to 600, and revertto the original value 180 when the loading is completed.

Figure 17-18 Modifying timeout setting



17-17

17.3 Loading Host SoftwareThis describes the steps for loading the host software.

Context

Copy the board software in directory C:\BAM of the computer to the BAM of the MOMD. Theboard can automatically load the software in BAM of the MOMD during startup.

Procedure

Step 1 Run LOD TOBAM on the LMT to upload the host software and tone files of the MVPD to theBAM.LOD TOBAM: VT=MS, PRT=FTP, SIP="x.x.x.x", UID="bam", PWD="***",BL=VPUT-1; //Change the IP address that follows SIP to the IPaddress of the LMT, and PWD to bam.

NOTE

The files to be loaded are massive, and thus it will take several minutes to load all files. It is normal ifconnection timeout is displayed on the LMT.

Step 2 Run LOD TOBT on the LMT to write all the software of the MOMD into the FLASH of theMOMD.LOD TOBT: BT=OMU, EN=DISABLE, SRC=BAM;

Step 3 Run SYC BAMFILE on the LMT to synchronize the configuration files and loading target filesof the master MOMD to the FLASH of the slave MOMD.SYC BAMFILE:

Step 4 Run RST SYS to reset the system. The MVPD can load the software from the BAM of theMOMD during restart.RST SYS:

Step 5 When the service runs properly, run SYC MSVER to synchronize the master and slave backupversions of the MOMD. Thus, the MOMD has two copies of the same version.SYC MSVER:;

----End

17.4 Loading the License FileThis describes the procedure for loading the license file.

Context

To ensure the normal running of the system, you must get the correct license file. To load thelicense file, perform the following steps:


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

CAUTIONIf both the master and slave OMUs are configured, you need to pull out the slave OMU and loadthe license file to the master OMU when you load the license file for the first time. After thelicense file is loaded to the master OMU and is successfully activated, insert the slave OMU.Then, the slave OMU can get the correct license file from the master OMU.

Procedure

Step 1 Save the license file to the C:\license directory of the FTP server. Set the FTP server. Set thedirectory of the FTP server to C:\license, user name to lic, and password to lic. For details onhow to install and set the FTP server, see 17.2.4 Setting FTP Server.

Step 2 Download the license file from the C:\licensedirectory of the FTP server to the OMU hard diskwith DLD LICENSE.

For example, download the license file through the FTP server with the host IP address as10.110.86.117:

DLD LICENSE : IP = "10.110.86.117",USR = "lic", PWD ="***", DIR="C:\license",FN = "LIC2003080400001.DAT";

Step 3 Run LST LICENSE to confirm the serial number of the license file that needs to be activated.

Step 4 Run ACT LICENSE and enter the serial number of the license file to activate the LICENSEfile.

Step 5 If the system runs while no lawful license file starts, the system prompts you to reset the systemto validate the activated license file. Reset the system as required.

----End

17.5 Loading Tone Files DynamicallyThis describes operation steps for loading tone files dynamically.

PrerequisiteLoading basic tone packets is usually contained in the process of loading host software. Forloading basic tone packets, refer to HUAWEI UMG8900 Universal Media Gateway InstallationGuide17 Loading Host Software. Thus, this part focuses on the dynamic loading of a dynamictone file.

ContextDynamic loading of tone files is used to change the existing tones in tone packages on the VPUor add new tones to tone packages. Dynamic loading of tone files need to be performed whenthe traffic is low.



17-19

Procedure

Step 1 Start the FTP server on the PC for loading. Set user name, password and base directory (the rootdirectory of the load directory). For easy description, set User Name to bam, Password tobam, and Base Directory to c:\bam

Step 2 Copy all the prepared dynamic tone files to the \bin\tonepatch subdirectory of the load directory,that is: c:\bam\bin\tonepatch.

Step 3 Start the LMT. Run LOD TOBAM to load the tone files to the OMU file system. Set thefollowing parameters for the command:

l Version TypeSet it to DT (Dynamic tone file).

l File NameIt specifies the name of the dynamic tone file to be loaded (excluding the file path). By default,it is All of the files, indicating all dynamic tone files in the load directory c:\bam\bin\tonepatch are loaded. You can also enter the name of a file such asP001DS0001A018001FC.stf or P001DS0001A018001FC.wbv to load it only.

l Server IP Address, User Name and PasswordThey are consistent with the IP address of the PC, the user name and password set in Step 1.

For example, to load all tone files under c:\bam\bin\tonepatch of the PC 10.0.0.1, run thefollowing command:LOD TOBAM: VT=DT, SIP="10.0.0.1", UID="bam", PWD="***";

Step 4 Run LST TONEFILE to check if the dynamic tone files loaded just now exist in the OMU filesystem.

You need not set parameters for this command. However, you need to compare the query resultincluding file name and file size of the file with the tone file in the load directory. This is toconfirm if the right tone file is loaded.

Step 5 Run SYC BAMFILE to load the software and the configuration files including tone files in thefile system of the master OMU to the file system of the slave OMU.

Step 6 To decrease the risk of file loading, you need to load files to one board at a time. Before loading,isolate the board on which tone files are to be loaded and wait for one minute. This is to reducecalls distributed on the board, and ensure that the new calls are not distributed to this board. Theisolation operation does not affect online users on the isolated board.

NOTE

Isolating a board may cause traffic increase on other active boards. Thus, isolate a board only when thetraffic is low.

Step 7 Run LOD TONE to load the dynamic tone files in the OMU file system to the VPU. Specifythe following parameters for the command:

l Board TypeIt specifies the board type on which the tone file is to be loaded.

l Frame No., Slot No. and Board PositionThey specify the physical location of a board. If you do not specify them, the tone file willbe loaded to all boards of the specified type.

l File Name


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

It specifies the name of the dynamic tone file to be loaded (excluding the file path). By default,all dynamic tone files on the OMU system files are loaded. You can also enter the name ofa file to load it only.

For example, to load all tone files on the OMU file system to the VPU in slot 3 of frame 1, runthe following command:LOD TONE: FN=1, SN=3, BP=FRONT, BT=VPU;

NOTE

l The loading of dynamic tone files impacts the system performance. Therefore, load files when thetraffic is low.

l Do not load all patch files at one time. Load dynamic tone files one by one.

Step 8 After tone file loading, run CHK TONE to check if you have loaded the tone file successfully.CHK TONE: FN=1, SN=3; The following information is displayed, indicating if the tonefile matches that in the OMU file system (BAM). If yes, the files are loaded successfully. Theoutput is as follows:Frame No. Slot No. Board type File name Exist in BAM1 3 VPU P0007S0030A00000000.stf YES1 3 VPU P0007S0030A00000000.stf YES1 3 VPU P0025S0051A00000000.stf YES----------------------------------------File number in board = 3File number in bam = 3Matched file number = 3

Step 9 Activate the board: After confirming that the dynamic tone files are loaded successfully, activatethe board.

Step 10 Repeat steps 6 to 8 with other announcement boards to load dynamic tone files to them.

Step 11 After loading dynamic tone files and activating all the boards, perform dial tests on servicesrelated to the new tones on these boards to check if the loaded tones are validated.

----End

17.6 Loading PV8 SoftwareThis describes the procedure for loading software to the PV8.

Context

Software can be loaded to the PV8 in two modes: loading through dial in-line package (DIP)switches and forced loading. If only one PV8 is configured or the master and slave PV8s areconfigured,the software can be loaded through the DIP switch or in forced way. Run LODTOPV8 to set the parameter FLOD for proper loading mode.

Procedurel DIP loading

In this mode, DIP switch 1 must be set to ON. In the DIP loading mode, the parameterFLOD of LOD TOPV8 is the default value NO, which indicates no forced loading. Thatis, run LOD TOPV8 to load the software through DIP switches. After the board starts up,the software is the new version.



17-21

CAUTIONDo not reset the board during the loading process. Especially when software is loaded tothe slave PV8, you cannot to reset or pull out the master board that can make the boardabnormal.

1. Make sure both the OMU and the PV8 are powered on and run normally. To set theFTP server, see 17.2.4 Setting FTP Server.

2. Run LOD TOBAM to load the pv8.bin file in the C:\bam\bin\rsp folder from theserver whose IP address is 1.1.1.1 to the BAM of the OMU.LOD TOBAM: VT=UA, FN="pv8.bin", SIP="1.1.1.1", UID="bam",PWD="***";The parameter VT must be set to UA. This parameter is null by default.

The parameter FN refers to the name of the file to be loaded. All files are loaded bydefault. You can specify a file name to load the file.

3. Run DIR to check whether the file is loaded to the BAM of the OMU.DIR:DT="C:\bam\bin\rsp"; RETCODE = 0 accomplished

C:\bam\bin\rsp rsp Directory List: pv8.bin 2005-04-12 17:40:14

002 dir(s) 001 file(s)

The result shows that the pv8.bin file is loaded to the BAM of the OMU.4. Run LOD TOPV8 to load the pv8.bin file in the BAM to the master and slave PV8

boards in frame 2.LOD TOPV8:BFN=2,EFN=2,FNM=PV8.bin; RETCODE = 0 accomplished PV8 Loading Information --------------- Frame No. Slot No. Frame mode Frame type File name Board state Loading state

2 5 Main frame UAFM pv8.bin Slave normal load Waiting 2 6 Main frame UAFM pv8.bin Normal load Waiting

The parameters BFN and EFN refer to the begin frame No. and end frame No. of theframes that hold the PV8 boards. For single-frame loading, BFN and EFN are thesame. For multi-frame loading, software is loaded to all PV8 boards in the frameswithin the range specified by BFN and EFN.

The optional parameter FLOD indicates whether to load the software in the forcedmode. The default value is NO, which indicates that the loading is in the DIP mode.

NOTE

Multi-frame loading can be performed on 100 frames at the same time.

5. Pull out the master PV8 board. Set DIP switch 1 to ON and keep DIP switches 2, 3and 4 to OFF. Then, insert the board back into the frame.

6. Run DSP PV8LOD to query whether the loading succeeds.DSP PV8LOD:BFN=2,EFN=2; RETCODE = 0 accomplished

Display PV8 Loading Status

Frame No. Slot No. Frame mode Frame type Filename Board state Softversion Loadingstate


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

2 5 Main frame UAFM pv8.bin Slave normal 281 load Waiting 2 6 Main frame UAFM pv8.bin Normal 281 load success (Number of results = 2)

If Loading state of the PV8 in slot 6 is displayed as Load success, it indicates thatthe software is loaded to the master PV8 board.

7. Set DIP switch 1 for the master PV8 back to OFF. The master and slave PV8 boardscannot be loaded at the same time. Pull out the slave PV8 board and set DIP switch 1to ON. Keep DIP switches 2, 3 and 4 to OFF. Then, insert the board back into theframe.


Display PV8 Loading Status


2 5 Main frame UAFM pv8.bin Slave normal 281 load Waiting 2 6 Main frame UAFM pv8.bin Normal 281 load success (Number of results = 2)

If Loading state of the PV8 board in slot 5 is displayed as Load success, it indicatesthat the software is loaded to the slave PV8 board.

9. Set DIP switch 1 for the slave PV8 back to OFF.

l Forced loading

Set the parameter FLOD of LOD TOPV8 to YES, which indicates loading in the forcedmode. The board is reset automatically and the software is loaded. After the board startsup normally, the software is the new version.

CAUTIONIf both the master and slave PV8s are configured, you cannot load the software to the PV8sat the same time.

1. Make sure both the OMU and the PV8 are powered on and run normally. To set theFTP server, see 17.2.4 Setting FTP Server.

2. Run LOD TOBAM to load the pv8.bin file in the C:\bam\bin\rsp folder from theserver whose IP address is 1.1.1.1 to the BAM of the OMU.LOD TOBAM: VT=UA, FN="pv8.bin", SIP="1.1.1.1", UID="bam",PWD="***";

The parameter VT must be set to UA. This parameter is null by default.

The parameter FN refers to the name of the file to be loaded. All files are loaded bydefault. You can specify a file name to load the file.

3. Run DIR to check whether the file is loaded to the BAM of the OMU.DIR:DT="C:\bam\bin\rsp"; RETCODE = 0 accomplished

C:\bam\bin\rsp rsp Directory List:



17-23

./ ../ pv8.bin 01.08.05 10:40:14


The result shows that the pv8.bin file is loaded to the BAM of the OMU.4. Reset the slave PV8, and then run LOD TOPV8 to load the pv8.bin file in the BAM

to the master PV8 in frame 2.LOD TOPV8:BFN=2,EFN=2,FNM=PV8.bin,FLOD=YES; RETCODE = 0 accomplished

PV8 Loading Information --------------- Frame No. Slot No. Frame mode Frame type File name Board state Loading state 2 6 Main frame UAFM pv8.bin Normal load Waiting

The parameters BFN and EFN refer to the begin frame No. and end frame No. of theframes that hold the PV8. For single-frame loading, BFN and EFN are the same. Formulti-frame loading, software is loaded to all PV8s in the frames within the rangespecified by BFN and EFN.

The optional parameter FLOD is set to YES to indicate loading in the forced mode.The default value is NO, which indicates that the software is loaded in the DIP mode.

NOTE



Display PV8 Loading StatusFrame No. Slot No. Frame mode Frame type Filename Board state Softversion Loadingstate

2 6 Main frame UAFM pv8.bin Normal 264 load success (Number of results = 1)

If Loading state of the PV8 board in slot 6 is displayed as Load success, it indicatesthat the software is loaded to the PV8 board.

6. Run LST UAVER to check whether the board software is of the latest version.LST UAVER:FN=2,SN=6; RETCODE = 0 accomplished

UA frame board version information ----------------- Frame No. = 2 Slot No. = 6 Board type = PV8 Software version = 281 PCB version = 2 Logical version = ff --- END

7. Reset the master PV8 board, and then run LOD TOPV8 to load the pv8.bin file inthe BAM to the slave PV8 in frame 2.LOD TOPV8:BFN=2,EFN=2,FNM=PV8.bin;FLOD=YES; RETCODE = 0 accomplished

PV8Loading Information --------------- Frame No. Slot No. Frame mode Frame type File name Board state Loading state 2 5 Main frame UAFM pv8.bin Normal load Waiting

The parameters BFN and EFN refer to the begin frame No. and end frame No. of theframes that hold the PV8 boards. For single-frame loading, BFN and EFN are the


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

same. For multi-frame loading, software is loaded to all PV8s in the frames within therange specified by BFN and EFN.

The optional parameter FLOD is set to YES to indicate loading in the forced mode.The default value is NO, which indicates that the software is loaded in the DIP mode.

NOTE


----End

17.7 Loading RSP SoftwareThis describes the procedure for loading software to the RSP board.

Procedure

Step 1 Make sure both the OMU and the RSP boards are powered on and run normally. To set the FTPserver, see 17.2.4 Setting FTP Server.

Step 2 Run LOD TOBAM to load files rsph302.bin andrsph303.bin in the C:\bam\bin\rsp folder fromthe server whose IP address is 1.1.1.1 to the BAM of the OMU.LOD TOBAM: VT=UA, SIP="1.1.1.1", UID="bam", PWD="***";The parameter VT must be set to UA. This parameter is null by default.

The parameter FN refers to the name of the file to be loaded. All files are loaded by default. Youcan specify a file name to load the file.

Step 3 Run DIR to check whether the files are loaded to the BAM of the OMU.DIR:DT="C:\bam\bin\rsp"; RETCODE = 0 accomplished

C:\bam\bin\rsp rsp Directory List:

./ ../ RSPH302.bin 2005-04-12 17:40:14 RSPH303.bin 2005-04-12 17:40:14


The result shows that files rsph302.bin andrsph303.bin are loaded to the BAM of the OMU.

Step 4 Run LOD TORSP to load the rsph302.bin file in the BAM to the RSP board in frame 1.LOD TORSP: BFN=1, EFN=1, YON=LOAD, FNM=RSPH302.bin, WFLH=WRITEFLASH, RST=YES;RETCODE = 0 accomplished

Display RSP Loading Status --------------- Frame No. Slot No. Frame mode Frame type Filename Board state Loadingstate Write flash 1 9 Direct frame RSP_14 rsph302.bin Normal loadWaiting YES(Number of results = 1)

The parameters BFN and EFN refer to the begin frame No. and end frame No. of the framesthat hold the RSP boards. For single-frame loading, BFN and EFN are the same. For multi-frameloading, software is loaded to all RSP boards in the frames within the range specified by theBFN and EFN. Multi-frame loading can be performed on 100 frames at the same time.

If the parameter YON is set to LOAD, it indicates the loading begins again after the RSP restartsup. If it is set to CANCEL, it indicates that the loading does not begin.



17-25

The parameter FNM refers to the name of the file to be loaded. The RSP board can be H302 orH303. For the H302, only the RSPH302.bin file can be loaded. For the H303, only theRSPH303.bin file can be loaded.

The parameter WFLH indicates whether to write software to the FLASH of the RSP afterloading. If not, the software rolls back to the original version after the RSP restarts up.

Step 5 The parameter RST of LOD TORSP indicates whether to reset the RSP. The new software isvalid only after the RSP is reset. If the parameter RST is set to NO, you need to reset the RSPmanually. When the RSP restarts up, the loading is completed.

Step 6 Run DSP RSPLOD to query whether the loading succeeds.DSP PV8LOD:BFN=2,EFN=2; RETCODE = 0 accomplished

Display RSP Loading Status


1 9 Main frame UAFS rsph302.bin Normal 3121 load success (Number of results = 1)

If Loading state of the RSP board in slot 9 is displayed as Load success, it indicates that theRSP loading is completed.

Step 7 Run LST UAVER to check whether the board software is the new version.LST UAVER:FN=1,SN=9; RETCODE = 0 accomplished

UA frame board version information----------------- Frame No. = 1 Slot No. = 9 Board type = RSP Software version = 3121 PCB version = 2 Logical version = ff --- END

----End

17.8 Checking Loading ResultThis describes the method for checking the version consistency.

ContextRun CHK VERSION to check whether the BAM file version of the MOMD and the MVPD,the running version, and the saved version are correct.

CHK VERSION:VT=BAM;The output of the command is shown as follows:

2005-12-26 11:39:12 : CHK VERSION: VT=BAM;+++ HUAWEI UMG8900 2005-12-26 11:38:52O&M #10 %%CHK VERSION: VT=BAM;%%RETCODE = 0 accomplished Main Version: HUAWEI UMG8900 Vx00R00xCxxBxxx --------------------------------------------


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Check Result of BAM Current(New) Version Files(by file names): ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- File name File type Formal ver Current(New) ver Suitability Compatibility Board type belong ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- omd.vfs MASTERAPPCODE R005C02B031 <Null> <Null> <Null> OMU omd_ebootrom.bin EXBOOTROMCODE R005C02B021 R005C02B021 Yes <Null> OMU fomd_floodlogic.rbf LOGICCODE R003C03B051SP02 <Null> <Null> <Null> OMU mvpd_mini.vfs MASTERAPPCODE R005C02B031 R005C02B031 Yes <Null> VPU mvpd_ebootrom.bin EXBOOTROMCODE R005C02B021 R005C02B021 Yes <Null> VPU ec_chip.bin OCTASIC R003C03B022 R003C03B022 Yes <Null> VPU ec_vqe.bin ECVx00R00xCxxBxxx R005C02B030 Yes <Null> VPU mvpd_vpd.bit VPDLOGIC R003C03B049 R003C03B049 Yes <Null> VPU dsp_mix_c64.arj DSPFW R005C02B031 R005C02B031 Yes <Null> VPU dsp_g711rx_c64.arj DSPFW R005C02B031 R005C02B031 Yes <Null> VPU dsp_vig_c64.arj DSPFW R005C02B020 R005C02B020 Yes <Null> VPU dsp_mpty_c64.arj DSPFW R005C02B022 R005C02B022 Yes <Null> VPU ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Finished checking current(new) version files saved on BAM Files checked: 12--- END

As shown in the returned results, the information in the Compatibility column indicates whetherthe formal version matches the current version. The result should be Yes or Null.

Use the CHK VERSION command to check whether the versions of the running software matchthose of the saved software.

CHK VERSION:VT=BRD;The output result of the command is as follows:

+++ HUAWEI UMG8900 2006-02-21 17:54:01 %%CHK VERSION: VT=BRD;%% RETCODE = 0 accomplished Checking, please wait...

--- END +++ RETCODE = 0 Frame No. 1, Slot No. 3, Front board, VPU, No disagreement.

+++ RETCODE = 0 Frame No. 1, Slot No. 2, Front board, OMU, No disagreement.

+++ RETCODE = 0 Frame No. 1, Slot No. 4, Front board, VPU, No disagreement. +++ RETCODE = 0 Frame No. 1, Slot No. 1, Front board, OMU, No disagreement.

+++ RETCODE = 0 Main version: HUAWEI UMG8900 Vx00R00xCxxBxxx +++ RETCODE = 0 Version checking has completed.

For each board, the result should be No disagreement. That is, the version of the runningsoftware is the same with that of the loaded software.



17-27

17.9 Problems HandlingThis describes the method for dealing with problems that may occur during loading or afterloading.

During the software installation, some software need to be loaded and the loading process of theOMU is relatively complex. Therefore, problems may occur.

Handle the problems based on the following rules:

l Strictly follow the operation guidelines in the document of software installation，Payattention to the attentive sectors.

l Confirm the validity of the operation before handling problems.

l Do not modify any files in the folder c:\bam or its sub-folders in the OMU hard disk atrandom.

l If you cannot solve the problems by consulting the documentation and the related onlinehelp, record the related data and contact Huawei technical support staff at local officeimmediately.

CAUTIONIf the following checking items are normal but there is no display yet, contact Huawei technicalsupport staff at local office. Do not operate more as other faults may occur.

17.9.1 No Display on Serial Port Console After System Starts up

17.9.2 Illegible Characters Displayed on Serial Port Console After System Starts up

17.9.3 Normal Display After System Starts up but Command Input Failure

17.9.4 Communication Failure Between the UMG8900 and the FTP Serve on LMT

17.9.5 OMU Board Startup Failure

17.9.6 Loading Failure of Other Boards

17.9.7 UMG8900 Host Software Incorrectly Uploaded to the OMU Hard Disk

17.9.8 Using File Uploading Command of Loading Management Wrongly

17.9.9 Using Unmatched Version

17.9.10 Failing to Recover Configuration Data After System Restarts up

17.9.1 No Display on Serial Port Console After System Starts up

Check whether the serial ports are properly connected, whether the serial port cable isdisconnected, or whether the connected serial port is the same as that configured on theHyperTerminal.

You also need to check whether the configured parameters of the serial port on theHyperTerminal are the same as those described in 17.2.5 Setting the HyperTerminal. The


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

parameters include the baud rate set on the HyperTerminal. If not, modify them according to17.2.5 Setting the HyperTerminal.

17.9.2 Illegible Characters Displayed on Serial Port Console AfterSystem Starts up

This fault is usually caused by the wrong configuration on the serial port. Therefore, check theconfiguration of the serial port on the HyperTerminal. Especially check whether the baud rateis the same as that configured in 17.2.5 Setting the HyperTerminal. If not, modify it.

If the fault persists, contact Huawei technical support staff at local office.

17.9.3 Normal Display After System Starts up but Command InputFailure

The fault is usually caused by the serial port cable. Therefore, you need to replace it to rectifythe fault.

If the new cable fails, you can use another serial port on the console.

If you are using the Windows HyperTerminal, you just need to reboot Windows to rectify thefault.

17.9.4 Communication Failure Between the UMG8900 and the FTPServe on LMT

If the built-in firewall of Windows XP is started and the UMG8900 cannot communicate withthe FTP server of the PC, loading files will fail. Refer to Figure 17-19. You need to selectClose in Setting in the Advanced tab in the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box.



17-29

Figure 17-19 Disabling firewall

For Windows XP and 2000, the setting of TCP/IP filtering rules may also cause failure in loadingfiles. You need to deselect check box Enable TCP/IP Filtering (all adapters) in the TCP/IPFiltering dialog box. Refer to Figure 17-20.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 17-20 TCP/IP filtering

17.9.5 OMU Board Startup Failure

If the BootROM fails to start up, the system will continually reset the board. If the upper layersoftware fails to start up, it is probably caused by the upper software failure.

If the board is repeatedly reset when the BootROM is started, you can judge whether the faultresults from the BootROM version or the upper layer software based on the debugging outputof the OMU serial port.

The board upper layer software version corresponds to the software system. Changing thesoftware version may result in the failure of the board upper layer software to boot.

In preceding cases, check whether the UMG8900 software is complete, and whether theirversions are consistent according to the version configuration information table and releasenotes.

17.9.6 Loading Failure of Other Boards

If the software loading fails on a board except the OMU, the system exports the debugginginformation on the serial port of the OMU. To judge the loading failure, you need to check thedebugging information output on the serial ports on both the failed board and the master OMU.

If the system prompts NegoErr on the board, it indicates error in version negotiation. Thereason may be that only some or no software of the service board is saved in the hard disk ofthe master OMU if the board boot mode is set to CONSULT or LOAD. You need to checkwhether the board software is uploaded correctly.



17-31

If the system prompts Fail to send DidReq message to OMU on the board and thenresets the board, it indicates that the board fails to send the DidReq message to the master OMUwhen the BootROM run. The reason may be that the master OMU does not start up or that themaster OMU starts up but the inter-process communication (IPC) channel between the masterOMU and the service board is abnormal. If the IPC channel is normal, you can view thesynchronization information of the IPC channels from the master OMU and the board sides whenthe BootROM starts the loading function. If the IPC channel is abnormal, it may be because theCPUID is calculated incorrectly. In this case, check whether the frame number and slot numberof the board are correct.

If the system prompts Master application error on the board, it indicates that thecyclic redundancy check (CRC) error occurs when the board starts the upper layer software. Thereason may be that the upper layer software saved in the FLASH of the board is damaged orincomplete. If you are sure that the software is loaded from the hard disk of the master OMU,check whether the software saved in the hard disk of the OMU is correct.

17.9.7 UMG8900 Host Software Incorrectly Uploaded to the OMUHard Disk

Files can be loaded in two modes: one through LOD TOBAM of MML command, and the otherthrough FTP on the debug interface FE0 of the OMU.

The uploaded files are not named based on the version configuration table, which causes thatthe OMU loading management function cannot recognize the files.

The uploaded files are incomplete and the binary target files of the board software are uploadedin text, which causes error to the target files saved in the OMU hard disk. Thus, the board cannotstart up after software loading.

Not all the software in the version configuration information table is uploaded, which causesrepeated board resets due to unavailability of corresponding files.

17.9.8 Using File Uploading Command of Loading ManagementWrongly

With the support of the FTP server, the loading management function can also dynamically loadthe host software and update the version configuration table.

All the connections and settings on the FTP server are correct. However, after you run LODTOBAM on the LMT command line, the system does not respond and reports failure after along time.

Cause: If the BAM maintenance port of the OMU is connected with the PC network port througha straight through cable, the connection may fail because the configured IP addresses are not inthe same sub-network. The FTP connection may also fail due to network congestion. Make surethat you can successfully ping the IP address of the BAM maintenance network port on the OMUfrom the PC.

17.9.9 Using Unmatched Version

Each product version has its own hardware logic, BSP, upper layer software, and softwareconfiguration data. Therefore, you must use them according to the matched version. Other modesof usage may cause failure in board startup or service running unless compatible usage.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

In this case, you need to reload the software to the OMU and update the software on all theservice boards. Use them according to the matched version.

17.9.10 Failing to Recover Configuration Data After System Restartsup

One possible reason is that the configuration data is not saved. If so, you have to configure thedata again and save it.

CAUTIONThe configuration data cannot be saved automatically. Therefore, you need to save it to theconfiguration file with SAVE CFG . In this case, the system can restore the configuration dataafter it restarts up.

Another possible reason is that the OMU hard disk is damaged. If so, you need to replace theOMU. Most often, the configuration data cannot be restored because it is not saved.



17-33

18 Configuring Remote MaintenanceSystem

About This Chapter

This describes the applications, configuring procedure, and checking method of remotemaintenance system.

ContextThe remote maintenance system provides an interface for maintenance personnel to access andmaintain the UMG8900 at a remote end. The maintenance personnel can connect the localcomputer to the public switched telephone network (PSTN) through the modem and dial up tothe remote server. The maintenance personnel can also monitor and maintain the device runningin the network through the remote access service provided by the Windows 2000 Server.

NOTE

The Microsoft Windows 2000 operating system belongs to Microsoft Corporation. For details, see technicaldocuments of the Microsoft Windows 2000.

The remote maintenance system mainly applies to the case where the maintenance interface ofthe device uses a private network address and cannot connect to the Internet directly. The remotemaintenance system is unnecessary if the private intranet is used to maintain the device. Theremote maintenance system is used only when maintenance personnel cannot log in to the userintranet at the remote end. The maintenance personnel needs to maintain the device through theInternet.

l Physical connection access modeThe UMG8900 provides a remote maintenance system for remote dial-up access. Theremote workstation dials up to connect the remote access server (RAS) through the PSTN.Refer to Figure 18-1. The client software is installed on the remote workstation and theremote access service is configured on the RAS.

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide 18 Configuring Remote Maintenance System


18-1

Figure 18-1 Dial-up service networking

RemoteAccess Server

Remote WS

UMG8900LAN Switch

Modem

Modem

PSTN

l Software/hardware configuration

On local emergency workstation, the Windows 2000 Server operating system is installedand the remote access service is configured.On remote terminal, the operating system such as Windows 98 or Windows 2000Professional can be installed and the dial-up network program is configured.The external modem or built-in modem is configured on both the remote terminal and theRAS.

18.1 Installation ProcedureThis describes the procedure for installing the remote maintenance system.

18.2 Installing the ModemThis describes the procedure for installing the modem.

18.3 Installing the Remote Access ServerThis describes the procedure for installing the remote access server.

18.4 Adding Dial-up UsersThis describes the procedure for adding dial-up users.

18.5 Checking the Remote Maintenance SystemThis describes the procedure for checking the remote maintenance system.

18 Configuring Remote Maintenance SystemHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

18.1 Installation ProcedureThis describes the procedure for installing the remote maintenance system.

Installing remote maintenance system is to install the remote access server (RAS) on theemergency workstation.

Figure 18-2 shows the procedure for installing the RAS on the emergency workstation.

Figure 18-2 Procedure for installing remote maintenance system

Start

Install the modem

Install the remoteaccess server

Add dial-up user

Check remotemaintenance system

End

18.2 Installing the ModemThis describes the procedure for installing the modem.

ContextThe following takes the external modem as an example to describe the installation steps.

Procedure

Step 1 In the Windows 2000 operating system, choose Start > Setting > Control Panel, and double-click Telephone and modem. Alternatively, click Start > Setting > Control Panel, then,double-click Add/Remove Hardware to install a modem. If no modem is installed in the system,a dialog box appears after you double-click Telephone and modem. Refer to Figure 18-3. Inthe Windows XP operating system, choose Start > Control Panel. Double-click Phone andModem Options. Then, you can set the modem. If the modem is not installed, choose theModems tab and click Add.... Then, the window as shown in Figure 18-3 is displayed.



18-3

Figure 18-3 Installing a new modem

Step 2 Select Don't detect my modem; I will select it from a list, and then click Next. Figure 18-4shows the dialog box that appears.

Figure 18-4 Selecting the modem

Step 3 Select the serial port for the modem.

l Select the modem model in the list and then click Next. Then, select the serial port for themodem.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

l You can also click Have Disk. Insert the modem installation disk, and then specify the pathto install files. Select the serial port for the modem. Refer to Figure 18-5.

Figure 18-5 Selecting the serial port for the modem

Step 4 The modem driver is installed automatically. A dialog box appears after the installation,indicating that the installation is successful. Refer to Figure 18-6. Click Finish.

Figure 18-6 Completing modem installation



18-5

Step 5 After the modem is installed, select the installed modem in modem tab, and click Properties.You can set the modem property and dial property. In general, you can adopt the default values.Refer to Figure 18-7.

Figure 18-7 Setting Phone and Modem Properties

----End

18.3 Installing the Remote Access ServerThis describes the procedure for installing the remote access server.

ContextAfter the Windows 2000 server is installed, the remote access component is automaticallyinstalled. However, the status of the routing and remote access server is disabled. You need toconfigure and enable routing and remote access.

ProcedureStep 1 Click Start > Setting > Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Routing and Remote

Access to display the Routing and Remote Access window. Right-click the server to be


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

configured. Then, click the Configure and Enable Routing and Remote Access menu. Referto Figure 18-8.

Figure 18-8 Routing and remote access

Step 2 Select Configure and Enable Routing and Remote Access. The Welcome to the Routingand Remote Access Server Setup Wizard window appears. Refer to Figure 18-9.

Figure 18-9 Welcome to the routing and remote access server setup wizard

Step 3 Click Next, then the Common Configurations window appears. The common configurationsinclude Internet connection server, Remote access server, Virtual private network (VPN)



18-7

server, Network router, Manually configured server. Select Remote access server. Refer toFigure 18-10.

Figure 18-10 Common configurations

Step 4 Click Next. The Remote Access Server Setup dialog box appears. Select Set up an advancedremote access server. Then, click Next. Refer to Figure 18-11.

Figure 18-11 Remote access server setup


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Step 5 Click Next. The Remote Client Protocols dialog box appears. Check whether the TCP/IPprotocol required by remote client server is listed. If not, add the protocol. Refer to Figure18-12.

Figure 18-12 Remote client protocols

Step 6 Click Next. The IP address Assignment dialog box appears. This dialog box can help theoperators select IP address range for remote clients. Select From a specified range ofaddresses to set the IP address range to remote clients. Refer to Figure 18-13.

Figure 18-13 IP address assignment



18-9

Step 7 Click Next to assign a static pool of IP addresses to remote clients. The New Address Rangedialog box appears. This server assigns all the addresses in the first range before continuing tothe next. Refer to Figure 18-14.

Figure 18-14 Address range assignment

Step 8 Click New… to assign the IP address range to remote workstations. A dialog box appears. Referto Figure 18-15.

Use the static address set and configure its range. When you configure the static address set,note that the address set must be within a reasonable range of the network. Usually less thanfour IP addresses are assigned so that other workstations can be added to the server. The localPC cannot use the IP addresses in the static address set. To avoid the conflict of IP addresses, itis recommended to use the network segment ranging from 129.9.160.200 to 129.9.160.202. Aftersetting the address range, click OK. Refer to Figure 18-15.

Figure 18-15 New address range


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Step 9 Click Next. Refer to Figure 18-16.

Figure 18-16 Address range assignment

Step 10 The Managing multiple remote access servers dialog box provides a database to verify theidentification for multiple remote access servers. Select No, I don't want to set up this serverto use remote RADIUS now. Refer to Figure 18-17.

Figure 18-17 Managing multiple remote access servers



18-11

Step 11 Click Finish to complete the routing and remote access server setup wizard. Refer to Figure18-18.

Figure 18-18 Completing the routing and remote access server setup wizard

Step 12 After the setup is completed, the Routing and Remote Access window displays the remoteaccess server that is configured. Refer to Figure 18-19.

Figure 18-19 Configured remote access server

Step 13 Right-click Ports and then click Properties on the shortcut menu to set the port of the remoteaccess server. Refer to Figure 18-20.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 18-20 Setting port properties

Step 14 Select Properties. Then the Ports Properties dialog box appears. Select your modem and thenclick Configure…. Refer to Figure 18-21.

Figure 18-21 Selecting the modem



18-13

Step 15 In the displayed dialog box, select both the Remote access connections (inbound only) andDemand-dial routing connections (inbound and outbound) check boxes. Then, type thephone number for this device, which should be the same as that of the telephone connected.Refer to Figure 18-22.

Click OK to complete the modem configuration for the remote access server. Then anauthenticated client can connect to the server and access the intranet where the server is located.

Figure 18-22 Setting port properties of the modem

Step 16 This step enables clients to access the intranet to which the remote access server is connectedand to set the properties of incoming connections. Right-click My Network Places and selectOpen. Then right-click Incoming Connections and select Properties on the shortcut menu.The Network and Dial-up Connections window appears. Refer to Figure 18-23.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 18-23 Network and dial-up connections

Step 17 Right-click Incoming Connections Properties, and select Properties on the shortcut menu.Under the Networking tab, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and then click Properties. Referto Figure 18-24.



18-15

Figure 18-24 Incoming connections properties

Step 18 The Incoming TCP/IP Properties dialog box appears. Select Allow callers to access my localarea network. Verify other settings and click OK. Refer to Figure 18-25.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 18-25 Incoming TCP/IP properties

----End

18.4 Adding Dial-up UsersThis describes the procedure for adding dial-up users.

ContextAfter the dial-up server is configured, you need to allocate accounts to dial-in users; otherwise,remote users cannot access the system.

Procedure

Step 1 Click Start > Programs > Administrative Tools > Computer Management and theComputer Management window appears. Refer to Figure 18-26.



18-17

Figure 18-26 Computer management

Step 2 Select Local Users and Groups in the expanded navigation tree and click Users. Then, all theusers of the server are listed in the right pane of the window. Refer to Figure 18-27. To add anew user, right-click the right panel and click New User… on the shortcut menu. You can alsoclick the Action > New User menu in the Computer Management window to add a new user.

Figure 18-27 Setting local users and groups

Step 3 Set related parameters and then click Create. Refer to Figure 18-28.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure 18-28 Adding a new user

To ensure the network security, it is recommended to select the User cannot changepassword and Password never expires check boxes.

Step 4 Right click the new user and then click Properties on the shortcut menu. Refer to Figure18-29.

Figure 18-29 User dial properties interface



18-19

Step 5 In the Dial Properties dialog box, click the Dial-in tab. Then, select Allow access in the RemoteAccess Permissions (Dial-in or VPN) area and No Callback in the Callback Options area.Refer to Figure 18-30. Click OK to complete setting the dial-in properties. Now the remoteoperator can access the host through a telephone line.

Figure 18-30 Setting dial-in properties

----End

18.5 Checking the Remote Maintenance SystemThis describes the procedure for checking the remote maintenance system.

18.5.1 Checking ModemThis describes the steps for checking the modem.

18.5.2 Checking Remote Access ServerThis describes the steps for checking the remote access server (RAS).

18.5.1 Checking ModemThis describes the steps for checking the modem.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Procedure

Step 1 Connect the telephone line to the LINE port on the modem of the server.

Step 2 Click Start > Programs > Accessories > Communication Tool > Phone Dialer, and a windowappears. Refer to Figure 18-31.

Figure 18-31 Phone dialer

Step 3 Dial the number of another phone for test, and then click Dial.

Step 4 Listen whether this test phone rings, and whether there is dial tone when the modem dials.

Step 5 If you can hear the ringing and dial tones, it indicates that the modem is correctly installed.Otherwise, the modem is not correctly installed or configured. In the latter case, you need touninstall the modem, and then install it again.

----End

18.5.2 Checking Remote Access ServerThis describes the steps for checking the remote access server (RAS).

Procedure

Step 1 Connect the telephone line to the test computer where the modem and dial-up network adapterare installed.

Step 2 Click Start > Programs > Accessories > Communication Tool > Dial-Up Networking anda window appears. Refer to Figure 18-32.



18-21

Figure 18-32 Entering Dial-Up Networking dialog box

Step 3 If there is no connection displayed in the Dial-Up Networking window, double-click MakeNew Connection icon. Then you can create a new connection as prompted by the system. Afterthe new connection is set up, this connection is displayed in the window.

Double-click the new connection and a dialog box pops up. Refer to Figure 18-33.

Figure 18-33 Setting up a new connection


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Step 4 In the dialog box, type the user name and password that are added at the emergency workstation.Type the telephone number used by the modem of the emergency workstation. Then clickConnect to start dialing the number.

Step 5 Wait and see whether the connection is successful. If it is successful, make the following test:l Click Start > Run . In the displayed dialog box, run PING command by typing PING

129.9.x.x and click OK to run this command. Here, 129.9.x.x is the IP address of thecomputer in the LAN where the emergency workstation is located. The computer can be theemergency workstation, BAM server or common workstation.

l Check the returned result with the PING command. If the connection is normal, the promptof Reply from xxx appears. In the prompt, xxx is the typed IP address. It indicates thatthe dial-up network works normally, and the dial up server is installed successfully.

l If the PING command fails, check the RAS setting on the emergency workstation.

Step 6 If the dial-up connection fails, check the following items:l Whether the IP address of the dial-up network adapter in the remote workstation is Get IP

address automatically.l Whether the dial-up user is added to the emergency workstation, and whether the user name

and password are correct.l Whether the RAS is set correctly on the emergency workstation.

----End

PostrequisiteIf all the preceding check items are normal, the RAS can access the terminal system of theUMG8900 through the public switched telephone network (PSTN).



18-23

19 Loading OMU Software Manually

About This Chapter

This describes the applications, loading preparations, loading procedure, and loading steps.

ContextThe OMU of the UMG8900 is installed with software before delivery. The installed softwarecontains management software, service board software and other configuration files. That is theinstallation of the whole BAM is completed. By default, when the UMG8900 is powered on,the OMU can start normally; If not, you need to load the software to the OMU manually.

NOTEYou need to load the OMU software manually only when the OMU cannot start. If the OMU can start normally,bypass this step and perform 17 Loading Host Software.

19.1 Loading ProcedureThis describes the procedure for loading software to the OMU manually.

19.2 Software Loading PreparationThis describes the preparatory work for loading the OMU manually.

19.3 Software Loading ProcedureThis describes the procedure for manually loading software to the OMU.

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide 19 Loading OMU Software Manually


19-1

19.1 Loading ProcedureThis describes the procedure for loading software to the OMU manually.

The OMU manages and maintains the UMG8900 host. The OMU, as the core management unit,also provides the interfaces connecting with the LMT and the iManager.

When the OMU starts normally, you can install software in the UMG8900 host. Other boardscan start only when the OMU starts normally. The support of the OMU is required in loadingand upgrading other boards.

Figure 19-1 shows procedures for loading software to the OMU manually.

Figure 19-1 Procedure for loading software to the OMU manually

Start

Manual loading preparationscompleted

Power on the main control frameand start the OMU

Set the FTP server

Start the FTP service anddownload part of the configuration

files

Reset and reboot the OMU

Install all software on the OMU

Load software on the slave OMU

Check version consistency

End

19 Loading OMU Software ManuallyHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

19.2 Software Loading PreparationThis describes the preparatory work for loading the OMU manually.

Context

The preparatory work includes:

l System hardware preparations

l System software preparations

l Modifying MML configuration files

l Setting the FTP server

l Setting the HyperTerminal

For details on modifying the MML configuration file, see 17.2.3 Configuring MML BatchFiles.

For details on setting FTP server see 17.2.4 Setting FTP Server.

For details on HyperTerminal see 17.2.5 Setting the HyperTerminal.

19.2.1 System Hardware PreparationThis describes the hardware required for loading the OMU software manually.

19.2.2 System Software PreparationThis describes the software required for loading the OMU software manually.

19.2.1 System Hardware PreparationThis describes the hardware required for loading the OMU software manually.

Procedure

Step 1 Check whether the hardware installation is completed.

Check whether the physical connections of primary boards are correct, whether the positions ofboards are correct, and whether the boards pass the power-on test.

Step 2 Connect the OMC interface of the MOMD in slot 1 and the PC network port with the crossovernetwork cable.

If the UMG8900 is connected through the HUB or the local area network (LAN), use the straightthrough network cable to connect them.

Step 3 Connect the debug serial port COM0 on the MMIU to the computer serial port with the serialinterface cable.

----End

19.2.2 System Software PreparationThis describes the software required for loading the OMU software manually.



19-3

Procedure

Step 1 Copy all the files in the BAM directory of the software installation package to directory C:\BAMof the PC. The directory includes all the configuration files of the version and the necessarytarget files.

Step 2 Copy the filelist.txt file and omd_vxWorks_l file of the software installation package to thedirectory C:\ of the PC.

----End

19.3 Software Loading ProcedureThis describes the procedure for manually loading software to the OMU.

Context

CAUTIONIf loading the software to the master/slave OMUs, you need to pull out the slave OMU. Afterthe software is loaded to the master OMU, insert the slave OMU, and synchronize the softwareof the master OMU to the slave OMU.

Procedure

Step 1 Pull out the MOMD in slot 2. Power on the SSM frame, and then start the MOMD in slot 1.

Step 2 The MOMD runs the basic BootROM, and you can view the startup process throughHyperTerminal. Press Enter upon the appearance of the following message to enter the BSPmode.Press Enter to stop auto-boot...

Step 3 Modify BSP configuration files of the OMU.

After the basic BoorROM of the OMU is started, press any key to access the bottom supportprogram (BSP) command menu during auto booting countdown. Use the BSP commandcharacter p to view the IP address, user name and password of the FTP server, the name of theVxWorks map file and IP address of the debug port configured by BSP. Other options can beignored. If the configuration is inconsistent with that of the PC, use the BSP command characterc to modify the configuration. Perform the following steps:

[VxWorksBoot]: c //Input the C command to change the boot parameters.

boot device : motfcc0 processor number : 0 host name : hostfile name : omd_vxWorks_l.st //The name of the VxWorks system mapping file inet on ethernet (e) : xx.xx.xx.xx //The IP address of the OMC interface on the MOMD inet on backplane (b) :

19 Loading OMU Software ManuallyHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

host inet (h) : xx.xx.xx.yy //The IP address of the PC gateway inet (g): user (u) : bam //The user name for logging into the FTP server ftp password (pw)(blank=use rsh) : bam //The password for logging into the FTP server

flags (f) : 0x0 target name (tn) : target startup script (s) : other (o) ://Complete setting the boot parameters after pressing the Enter key.

Step 4 Download the omd_vxWorks_l.st file automatically.

Use BSP command character @ to automatically download the omd_vxWorks_l.st file fromthe FTP server of PC.

The automatic loading includes writing the OMU-related software to the OMU hard disk,initializing the hard disk (including formatting), and uploading some configuration files in BAMdirectory of the PC to the OMU hard disk based on the filelist.txt file.

NOTE

The automatic loading includes writing the MOMD-related software into the FLASH of the MOMD,initializing the FLASH file system (deleting the whole FLASH), and loading related configuration files inBAM directory of the PC to the MOMD file system. Then, the MOMD restarts.

Step 5 Insert the MOMD in slot 2.

Step 6 Run do reboot on the HyperTerminal to reset the MOMD in slot 1. Then, pull out theMOMD in slot 1.

Step 7 Connect the debug network cable to the debug network port of the MOMD in slot 2. Then,connect the debug serial port to the COM1 of the MMIU.

Step 8 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 to load the software to the MOMD in slot 2.

NOTE

If the MOMD in slot 2 starts the software in upper layer, run do reboot to reset the board.

Step 9 Insert the MOMD in slot 1.

----End

PostrequisiteIf the software is loaded to two MOMDs, perform the steps in 17.3 Loading Host Software.



19-5

A Mounting Cabling Racks

This describes how to mount the cabling racks.

ContextFigure A-1 shows the procedure for mounting cabling racks.

Figure A-1 Procedure for mounting cabling racks

Start

Where to mount thecabling rack?

Indoor

Wall mountingCeiling/floormounting

Over-cabinetmounting

Outdoor

Walling mounting Ceiling/floormounting

Install the cablingladder

Cabling troughrequired?

Mount thecabling trough

Mount theaccessories

End

Yes

No

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide A Mounting Cabling Racks


A-1

NOTE

l The cabling racks include the cabling ladders and cabling troughs (optional).

l When cables are laid in overhead cabling mode, it is recommended to install cabling racks. If the cablingracks are not required, skip this part.

l It is recommended to install 400 mm [15.7 in.] cabling ladder rather than cabling troughs above thecabinet. This can facilitate the cabling and is good for heat dissipation.

A.1 Introduction to Cabling RacksThis describes the specifications and components of the cabling rack.

A.2 Mounting Indoor Cabling RacksThis describes how to mount the indoor cabling racks.

A.3 Mounting Outdoor Cabling RacksThis describes how to mount the outdoor cabling racks.

A.4 Mounting Cabling LaddersThis describes how to mount the cabling ladders.

A.5 Mounting Cabling TroughsThis describes how to mount the cabling troughs.

A.6 Mounting AccessoriesThis describes how to connect the cable-through racks, end covers, trough rims, and baffle rings.

A Mounting Cabling RacksHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide

A-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

A.1 Introduction to Cabling RacksThis describes the specifications and components of the cabling rack.

SpecificationsIn overhead cabling mode, mount the cabling rack in the equipment room. The cables can goalong the cabling rack. The cabling ladder is mainly used and the cabling trough is an auxiliarycomponent (optional).

The specifications of the cabling ladder and cabling trough are as follows:

l Choose 200 mm [7.9 in.] wide cabling trough for 200 mm [7.9 in.] wide cabling ladder.

l Choose 400 mm [15.7 in.] wide cabling trough for 400 mm [15.7 in.] wide cabling ladder.

l Choose 400 mm + 200 mm [15.7 in. + 7.9 in.] wide cabling trough for 600 mm [23.6 in.]wide cabling ladder.

The cabling ladder is 2.5 m [8.2 ft.] long and the cabling trough is 2 m [6.6 ft.] long for delivery.

ComponentsTable A-1 lists the components for mounting the cabling trough.

Table A-1 Procedure for mounting cabling racks

Figure A-2 Cabling ladder

Figure A-3 U-shaped connecting piece

Figure A-4 Bracket angle

Figure A-5 Cable manager



A-3

Figure A-6 Triangular support

Figure A-7 Connecting clip

Figure A-8 Fixing clip

Figure A-9 Cabling trough

Figure A-10 Movable bushing

Figure A-11 End cover

Figure A-12 Rectangular frame

Figure A-13 U-steel

A.2 Mounting Indoor Cabling RacksThis describes how to mount the indoor cabling racks.

PrerequisiteThe cabling rack must be insulated from the floor, ceiling, or wall.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Context

The indoor cabling rack can be mounted in three ways:

l Ceiling mounting or floor mounting

l Wall mounting

Procedurel Ceiling mounting or floor mounting

CAUTIONl The spacing between suspending lever and support lever must be an integer multiple of

50 mm [2.0 in.]. The recommended value is 1250 mm [49.2 in.], that is, each cablingsegment is supported by two suspending levers or two support levers.

l For ceiling mounting or floor mounting, mount the suspending lever or supporting leveroutside the cabling ladder for easy mounting of cabling trough. Add the insulating padand insulating washer during mounting.

l When fixing the bracket angle to the ceiling or floor with the expansion bolts, replacethe flat washer on the expansion bolt with the large flat washer 8.

l Use the bolt M6x20 to connect the bracket angle with the suspending lever. If the cablingtrough is installed on the cabling ladder, mount the bolt as top as possible, and spacethe bolt at least 40 mm [1.6 in.] from the cabling ladder. Refer to Figure A-14.

When the cabling rack is not mounted against the wall, you can choose the ceiling mountingor floor mounting.

– For ceiling mounting, use the suspending lever to connect to the ceiling.

– For floor mounting, use the support lever to connect to the floor.

Ceiling mounting and floor mounting are similar. The ceiling mounting is taken as anexample to describe the mounting procedure.

1. Determine the position for mounting the cabling rack according to the engineeringfiles.

2. Determine and mark the position for mounting the suspending lever according to theposition of cabling rack.

3. Choose a Ф10 bit to drill holes at the marked positions, with the hole depth from 60mm [2.4 in.] to 65 mm [2.6 in.].

4. Screw on the nut M8 anticlockwise to the top of the expansion bolt M8x80, and putthem into the holes vertically. Knock the expansion bolt with a claw hammer until thetube is knocked completely into the ceiling. Take off the flat washer and spring washerfrom the expansion bolt.

5. Cut the U-steel with a proper length as the suspending lever according to the heightof the cabling rack and equipment room. When the required length exceeds 2.5 m [8.2ft.], you can connect two U-steels together. For the connection method, see A.4Mounting Cabling Ladders. Remember to paint the cross section.



A-5

6. Mount bracket angles on both ends of the suspending lever with the bolt M6x20 andnut M6.

7. Put the insulating pad on the expansion bolts, and then put the expansion bolts throughthe holes in the bracket angle. Add the insulating washers, large flat washers 8, springwashers 8 and nuts M8 onto the expansion bolts. Screw on nuts M8 to fasten thesuspending lever.

8. Connect the cabling ladder and the suspending lever with the bolt M8x20 and nut M8.

Figure A-14 shows the ceiling mounting.

Figure A-14 Mounting the cabling rack to the ceiling

Insulating padInsulating washer

Large flat washer 8

Spring washer 8

Nut M8

Expansion boltM8 x 80

Nut M6Bolt M6 x 20

Nut M8 Bolt M8 x 20

9. When the ceiling has an obstacle or the support span is too wide, you can add a U-

steel to connect the two suspending levers and fix it to the cabling ladder. Refer toFigure A-15.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure A-15 Mounting the cabling rack to the ceiling with an obstacle

Nut M8

Bolt M8 x 20Nut M6

Bolt M6 x 20

Nut M8

Bolt M8 x 20

l Wall mounting

You can mount the cabling rack against the wall if necessary.

Note the following when mounting the cabling rack against the wall with a triangularsupport.

– When fixing the triangular support to the wall, you must add the insulating pad andinsulating washer for insulation between support and wall.

– When fixing the support to the wall with the expansion bolt, you must use large flatwasher 8 instead of the flat washer of the expansion bolt.

– The spacing between two adjacent triangular supports must be an integer multiple of50 mm [2.0 in.]. Otherwise, the cabling ladder and the support cannot be fixed. Therecommended value is 1250 mm [49.2 in.], that is, each cabling ladder is supported bytwo triangular supports.

CAUTIONFix two insulating pads between the column of the triangular supports and the wall, and fixone insulating pad between each bolt and column.


2. Determine and mark the position for mounting the triangle support. Mark the positionsfor drilling holes on the wall through the triangle support. Mount two triangle supportsfor each cabling ladder and keep 1250 mm [49.2 in.] between two triangular supports.


4. Screw on the nut M8 anticlockwise to the top of the expansion bolt M8x80, and putthem into the holes vertically. Knock the expansion bolt with a claw hammer until thetube is knocked completely into the wall.



A-7

5. Take off the flat washer, spring washer, and screw from the expansion bolt. Put theinsulating pad on the expansion bolt.

6. Put the expansion bolts through the holes on the triangular supports. Add the insulatingwashers, large flat washers 8, spring washers 8 and nuts M8 onto the expansion bolts.Screw on the nut M8 to fix the triangular supports against the wall. Refer to FigureA-16.

Figure A-16 Fixing the triangular support

Triangular support

Insulating pad

Insulating washerLarge flat washer8

Spring washer 8

Nut M8Expansion boltM8 x 80

1250 mm

7. Put the cabling ladder directly on the beam of the triangular support. Align holes in

the U-steel lower side of the ladder with those in the beam of the triangular support,and then fix the ladder to the triangular support with the bolt M6x20 and nut M6. Referto Figure A-17.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure A-17 Fixing the cabling ladder to the support

Nut M6

Bolt M6 x 20

----End

PostrequisiteAfter mounting the indoor cabling support, you can install the cabling ladder.

A.3 Mounting Outdoor Cabling RacksThis describes how to mount the outdoor cabling racks.

ContextThe outdoor cabling rack can be mounted in two ways:

l Wall mounting

l Ground mounting

CAUTIONWhen determining the position for the cabling rack with the rectangular frame, put therectangular frame in the correct direction. Refer to Figure A-18.



A-9

Figure A-18 Rectangular frame

Hole for connecting to the cabling ladder

Hole for connecting to the wall

Hole for connecting to the ground

Procedurel Wall mounting

You can mount the cabling rack against the wall if necessary.


2. Determine and mark the position for mounting the rectangular frame. Mark thepositions for drilling holes on the wall through the rectangular frame. Mount tworectangular frames for each cabling ladder and keep 1250 mm [49.2 in.] between tworectangular frames.


4. Screw on the nut M8 anticlockwise to the top of the expansion bolt M8x80, and putthem into the holes vertically. Knock the expansion bolt with a claw hammer until thetube is knocked completely into the wall.


6. Put the expansion bolts through the holes on the beam of the rectangular frames. Addthe insulating washers, large flat washers 8, spring washers 8 and nuts M8 onto theexpansion bolts. Screw on nuts M8 to fix the rectangular frames on the wall. Refer toFigure A-19.

7. Put the cabling ladder directly on the beam of the rectangular frame. Align the holesat the lower side of the U-steel of the cabling ladder with the mounting holes of therectangular frame, and connect them with the bolt M6x20 and the nut M6. Refer toFigure A-19.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure A-19 Mounting the outdoor cabling rack against the wall

Nut M6Nut M8

Bolt M6 x 20


Insulating padInsulating washer

Large flat washer 8

Spring washer 8

l Ground mounting

If the cabling rack does not go along the wall, you can mount it on the ground.


2. Determine and mark the position for mounting the rectangular frame. Mark thepositions for drilling holes on the ground through the rectangular frame. Mount tworectangular frames for each cabling ladder and keep 1250 mm [49.2 in.] between tworectangular frames.


4. Screw on the nut M8 anticlockwise to the top of the expansion bolt M8x80, and putthem into the holes vertically. Knock the expansion bolt with a claw hammer until thetube is knocked completely into the ground.


6. Put the expansion bolts through the holes on the beam of the rectangular frames. Addthe insulating washers, large flat washers 8, spring washers 8 and nuts M8 onto theexpansion bolts. Screw on nuts M8 to fix the rectangular frames on the ground. Referto Figure A-20.

7. Put the cabling ladder directly on the beam of the rectangular frame. Align the holesat the lower side of the U-steel of the cabling ladder with the mounting holes of therectangular frame, and connect them with the bolt M6x20 and the nut M6. Refer toFigure A-20.



A-11

Figure A-20 Mounting the outdoor cabling rack on the ground

Insulating pad

Insulating washerLarge flat washer 8

Spring washer 8Nut M8

Nut M6

Bolt M6 x 20


----End

PostrequisiteAfter mounting the outdoor cabling support, you can install the cabling ladder.

A.4 Mounting Cabling LaddersThis describes how to mount the cabling ladders.

PrerequisiteBefore mounting the cabling ladder, install the cabling racks.

Context

You may perform the following steps in actual installation: assemble two cabling laddershorizontally; turn the cabling ladder upright; mount the cabling ladder to the wall; lay the cablingladder upward or downward. The detailed methods are described as follows:

l Assemble the cabling ladder

l Turn the cabling ladder

l Connect the cabling ladder to the wall

l Joint the cabling ladder


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Procedurel Assemble the cabling ladder.

When long cabling ladder is needed, you must connect several cabling ladders togetherwith U-shaped connecting components. At the same time, connect two adjacent cablingladders with three grounding cables to ensure reliable grounding of the cabling rack.

Ground the first and fourth bolts with grounding cable, which are used to connect the cablingladder and the U-shaped connecting component. Connect the second or third bolt to thesecond or third bolt at the other side with grounding cables. Figure A-21 shows the methodfor assembling the cabling ladders.

Figure A-21 Assembling cabling ladders

Nut M8

Bolt M8 x 20Toothed pad

Grounding wire

NOTE

If the length of the cabling ladder is not an integer multiple of 2.5 m [8.2 ft.], you can cut off theredundant part. After cutting the ladder, paint the cross section for rust protection and nice appearance.

l Turn the cabling ladder.

You can turn the cabling ladders either at the same level or at different levels based on thecabling trough of the supports.

If both the cabling ladders are mounted with/without cabling troughs, the turning methodsare the same. Connect both cabling ladders with the bracket angle, bolt and nut. Make surethat the two ladders are in the same level. Refer to Figure A-22.



A-13

Figure A-22 Turning the cabling ladder at the same level (without cabling troughs)

Nut M8

Bolt M8 x 20

Nut M6

Bolt M6 x 20

CAUTIONDuring the mounting, if one cabling ladder is mounted with cabling trough, make sure thecabling ladder and the cabling trough of the other cabling ladder are at the same level aftermounting the cabling ladder.

If the cabling ladder to be turned has a cabling trough segment, connect the two cablingladders with the bracket angle, bolt, and nut. Refer to Figure A-23.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure A-23 Turning the cabling ladder at different levels

Nut M8

Bolt M8 x 20

Nut M6

Bolt M6 x 20

l Connect the cabling ladder to the wall.

Connect the cabling ladder to the wall with the bracket angle, insulating pad, insulatingwasher, spring washer, flat waster, and expansion bolt. Refer to 1 and 2 in Figure A-24.

Figure A-24 Connecting the cabling ladder to the wall

Nut M6

Bolt M6 x 20

Insulating pad

Insulating washerLarge flat washer 8

Spring washer 8Nut M8

Expansionbolt M8 x 80



A-15

l Joint the cabling ladder.

1. Choose a segment of cabling ladder as the climbing ladder.2. Joint climbing ladder and cabling ladder with the bracket angle, bolt, and nut. The

climbing ladder and cabling ladder can be jointed in three modes, including frontjointing, side jointing, and oblique jointing.

Figure A-25 shows the front jointing.

Figure A-25 Front jointing of climbing ladders

Nut M8

Nut M6

Bolt M8 x 20Bolt M6 x 20

Figure A-26 shows the side jointing.

Figure A-26 Side jointing of climbing ladders

Nut M6

Nut M6

Bolt M6 x 20

BoltM6 x 20


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure A-27 shows the oblique jointing.

Figure A-27 Oblique jointing of climbing ladders

Nut M8

Bolt M8 x 20

Nut M8

Bolt M8 x 20

----End

PostrequisiteAfter mounting the cabling ladder, you can mount the cabling trough. If the cabling trough isnot amounted, you can install the fittings.

A.5 Mounting Cabling TroughsThis describes how to mount the cabling troughs.

PrerequisiteBefore mounting the cabling trough, mount the cabling racks and cabling ladders.

Context

The cabling trough has two types: 200 mm [7.9 in.] wide and 400 [15.7 in.] mm wide. Therefore,a cabling trough can be mounted on the following:

l A 200 mm [7.9 in.] or 400 mm [15.7 in.] wide cabling ladder

l A 600 mm [23.6 in.] wide cabling ladder

If the cabling ladder needs to be lengthened, lengthen it first, and then fix it on the cabling ladder.



A-17

Procedurel Connecting cabling troughs

The cabling trough has taper. Therefore, you can only insert the smaller end of the cablingtrough to the larger end of the other. Refer to Figure A-28. The insertion depth must besmaller than 250 mm [9.8 in.].

Figure A-28 Connecting cabling troughs

l Mount the cabling trough on 200 mm [7.9 in.] or 400 mm [15.7 in.] wide cabling ladder.

To mount the cabling trough on the 200 mm [7.9 in.] or 400 mm [15.7 in.] wide cablingladder, perform the following steps:

1. Choose the 200 mm [7.9 in.] or 400 mm [15.7 in.] wide cabling trough.2. Put the cabling trough onto the cabling ladder.3. Fix the cabling trough to the cabling ladder with the fixing clip. Each cabling trough

segment needs four clips, with two on each side of the trough.

Figure A-29 shows the method for mounting the cabling trough on a 200 mm [7.9in.] or 400 mm [15.7 in.] cabling ladder.

Figure A-29 Mounting the cabling trough on a 200 mm [7.9 in.] or 400 mm [15.7 in.]cabling ladder

Fixing clip

Nut M8Bolt M8 x 20

l Mount the cabling trough on 600 mm [23.6 in.] wide cabling ladder.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

To mount the cabling trough on the 600 mm [23.6 in.] wide cabling ladder, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Connect the cabling troughs of 200 mm [7.9 in.] and 400 mm [15.7 in.] wide with theconnecting clips to form a cabling trough of 600 mm [23.6 in.] wide. Each cablingtrough segment needs three clips.

2. Fix the cabling trough to the cabling ladder with the fixing clip. Each cabling troughsegment needs four clips, with two on each side of the trough.

Figure A-30 shows the procedure for mounting the cabling trough on the 600 mm[23.6 in.] wide cabling ladder.

Figure A-30 Mounting the cabling trough on a 600 mm [23.6 in.] cabling ladder

Fixing clip

Connecting clip

l Mount the cabling troughs obliquely.

CAUTIONThe slope of the cabling trough can be smaller than the required.

1. Cut off the upper side of the triangle aperture in the cabling trough. Refer to FigureA-31. Paint the cross section.

Figure A-31 Cutting off the upper side of the triangle aperture in the cabling trough



A-19

2. Bend one part of the cabling trough with the marking line as the axis to the desired

angle. Figure A-32 shows the method for bending one part of the cabling trough.

Figure A-32 Mounting cabling troughs obliquely

3. Fix the cabling trough to the cabling ladder with the fixing clip.

Figure A-33 shows the cabling trough mounted obliquely onto the cabling ladder.

Figure A-33 Cabling troughs mounted obliquely onto the cabling ladder

----End

PostrequisiteAfter mounting the cabling ladder, proceed with A.6 Mounting Accessories.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

A.6 Mounting AccessoriesThis describes how to connect the cable-through racks, end covers, trough rims, and baffle rings.

PrerequisiteBefore mounting the accessories, mount the cabling racks, cabling ladders, and cabling troughs.

ContextThe mounting of cabling rack involves the mounting of the following accessories:

l Mount the cable-through rackl Mount the end cover, trough rim, and baffle ring

Procedurel Mount the cable-through rack.

The cable-through rack is often mounted on the cabling ladder over the cabinet. Thequantity and mounting positions are based upon the actual condition.

CAUTIONTo make sure thon the top of the cable-through rack is flush with that of the cabling rack,note the following:l If there is the cabling trough, fasten the cable-through rack to the cabling ladder through

lower holes in the cable-through rack.l If there is no cabling trough, fasten the cable-through rack to the cabling ladder through

upper holes in the cable-through rack.

Figure A-34 shows the cable-through rack without the cabling trough.

Figure A-34 Cable-through racks mounted to the cabling rack without the cabling trough

Bolt M8 x 20

Cabling rack

Cable manager



A-21

Figure A-35 shows the cable-through rack with the cabling trough.

Figure A-35 Cable-through racks mounted to the cabling rack with the cabling trough

Bolt M8 x 20

Cabling ladder

Cabling trough

Cable manager

l Mount the end cover, trough rim, and baffle ring.

The trough rim can protect cables from damage and end cover is for nice appearance.

– The trough rim covers the bottom edge of the cabling trough. All the exposed bottomedges of the cabling trough shall be covered with the trough rim.

– The end cover is used at the end of the cabling ladders. Mount end covers for all cablingladders if possible.

The methods for mounting the trough rim and end cover are shown in 1 and 2 in FigureA-36.

The baffle ring is mounted on both sides of the cabling trough to increase the height of thetrough and to hold cables inside the trough. Each segment of cabling trough uses four bafflerings, evenly mounted on both sides. The method for mounting the baffle ring is shown in3 in Figure A-36.

Figure A-36 Mounting end covers, trough rims, and baffle rings


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

----End



A-23

B Assembling Cable Connectors

This describes how to assemble the cable connectors.

B.1 Assembling Power Cable ConnectorsThis describes how to assemble the power cable connectors.

B.2 Assembling RJ45 ConnectorsThis describes the how to assemble RJ45 connectors.

B.3 Assembling RJ48 Connectors of Twisted Pair Trunk CablesThis part describes the how to assemble the RJ48 connectors of the twisted pair trunk cables.

B.4 Assembling SMB ConnectorsThis describes how to assemble the SMB connectors.

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide B Assembling Cable Connectors


B-1

B.1 Assembling Power Cable ConnectorsThis describes how to assemble the power cable connectors.

ContextThe method applies to the assembly of bare pressure terminals and 50 mm2 to 240 mm2 powercables.

B.1.1 Cutting Power CablesThis describes how to cut the power cables.

B.1.2 Mounting Heat-Shrinkable TubesThis describes how to mount the heat-shrinkable tubes.

B.1.3 Stripping Power CablesThis describes how to strip the power cables.

B.1.4 Crimping Power Cable Connectors

B.1.5 Shrinking Heat-Shrinkable Tubes of Power Cable ConnectorsThis describes how to shrink the heat-shrinkable tubes of power cable connectors.

B.1.6 Checking Power Cable ConnectorsThis describes how to check the power cable connectors after the installation is complete.

B.1.1 Cutting Power CablesThis describes how to cut the power cables.

PrerequisiteMake the crimping tools available before cutting the power cables.

Procedure

Step 1 Place and roll the cable coils on the support. Measure and cut out a segment of the cable accordingto the cable layout of the project design. Refer to Figure B-1.

B Assembling Cable ConnectorsHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide

B-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure B-1 Assembling power cables

1

1

L

1. Rolling direction

Step 2 Cut out the power cable with an arm saw.

NOTE

The power cable consists of many core wires, and the wire pairs are fairly fine and soft. Therefore, youneed to use a denticulate arm saw (with the denticulate diameter of 0.8 mm, that is, 0.03 in.) to cut thecable. If the condition permits, use the KT35 wire clippers to cut the power cable.

----End

PostrequisiteAfter cutting out the power cable, you can mount the heat-shrinkable tube onto the cable fromthe stripped end.

B.1.2 Mounting Heat-Shrinkable TubesThis describes how to mount the heat-shrinkable tubes.

PrerequisiteMake sure that the power cable is cut out before mounting the heat-shrinkable tubes.

ContextMount the heat-shrinkable tube onto the cable from the stripped end.

PostrequisiteAfter mounting the heat-shrinkable tube, strip the cables.

B.1.3 Stripping Power CablesThis describes how to strip the power cables.



B-3

PrerequisiteMake sure that the power cable is cut out and the heat-shrinkable tube is mounted before strippingthe cables.

ContextUse dedicated stripping tool or electrical knife to strip cables. If the condition permits, you canuse the AM35 wire stripper.

CAUTIONWhen stripping cable, check whether the cable core wires are seriously oxidized or corroded. Ifyes, cut off the oxidized or corroded part.

Procedure

Step 1 Calculate the length of the cable.

The length of stripped cable depends on the length of the crimping sleeve behind the bare pressureterminal.

For the JG bare pressure terminal commonly used by Huawei, the length of stripped cable iscalculated with the formula: L1 = L2 + (2 - 3 mm), that is, L1 = L2 + (0.08 - 0.12 in.). Refer toFigure B-2. Here,

l L1 is the length of the stripped cable.

l L2 is the length of the effective crimping area of the JG terminal.

Figure B-2 Stripping power cables

1

L1

L2

1. Crimping sleeve

Step 2 Remove the cable insulation layer.

Step 3 Strand them tightly, and make sure the stranding direction is the same as the original mergingdirection of the core wires.

----End


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

PostrequisiteAfter stripping the power cable, you can crimp the cable.

B.1.4 Crimping Power Cable Connectors

PrerequisiteMake sure that the power cable is cut out, the heat-shrinkable tube is mounted, and the powercable is stripped before crimping the power cable connectors.

Complete the preparatory work.

l Release the fixing handle and place the tool in right place.

l Turn on the hydraulic switch to put the compressing device into the in-service state, andlift the hand level.

ContextThe methods for using the crimping tools vary with the types of the tools. Figure B-3 shows thecrimping tool SS-325 for large-section power cable terminals.

Figure B-3 SS-325 parts

1

2

3

4

5

1. Fixing handle 2. Hydraulic head 3. Hand level 4. Fixing rod 5. Hydraulic switch

To crimp the power cables by using crimping pliers or special molds, perform the followingsteps:

CAUTIONl If the black line does not appear after the cable is crimped, have it repaired immediately.

l As for the tool of type SS0325, there is no black line.

l Place the tools in shadow and out of children's reach. Avoid direct sunshine.



B-5

Procedure

Step 1 Try to insert the core wires into the wire inlets of the terminal crimping sleeve until they cannotbe pushed further. The core wires should protrude 2 mm [0.08 in.] to 3 mm [0.12 in.] from theterminal. Refer to Figure B-4.

Figure B-4 Connecting core wires with the terminal crimping sleeve

2

1

2－3mm

1. Bare pressure terminal 2. Heat-shrinkable tube

Step 2 During crimping, use the molding dies with right cross section. Figure B-5 shows the moldingdies corresponding to the 4 types of power cables.

Figure B-5 Molding dies related to the power cables

60~1

00

60

12

80 150 200

50mm 95mm 120mm 240mm

60~10060~100

60

60~100 150~325 150~325

2 2 2 2

1. Bearing device 2. Compressing device


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Step 3 Place the cable in the connection position so that the contact surface of the wiring terminal isparallel to the power cable. If they are not parallel, hold the end of the terminal with pliers toadjust it.

Step 4 Check the crimping connection to ensure the reliability of electrical connections. Refer to FigureB-6.

Figure B-6 Crimping cables

Step 5 Crimp cables.

After the cable is crimped, a black line appears at the hydraulic switch, which indicates that thecrimping is completed successfully.

Step 6 Turn off the hydraulic switch and take out the crimping components.

----End

PostrequisiteAfter crimping the cables, you can shrink the heat-shrinkable tubes of power cables.

B.1.5 Shrinking Heat-Shrinkable Tubes of Power Cable ConnectorsThis describes how to shrink the heat-shrinkable tubes of power cable connectors.

PrerequisiteMake sure that the power cable is cut out, the heat-shrinkable tube is mounted, the power cableis stripped, and the cable connector is crimped before shrinking the heat-shrinkable tubes of thepower cable connectors.

Context

CAUTIONThe heat-shrinkable tube on the cable should wrap up the whole crimping sleeve of the barepressure terminal, including the joint between the terminal and the cable.



B-7

Procedure

Step 1 Mount the heat-shrinkable tube onto the position where the terminal and the cable are joined.

Step 2 Blow the tube with a heat gun until the tube shrinks and wraps up tightly. Refer to FigureB-7.

Figure B-7 Shrinking the heat-shrinkable tubes

1

1. Shrunk heat-shrinkable tube

----End

PostrequisiteAfter shrinking the heat-shrinkable tubes of power cable connectors, you can check the powercable connectors.

B.1.6 Checking Power Cable ConnectorsThis describes how to check the power cable connectors after the installation is complete.

PrerequisiteMake sure that the power cable is cut out, the heat-shrinkable tube is mounted, the power cableis stripped, the cable connector is crimped, and the heat-shrinkable tube is shrunken beforechecking the power cable connectors.

ContextTo check the power cable connectors, perform the following steps:

Procedure

Step 1 Check the cable appearance, and make sure that the terminal surface is not oxidized and thecable sheath is not damaged.

Step 2 Check the tensile strength.

Table B-1 lists the normal tensile strength of ready-made cables.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Table B-1 Tensile strength standard of ready-made cables

Cable Tensile Strength

50 mm2 1 KN

95 mm2 2 KN

120 mm2 2.5 KN

240 mm2 5 KN

----End

B.2 Assembling RJ45 ConnectorsThis describes the how to assemble RJ45 connectors.

ContextFigure B-8 shows the procedure for assembling RJ45 connectors.

Figure B-8 Assembling the RJ45 connector

Start

Strip network cable

Insert network cable

Crimping RJ45connectors

Inspecting RJ45connectors

End

Figure B-9 shows the components of a shielded RJ45 connector and a shielded network cable.



B-9

Figure B-9 Components of a shielded RJ45 connector

D

GF

E

CB

A

A. Jacket of connector B. Metal shell of connector C. Wire holder of connector D. Plug of connector

E. Jacket of network cable F. Shielded layer of networkcable

G. Twisted pair cable –

B.2.1 Stripping Network CablesThis describes how to strip and cut the cables.B.2.2 Inserting Network CablesThis describes how to insert the cables.B.2.3 Crimping RJ45 ConnectorsThis describes how to crimp the RJ45 connector.B.2.4 Inspecting RJ45 ConnectorsThis describes the steps for inspecting the RJ45 connectors and the compliant standards.

B.2.1 Stripping Network CablesThis describes how to strip and cut the cables.

ProcedureStep 1 Put the network cable into connector jacket A. Refer to Figure B-10.

Figure B-10 Putting a network cable into a connector jacket

A

E


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Step 2 Peel a 30mm part of the jacket E. Then cut the nylons twine inside the jacket. Cut a 5mm cleftin cable jacket E. Refer to Figure B-11.

Figure B-11 Peeling the jacket of a twisted pair cable

Max.5

F

E

30.0

CAUTIONl When peeling the jackets of twisted pair cables, do not damage shielded layers.

l When peeling the shielded layer, do not damage the insulation layer of the twisted pair cable.

Step 3 Put a twisted pair cable into metal shell B. Wrap the shielded layer F using the metal shell. Referto Figure B-12.

Figure B-12 Putting a cable into a metal shell

F

B

Step 4 Put the metal shell of connector through the twisted pair cable to the end. Cut the shielded layerwith aluminum foil along the edge of the metal shell. Do not leave any copper wire outside. Thetwisted pair cable G, about 20 mm, exposes. Refer to Figure B-13.



B-11

Figure B-13 Peeling the shielded layer of a twisted pair cable

G

20.0

----End

PostrequisiteAfter stripping the network cable, you can insert the cable.

B.2.2 Inserting Network CablesThis describes how to insert the cables.

Procedure

Step 1 The core wires must be inserted in the order specified in the cable design drawings. FigureB-14 and Figure B-15 show the wire sequences of the crossover network cable and the straightthrough network cable.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure B-14 Wire sequence of the crossover network cables

Green and w

hiteG

reenO

range and white

blueB

lue and white

Orange

Brow

n and white

Brow

n

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

RJ45 RJ45

12345678

36

14

5278

Orange and w

hiteO

rangeG

reen and white

blueB

lue and white

Green

Brow

n and white

Brow

n



B-13

Figure B-15 Wire sequence of the straight through network cables

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

RJ45 RJ45

12345678

12345678

Orange and w

hiteO

rangeG

reen and white

blueB

lue and white

Green

Brow

n and white

Brow

n

Orange and w

hiteO

rangeG

reen and white

blueB

lue and white

Green

Brow

n and white

Brow

n

Step 2 Put the four pairs of twisted pair cables according to color correspondence through the wireholder C. Refer to Figure B-16.

Figure B-16 Wire holder of a connector

G C

Step 3 Align the four pairs of cables G on the holder. Refer to Figure B-17.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure B-17 Aligning four pairs of cables on a wire holder

G C

Step 4 Cut the cables outside wire holder C using a wire cutter. Refer to Figure B-18.

Figure B-18 Cutting wires

G C

Step 5 Insert the connector holder into connector D with the help of the crimping frame on the top ofthe metal shell by rotating the metal shielding case B for 90 degrees. Refer to Figure B-19.

Figure B-19 Inserting a connector holder

D

B



B-15

CAUTIONPut the holder through the connector to the end.

----End

PostrequisiteAfter inserting the cable, you can crimp the RJ45 connector.

B.2.3 Crimping RJ45 ConnectorsThis describes how to crimp the RJ45 connector.

Context

The principle of crimping the RJ45 connector is as follows:

l Before crimping the connector, the RJ45 connector must be placed in the correspondingslot of the crimping pliers.

l The connector must be fully crimped. After crimping the connector, make sure the metalcutter is lower than the top surface of the RJ45 connector.

l When crimping an RJ45 connector onto a shielded cable, make sure that metal cutters inthe connector are crimped in position and the built-in shielding piece of the connectorsecurely contacts the shielding layer of the cable.

Procedure

Step 1 Push metal shell B towards the connector till the connector and the holder are completelywrapped. Press-fit the connector using a press-fitting tool. Refer to Figure B-20.

Figure B-20 Press-Fitting a connector

B

Step 2 Push metal shell A towards the connector till the metal shell of connector is wrapped. Refer toFigure B-21.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure B-21 Inserting the metal shell of a connector

A

One end of cable components is completely assembled.

----End

PostrequisiteAfter crimping the RJ45 connector, you can check the RJ45 connector.

B.2.4 Inspecting RJ45 ConnectorsThis describes the steps for inspecting the RJ45 connectors and the compliant standards.

Procedure

Step 1 Inspect the appearances of all the connectors.

The connectors with defects such as shell breakage or evident crack, locking piece breakage orcrack, or improper cable insertion must be discarded.

Step 2 Inspect all the cables.

The sequence of the wires must be in line with the design requirements.

Step 3 Carry out continuity check on all cables.

The continuity ratio must be 100%. Short circuit between cables must be forbidden.

NOTE

For the shielded cable assembled with shielded RJ45 connectors, continuity check must be performedbetween the shielding shell of the connector and the shielding layer of the cable.

----End

B.3 Assembling RJ48 Connectors of Twisted Pair TrunkCables

This part describes the how to assemble the RJ48 connectors of the twisted pair trunk cables.



B-17

ContextFigure B-22 shows the procedure for assembling the RJ48 connectors of the twisted pair trunkcables.

Figure B-22 Assembling the RJ48 connectors of the twisted pair trunk cables

Start

Strip network cable

Insert network cable

Crimping RJ45connectors

Inspecting RJ45connectors

End

B.3.1 Stripping Twisted Pair Trunk CablesThis part describes how to strip and cut the cables.

B.3.2 Inserting Twisted Pair Trunk CablesThis part describes how to insert the cables.

B.3.3 Crimping RJ48 ConnectorsThis part describes how to crimp the RJ48 connector.

B.3.4 Inspecting RJ48 ConnectorsThis part describes the steps for inspecting the RJ48 connectors and the compliant standards.

B.3.1 Stripping Twisted Pair Trunk CablesThis part describes how to strip and cut the cables.

Procedure

Step 1 Measure the length of the cable to be stripped.

Strip the cable with an electric knife or a cable stripper to the length of L + (2 mm to 3 mm [0.08in. to 0.1 in.]). Refer to Figure B-23. Figure B-24 lists the meaning of L. The stripped 2 mm to3 mm [0.08 in. to 0.1 in.] cable is used for cable cutting.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure B-23 Length of the stripped segment on the cable

L+(2~3mm)

Figure B-24 Structure of the RJ48 optical connector

1

2

4

56

7

8

L

L

3

1. Shielding slice 2. External shielding slice 3. Cable inserting direction 4. Internal shielding slice5. Point A 6. Locking pin 7. Core wires even with the header 8. Metallic knife

Step 2 Strip the cable sheath.

When stripping the cable, make sure that the end of the sheath is neatly stripped and the cuttingangle is vertical to the cable.

Avoid the damage to the shielding layer when stripping the sheath of the shielded cable.

Step 3 Fold the shielding layer.

After the sheath is stripped, fold the shielding layer backwards to the root of the cable sheath.Refer to Figure B-25.



B-19

Figure B-25 Shielded cables

L

1

1. Folded shielding layer

Step 4 Cut the core wire.

The core wires, especially for the round communication cables, must be cut neatly. Beforecutting, spread the core wires evenly apart and cut them neatly with the cutting tool. Refer toFigure B-26.

Figure B-26 Trimmed core wires

L

Step 5 Check the stripping end.

The structure and dimensions of the truncated cable must be in accordance with the requirements.That is, the core wire must be equal to L in length. Refer to Figure B-26 .

----End

PostrequisiteAfter stripping the cable, you can insert the cable.

B.3.2 Inserting Twisted Pair Trunk CablesThis part describes how to insert the cables.

Procedure

Step 1 Plug the cable from the tail of the RJ48 connector and push the cable with proper force untilpoint A of the connector tightly touches the external protection layer of the cable. Each corewire must be plugged along the wire trough of the connector and be even with the header of theconnector.

Figure B-27 shows the core wires of the trunk cable.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure B-27 Arrangement of the core wires

1

8

Table B-2 lists the meaning of the pin assignment.

Table B-2 Pin assignment for the RJ48 connector of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable

Pin Definition

1 RX-

2 RX+

3 PGND

4 TX-

5 TX+

6 PGND

Step 2 Insert the cable until the core wire of the cable is flush with the header.

Step 3 Check the RJ48 connector. Make sure that the shielding layer of the cable butts against point Aof the connector and the built-in shielding piece of the connector securely contacts the shieldinglayer of the cable.

----End

PostrequisiteAfter inserting the cable, you can crimp the RJ48 connector.

B.3.3 Crimping RJ48 ConnectorsThis part describes how to crimp the RJ48 connector.

ContextAfter the cable is inserted well, crimp the connector by using the RJ48 crimping pliers. FigureB-28 shows the ready-made RJ45 connector.

Figure B-28 Ready-made RJ45 connector



B-21

The principle of crimping the RJ48 connector is as follows:

l Before crimping the connector, the RJ48 connector must be placed in the correspondingslot of the crimping pliers.

l The connector must be fully crimped. After crimping the connector, make sure the metalcutter is lower than the top surface of the RJ48 connector.

l When crimping an RJ48 connector onto a shielded cable, make sure that metal cutters inthe connector are crimped in position and the built-in shielding piece of the connectorsecurely contacts the shielding layer of the cable.

PostrequisiteAfter crimping the RJ48 connector, you can check the RJ48 connector.

B.3.4 Inspecting RJ48 ConnectorsThis part describes the steps for inspecting the RJ48 connectors and the compliant standards.

Procedure

Step 1 Inspect the appearances of all the connectors.

The connectors with defects such as shell breakage or evident crack, locking piece breakage orcrack, or improper cable insertion must be discarded.

Step 2 Inspect all the cables.

The sequence of the wires must be in line with the design requirements.


The continuity ratio must be 100%. Short circuit between cables must be forbidden.

NOTE

For the shielded cable assembled with shielded RJ48 connectors, continuity check must be performedbetween the shielding shell of the connector and the shielding layer of the cable.

----End

B.4 Assembling SMB ConnectorsThis describes how to assemble the SMB connectors.

ContextFigure B-29 shows the procedure for assembling the SMB connector.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure B-29 Procedure for assembling the SMB connector

Strat

Mounting heat-shrinkabletubes and crimping sleeves

Stripping trunk signalcables

Welding pins of SMBconnectors

Crimping SMB connectors

End

Shrinking heat-shrinkabletubes of SMB connectors

Inspecting SMB connectors

B.4.1 Mounting Heat-Shrinkable Tubes and Crimping SleevesThis describes how to mount the heat-shrinkable tubes and crimping sleeves.

B.4.2 Stripping Trunk Signal CablesThis describes how to strip the trunk signal cables.

B.4.3 Welding Pins of SMB ConnectorsThis describes how to weld the pins of SMB connectors.

B.4.4 Crimping SMB ConnectorsThis describes how to crimp SMB connectors.

B.4.5 Shrinking Heat-Shrinkable Tubes of SMB ConnectorsThis describes how to shrink the heat-shrinkable tubes of SMB connectors.

B.4.6 Inspecting SMB ConnectorsThis describes how to inspect the SMB connectors.

B.4.1 Mounting Heat-Shrinkable Tubes and Crimping SleevesThis describes how to mount the heat-shrinkable tubes and crimping sleeves.

ContextFigure B-30 shows the method for mounting heat-shrinkable tubes and crimping sleeves.



B-23

Figure B-30 Mounting heat-shrinkable tubes and crimping sleeves

1 2

1. Heat-shrinkable tube 2. Crimping sleeve

PostrequisiteAfter mounting the heat-shrinkable tubes and crimping sleeves, you can strip the trunk signalcables.

B.4.2 Stripping Trunk Signal CablesThis describes how to strip the trunk signal cables.

Context

CAUTIONAvoid any damage to the shielding layer and the inner insulation layer when stripping the trunksignal cables.

Procedure

Step 1 Strip the cable sheath and the inner insulation layer with wire stripper. Figure B-31 shows thespecification of the stripped segment on the cable (unit: mm).

Figure B-31 Stripping trunk signal cables

1

2

11

3

42.3

4.5

1. Sheath 2. Inner insulation layer 3. Inner conductor 4. Shielding layer

Step 2 Cut the cable sheath and the inner insulation layer neatly and smoothly.

----End


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

PostrequisiteAfter stripping the trunk signal cables, you can weld the pins of SMB connectors.

B.4.3 Welding Pins of SMB ConnectorsThis describes how to weld the pins of SMB connectors.

Context

CAUTIONl When welding the pins, do not scorch the inner insulation layer.

l When welding the pins, make sure that soldering tin does not flow out to the exterior of thepins. The outflow of the soldering tine affects the next step.

Procedure

Step 1 When welding the pins, insert the inner conductor of the cable into the central hole at the endof the pin until the boss at the pin end contacts the inner conductor of the cable. Refer to FigureB-32.

Figure B-32 Welding pins

21

1. Inner insulation layer 2. Boss

Step 2 Use the solder to weld the pin with the inner conductor of the cable together. The melting pointmust be above 125°C [257°F].

----End

PostrequisiteAfter welding the pins of the SMB connectors, you can crimp the SMB connectors.

B.4.4 Crimping SMB ConnectorsThis describes how to crimp SMB connectors.



B-25

Context

CAUTIONl Check the SMB connector to be crimped. If the shielded cables lay nakedly outside the

crimping sleeve, trim the cable with scissors.

l When crimping the connector, place the SMB connector in the right place to match themolding die of the crimping pliers.

Procedure

Step 1 Insert the knurled cylinder of the SMB connector between the inner insulation layer and theshielding layer of the cable. Make the shielding layer attach evenly to the knurled cylinder. Makesure that boss of the pins securely connects the inner insulation core of the connector. Refer toFigure B-33.

Figure B-33 Crimping the SMB connector onto a cable

4

21

3

1. Shielding layer covering the knurled cylinder evenly 2. Inner insulation core of the connector

3. Pin 4. Coaxial connector

Step 2 Push the crimping sleeve to cover the shielded cable entirely, and crimp the SMB connectorwith the SMB crimping pliers.

----End

PostrequisiteAfter crimping the SMB connector, you can shrink the heat-shrinkable tube of the SMBconnector.

B.4.5 Shrinking Heat-Shrinkable Tubes of SMB ConnectorsThis describes how to shrink the heat-shrinkable tubes of SMB connectors.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Procedure

Step 1 Mount the heat-shrinkable tube onto the position where the crimping sleeve and the cable arejoined.

Step 2 Blow the tube with a heat gun until the tube shrinks and wraps up tightly. Refer to FigureB-34.

Figure B-34 Shrinking heat-shrinkable tubes

1

1. Shrunken heat-shrinkable tube

----End

PostrequisiteAfter shrinking the heat-shrinkable tubes of the SMB connectors, you can check the SMBconnectors.

B.4.6 Inspecting SMB ConnectorsThis describes how to inspect the SMB connectors.

Procedure

Step 1 Inspect the appearances of all the cables.

Inspect the appearance of the cables. The shielding layer cannot be exposed. Make sure that thepins are inserted well.


Check that the inner and the outer conductor are not short-circuited with a multimeter.


Check the continuity between the connector pins and the inner conductor of the coaxial cable,and that between the outer shell of the connector and the shielding layer of the coaxial cablewith a multimeter.

Step 4 Check the tensile strength.

Apply proper force (about 60 N) to pull the inner contact pin outward. And there must be noobvious displacement for the inner contact pin.

----End



B-27

C Introduction to Engineering Labels

The engineering labels are used for site installation and future maintenance. The engineeringlabels are of two types based on power cables and signal cables. The signal cables of theUMG8900 include alarm external cables, network cables, optical fibers, trunk cables. The powercables include DC power cables and AC power cables.

The labels can ensure correct cable connections, and easy maintenance.

NOTE

The labels can be printed according to customers' requirement. However, this must be stated in self-checkreport.

C.1 Description of LabelsThis describes the materials, types, shapes, writing and affixing methods, contents, andprecautions.

C.2 Engineering Labels for External Cables of Alarm BoxesThis describes the position of external cables of alarm boxes, requirements for affixing theengineering label, label contents, and examples.

C.3 Engineering Labels for Network CablesThis describes the applicable scope, content, meaning, and example of the engineering label ofthe network cable.

C.4 Engineering Labels for Optical FibersThis describes the contents, meaning, examples of labels on optical fibers between the devicesas well as those between the devices and the optical distribution frames (ODFs).

C.5 Engineering Labels for Trunk CablesThis describes the contents, meaning, examples of labels on trunk cables between the devicesas well as those between the devices and the digital distribution frames (DDFs).

C.6 Engineering Labels for Power CablesThis describes the position, contents, and examples of AC power cables and DC power cables.

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide C Introduction to Engineering Labels


C-1

C.1 Description of LabelsThis describes the materials, types, shapes, writing and affixing methods, contents, andprecautions.

Label MaterialsFeatures of label materials:

l The thickness is 0.09 mm [0.004 in.]

l The label is chalk white.

l The label is made of polyester (PET).

l The applicable ambient temperature ranges from –29℃ to +149℃ [–20℃ to +300℃].

l Laser print and oiliness marker are allowed.

l The label material is polyester (PET) with UL and CSA certifications.

Types and Shapes of LabelsThe engineering labels are of two types, for power cables and signal cables.

l Labels for power cablesThe labels for power cables must be attached to the identification plate on the cable tiesthat are bundled to the cable. The identification plate has an embossment of around 0.2 mmx 0.6 mm [0.008 in. x 0.024 in.]. The embossment is symmetric on both sides, and the areain the middle is for affixing the label. Refer to Figure C-1.

Figure C-1 Labels for power cables

(1)

(2)

(3)

26.2

12.2

0.6

11

10

100

R1.0

25

1.5

0.6

TO:

1. Cable tie 2. Labels for power cables 3. Dividing line on the label

l Labels for signal cables

C Introduction to Engineering LabelsHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide

C-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

The label for signal cables is L-shaped with fixed dimensions. Refer to Figure C-2.

Figure C-2 Labels for signal cables

10.0

TO: (2)

84.0

1.5

0.6

2.0

1.0

(1)

11.0

11.0

7.57.0

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.57.0

7.537.0

(1)

(2)

1. Dividing line on the label 2. Cut dotted line

The dividing lines on the label help to specify the position of a cable. For example, thereis one between the cabinet number and the frame number, and another one between theframe number and the board number. The dividing line is 1.5 mm x 0.6 mm [0.059 in. x0.024 in.] with the color of PONTONE 656c (light blue).The cut dotted line helps to fold the label when affixing it to the cable, and its size is 1.0mm x 2.0 mm [0.04 in. x 0.08 in.].There is a mark TO: (upside down in the figure) at the lower right corner of the label. Themark is used to identify the opposite end of the cable on which the label is affixed.

Printing Labels

The contents can be printed or written on the labels. Printing is recommended for the sake ofhigh efficiency and pleasant appearance.

l Template for printingThe word-format template is available for label printout. You can get the template in twoways:– You can download the template from http://support.huawei.com/support/ (path:

Engineering Service\Engineering Quality\Quality Standard and Template).– You can also obtain the template from Huawei local office.

The template is made with Microsoft Word. Note the following when using the template:



C-3

– You can directly change the contents on the template according to the site cableconnection. Do not change the settings of centered characters, direction, and fonts.

– When there are too many characters to be filled in, zoom out the characters. Make surethat the printouts are clear and legible.

l Cells merging on the templateTo merge the cells, you need first recover the table structure (if grid lines are displayed, goto step 3).

1. Choose Edit > Select All.2. Choose Format > Borders and Shading > Borders. Choose Box, and then click

OK.3. Drag the cursor to choose the cells to be merged and choose Table > Merge Cells .

Then, modify the content.

If two merged cells are still not enough to accommodate the characters, use multiple lines.l Requirements for printer

To print the labels, laser jet printer must be used. There is no restriction on the model ofthe printer. Before printing the label, set up the page and print it on an ordinary blank paper.Perform the following steps:

1. Cover the blank paper onto the whole page of label paper, and check whether the pagesetup conforms to the requirement.

2. Set the printer properties, such as Paper size and Direction.

If the printout conforms to the requirement, print it on label paper. If not, adjust the pagesetup and try the printing again until the printout is correct. To adjust the page setup, performthe following steps:

1. Choose File > Page Setup.2. Choose Layout. Set Header and Footer to 0.3. Choose Margins. Choose Left for Gutter Position. Adjust the values of Top,

Bottom, Left, and Right.4. If the prompt in Figure C-3 appears before printing, click Ignore to continue.

Figure C-3 Print warning

After the page setup finishes, save it for future use. This page setup is necessary only whenyou use the template for the first time.

l Requirements for feeding the printerDifferent from the ordinary paper, the label paper is composed of two pages. No matterwhat model of the printer you use, feed in the labels one after another by hand. Never usethe auto-feed mode to avoid jamming the labels. Different models of printers may havedifferent feeding positions, feed in the labels to the correct position.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

l Requirements for the printed label

– All the printouts must be on the label, and nothing can be printed on the base page ofthe label.

– Contents in the cells must be in the center. In the case of a single-line printout, thedividing lines and the mark "TO" cannot be covered by the printed characters.

– When the cells are merged and the printouts are filled in multiple lines, do not coverthe mark TO. To avoid the print content and TO being overlapped, perform thefollowing: Press Space to have the characters printed on the next line.

Writing on Labelsl Writing tools

Use the black oil marker (excluding ball pens) delivered together with the products to writeon the labels.

If the black oil marker is unavailable, you can use the ball pen (not recommended). Do notleave any oil on the label. The oil may blur the words on labels.

NOTE

l The labels are made of waterproof and dampproof materials. Therefore, do not write on labelswith pens or boshes.

l The delivered marker has two nibs. Use the smaller nib to write the labels.

l Fonts

For the sake of easy recognition and nice appearance, the font in handwriting must be closeto the standard typeface (Times New Roman). Table C-1 lists the standard typeface.

Table C-1 Template of standard fonts

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 A B C D E F G H

I J K L M N O P Q

R S T U V W X Y Z

Write the characters in proper size.

l Writing direction

Figure C-4 shows the writing direction of the contents on labels.

Figure C-4 Writing direction

1 06

TO:

A01 2 A

005 B0215



C-5

Affixing LabelsAfter printing or writing the label, remove it from the base page, and then affix it to the cables.The following describes two methods for affixing the labels.

l Labels for power cablesRemove the label from the base page, and then affix it onto the concave on one side of theidentification plate. The labels are affixed to the same direction in one equipment room.The cable tie is fastened 2 cm [0.8 in.] from the connectors, and other positions are allowedin special circumstances.Cable ties must be fastened on both ends of a cable. After the cables are bound, the finishedidentification plate must be on top of the cable in horizontal cabling, or on the right side ofthe cable in vertical cabling. Make sure that the labels face outward in horizontal cabling.Refer to Figure C-5.

Figure C-5 Appearance of the affixed label on the power cable

Cable

TO:

B03 -48V2

CableTO:B03 -48V2

l Labels for signal cables

After the labels are affixed on the cables, the narrow part must be on bottom of the cablein horizontal cabling, or on the right side of the cable in vertical cabling. Refer to FigureC-6.

Figure C-6 Appearance of the affixed label on the signal cable

Cable

TO:A03 3333 33 33

TO:

A0333

3333

33

Cable


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

To affix the labels, perform the following steps:

1. Determine the proper position on the cable to affix the label.By default, the labels are stuck 2 cm [0.8 in.] from the connector. In special cases, toavoid cable bent or affecting other cables, other positions are allowed to affix thelabels. Labels must be stuck on both ends of the cables.Refer to Figure C-7 to determine the position for labels and cables. Determine thelabel direction based on the cable position. Make sure that the labels are stuck in order.

Figure C-7 Affixing the label onto proper position of the cable

Stick side

Fold down

CableFold to right

Cable

Stick side

2. Fold part of the label

Fold part of the label, and then affix the label. Make sure that the affixing side is inthe middle of the cable. The direction varies depending on the cables. Figure C-8shows the appearance after the labels are folded.

Figure C-8 Folding up the label

Cable

Fold up

Fold to right

Cable

Stick side

Stick side

Figure C-6 shows the appearance of affixed labels on cables.

Information on Labelsl Label contents for power cables

Labels for power cables are only affixed on one side of the identification plates. On thelabels, there is information (the part after the mark TO:) about the locations of the devices



C-7

on the other end of the cable, such as peer device, control cabinet, distribution box or powersocket.

l Label contents for signal cablesThe two sides of the label affixed on the signal cable carry information about the positionof the ports connected to both ends of the cable. (For the cable with multiple ends, affixthe labels based on actual conditions.) The content on the labels at two ends of the cable(excluding the alarm external cable) are the same. For the alarm external cable, the labelonly needs to be affixed on the first cabinet of each row to identify the device to which theaccess terminal is connected.Write on the labels according to the following requirements. Refer to Figure C-9.– Area 1 contains the location information of local end of the cable.

– Area 2 (with the mark TO:) contains the location information of the opposite end of thecable.

– Area 3 is folded up inside the label when the label is affixed.

Figure C-9 Labels for signal cables

TO:

31

2

AreaArea

Area

Seen from the cabling end of the device, the text part of the label is on the right side of thecable. The side with TO: that is facing outside carries the location information of theopposite end; and the other side carries the location information of the local end. Thus, theinformation in Area 1 at one end is the same as the information in Area 2 at the other endof the cable. In other words, the local information at one end is called the oppositeinformation at the other end.

Precautionsl When printing/writing and affixing labels, keep the labels clean.

l Do not affix the labels at the bent part of the cable or other positions that affect the cableconnection. Affix the labels around 20 mm [0.79 in.] from the connector.

l If the desired label positions collide with the main and subordinate labels, affix theengineering labels at proper positions.

l Labels must be affixed with good order in alignment.

l Cable ties must be bundled in the same position of power cables, with identification plateson the same side.

l The cabinet No. (excluding cabinet row No.), frame No. board No., and cable No. aredenoted in two digits, from 01 to 99, if they are less than 100. If not, they are denoted infull numbers.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

C.2 Engineering Labels for External Cables of Alarm BoxesThis describes the position of external cables of alarm boxes, requirements for affixing theengineering label, label contents, and examples.

The external cables of alarm box are connected with the first subscriber cabinet of each row(used for power distribution). Labels affixed on the first subscriber cabinet of each row indicatewhich device uses the access terminal. Labels are not needed on the device side if there is nospecial requirement. In this case, only area 2 of the label is filled in. When affixing the labels,make sure that this side faces outside. (If there is special requirement on affixing direction, usea proper method accordingly.)

Table C-2 lists the content of the labels on the external cables of the alarm box.

Table C-2 Content of labels on the external cable of the alarm box

Content Meaning Example

MN Cabinet number M: The cabinet rows from front to back are numberedfrom A to Z.N: The cabinet columns from left to right arenumbered from 01 to 99.For example, A01 indicates a cabinet in row A,column 01.

NOTE

MN refers to the No. of a specific cabinet. If cabinets are installed in a back-to-back manner, the facingdirection of the cabinet must be specified. In this case, MNO stands for the cabinet No. Here, O means thedirection of the cabinet, which can be A or B. The meaning of this item for other labels is the same, andthus, is not described.

The label on the alarm cable carries simple information, and only part of the text area needs tobe filled in. It is recommended to keep the whole length of the label instead of cutting out theblank area.

Figure C-10 shows a label on the alarm cable, on which A01 indicates that the alarm cable isconnected from the first cabinet to the cabinet in row A, column 01 in the equipment room.

Figure C-10 Example of the label on the alarm cable

TO:A01



C-9

C.3 Engineering Labels for Network CablesThis describes the applicable scope, content, meaning, and example of the engineering label ofthe network cable.

Applicable ScopeThe labels are suitable for the cable of network port on the board in the cabinet frame. The cablesare shielded/non-shielded standard network cables.

Label Contents and MeaningTable C-3 lists the content of labels affixed to the network cable of the board in the cabinetframe.

Table C-3 Content of labels on the network cable


MN-B-C-D MN: cabinet number For example, A01 refers to the first cabinet inrow A.

B: frame number Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits,for example, 01.

C: physical slotnumber

Numbered in top-down and left-right orderwith two digits, for example, 01.

D: Ethernet portnumber


MN-Z MN: cabinet number For example, B02 refers to the second cabinetin column B.

Z: location number Valid location number of the terminal deviceon site. If the cable is connected to a router ina cabinet, the serial numbers of the cabinet, theframe and the Ethernet interface of the routermust be specified, for example, B02-03-12. Ifthe cable is connected to the networkmanagement system (NMS), the location of theNMS must be specified.

ExamplesFigure C-11 shows the label examples.

Figure C-11 Example of the label on the network cable

A01

TO:

03 10 05

B020312


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

A01-03-10-05 indicates that one end of the Ethernet cable is connected with Ethernet port 05,slot 10, frame 03 of the cabinet in row A, column 01 in the equipment room.

B02-03- -12 indicates that the other end of the Ethernet cable is connected with Ethernet port12, frame 03 of the cabinet in row B, column 02 in the equipment room. No physical slot number.

C.4 Engineering Labels for Optical FibersThis describes the contents, meaning, examples of labels on optical fibers between the devicesas well as those between the devices and the optical distribution frames (ODFs).

These labels are affixed to the optical fibers that connect the optical interfaces on the boards ina frame, or on the device boxes. There are two types of labels for optical fibers. One is for thefiber that connects the optical interfaces on two devices. The other is for the fiber that connectsthe device and the ODF.

Labels for the Optical Fiber Connecting Two DevicesTable C-4 lists the content of the labels on the optical fiber that connects two devices.

Table C-4 Content of labels on the optical fiber between two devices


MN-B-C-D-R/T MN: cabinet number For example, A01 refers to the first cabinetin row A.

B: frame number Numbered in bottom-up order with twodigits, for example, 01.



D: optical interfacenumber


R: optical receivinginterfaceT: optical transmittinginterface

–

MN-B-C-D-R/T MN: cabinet number The meaning is the same as mentionedearlier. When the local device and the peerdevice are not in the same equipment room,MN can be the name of the equipment room.

B: frame number





C-11



Figure C-12 shows the label on the optical fiber between two devices.

Figure C-12 Example of the label on the optical fiber between two devices

A01 R

TO:

01 05 05

G01T 010101

A01-01-05-05-R indicates that the local end of the optical fiber is connected with opticalreceiving interface 05 on slot 5, frame 01 in the cabinet in row A, column 01 in the equipmentroom.

G01-01-01-01-T indicates that the other end of the optical fiber is connected with opticaltransmitting interface 01 on slot 01, frame 01 in the cabinet in row G, column 01 in the equipmentroom.

Labels for the Optical Fiber Connecting the Device and ODF

Table C-5 lists the content of the labels on the optical fiber that connects the device and opticaldistribution frame (ODF).

Table C-5 Content of labels on the optical fiber between the device and the ODF


MN-B-C-D-R/T MN: cabinet number For example, A01 refers to the first cabinetin row A.


C: physical slot number Numbered in top-down and left-rightorder with two digits, for example, 05.


Numbered in top-down and left-rightorder with two digits, for example, 05.


–


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)


ODF-MN-B-C MN: row number andcolumn number of ODF

M: The cabinet rows from front to back arenumbered from A to Z.N: The cabinet columns from left to rightare numbered from 01 to 99.For example, G01 indicates the ODF atrow G, column 01.

B: row number of theterminal device

Range from 01 to 99, for example, 01-01.

C: column number ofthe terminal device


–

Figure C-13 shows the label on the optical fiber between the device and the ODF.

Figure C-13 Example of the label on the optical fiber between the device and the ODF

ODF R

TO:

G01 01 01

A01R 010505

ODF-G01-01-01-R indicates that one end of the optical fiber is connected with the opticalreceiving terminal in row 01, column 01 of the ODF in row G, column 01 in the equipment room.

A01-01-05-05-R indicates that the other end of the optical fiber is connected with opticalreceiving interface 5 on slot 05, frame 01 in the cabinet in row A, column 01 in the equipmentroom.

C.5 Engineering Labels for Trunk CablesThis describes the contents, meaning, examples of labels on trunk cables between the devicesas well as those between the devices and the digital distribution frames (DDFs).

There are two types of labels for trunk cables.

l One type is used for the trunk cable connecting two devices, such as the trunk board andbuilt-in transmission unit, or two trunk boards. Labels are affixed at two ends of the cables,specifying the cable positions on the device or on the two trunk boards of the same device.

l The other type is used for connecting the device and the digital distribution frame (DDF).Labels are affixed at two ends of the cables, specifying the cable position on the device andthe DDF.



C-13

The trunk cables include 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 cables, and 120-ohm T1.

Labels for the Trunk Cable that Connects Two Devices

Table C-6 lists the content of the labels on the trunk cable that connects two devices.

Table C-6 Content of labels on the trunk cable between two devices


MN-B-C-D-R/T MN: cabinet number For example, G01.


D: cable number Numbered in top-down and left-right orderwith two digits, for example, 12.

R: receiving interfaceT: transmittinginterface

If multiple signals are integrated in onecable, the receiving/transmitting ends arenot specified.

MN-B-C-D-R/T The meaning is thesame as mentionedearlier.

When the local device and the peer deviceare not in the same equipment room, MNcan be the name of the equipment room.

Figure C-14 shows the label on the trunk cable between devices.

Figure C-14 Example of the label on the trunk cable between two devices

G01 T

TO:

01 05 12

D02R 010110

G01-01-05-12-T indicates that the local end of the trunk cable is connected with the transmittingterminal of trunk cable 12 on slot 05, frame 01 in the cabinet in row G, column 01 in theequipment room.

D02-01-01-10-R indicates that the other end of the trunk cable is connected with the receivingterminal of trunk cable 10 on slot 01, frame 01 in cabinet in row D, column 02 in the equipmentroom.

Labels for the Trunk Cable that Connects the Device and the DDF

Table C-7 lists the content of the labels on the trunk cable that connects the device and the digitaldistribution frame (DDF).


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Table C-7 Content of labels on the trunk cable between the device and the DDF


MN-B-C-D-R/T MN: cabinet number For example, A01.

B: frame number Numbered in bottom-up order with two digits,for example, 03.



D: cable number Numbered in top-down and left-right orderwith two digits, for example, 01.


If multiple signals are integrated in one cable,the receiving/transmitting ends are notspecified.

DDF-MN-B-C-D/R/T

MN: row number andcolumn number ofDDF

M: The cabinet rows from front to back arenumbered from A to Z.N: The cabinet columns from left to right arenumbered from 01 to 99.For example, G01 indicates the DDF in rowG, column 01.

B: row number of theterminal device

Range from 01 to 99, for example, 01-01.

C: column number ofthe terminal device

DDF-MN-B-C-D/R/T

D: direction A or B There is such a mark in DDF:A: indicating the DDF terminals areconnected to the optical network device.B: indicating the DDF terminals areconnected to the switching device.


R, T: If multiple signals are integrated in onecable, the receiving/transmitting ends must bespecified on each branch of the DDF. (If thereceiving/transmitting ends are specified onthe DDF, do not specify the receiving/transmitting ends again.)

Figure C-15 shows the label on the trunk cable between the device and the DDF.

Figure C-15 Example of the label on the trunk cable between the device and the DDF

A01 R

TO:

03 01 01

DDFAR G010101



C-15

A01-03-01-01-R indicates that local end of the trunk cable is connected with the receivingterminal of trunk cable 01 in slot 01, frame 03 of the cabinet in row A, column 01 in the equipmentroom.

DDF-G01-01-01-AR indicates that the other end of the trunk cable is connected with thereceiving terminal of direction A (connected to optical network device) in row 01, column 01of the DDF in row G and column 01 in the equipment room.

C.6 Engineering Labels for Power CablesThis describes the position, contents, and examples of AC power cables and DC power cables.

Labels for DC Power CablesThe labels are affixed to the DC cables, including the – 48 V, PGND, and BGND cables. Thelabels for DC power cables are affixed at two ends of the power cables. The DC power cablerefers to the power cable and the PGND cable.

The labels for DC power cables are affixed to one side of the identification plates on cable ties.Table C-8 lists the information on the labels for the DC power cables.

Table C-8 Content of labels on the DC power cables

Content Meaning

MN(BC) - –48 V1 MN(BC): BC is written right under MN.On the device cabinet side, only MN is used to identify the cabinet.On the power cabinet side, MN identifies the row and columnnumber of the power distribution device such as the control cabinetand distribution cabinet, BC identifies the row and column numberof the –48 V connecter (if there is no row number or column number,or the connecter can be identified without them, BC can be omitted).BGND and PGND have no row and column number foridentification.

MN(BC) - –48 V2

MN(BC) - BGND

MN(BC) - PGND

The label only carries location information about the opposite device, the control cabinet or thedistribution cabinet, while information of the local end is not necessary. Table C-8 lists theinformation of two –48 V power supplies on the label. The information for other DC voltages(such as 24 V, 60 V) must be given in similar ways. Make sure that labels are affixed in correctdirection. That is, after the cable ties are bundled onto the cable, the identification plates withthe labels must face outward. The text on the labels of the same cabinet must be in the samedirection. Refer to Figure C-16.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Figure C-16 Example of the labels on the DC power cables

(1) (2)

TO: A01 -48V2 B08

TO: B03 -48V2

(1) indicates the label at the cabinet side

(information about the position of the cable on thepower distribution cabinet)

(2) indicates the label at the distribution cabinet side

(information about the position of the cable on thecabinet side)

At the cabinet side, the label marked A01/B08- –48 V2 on the cable indicates that the cable is–48 V2 DC supply, which is from the eighth connecter on the second row of –48 V bus bar inthe cabinet in row A, and column 1 in the equipment room.

At the power distribution cabinet side, the label marked B03 - –48 V2 indicates that the cableis –48 V2 DC supply, which is from the device cabinet in row B, column 03 in the equipmentroom.

NOTE

l In the power distribution cabinet (or the first power cabinet of a row in the transmission equipmentroom), every terminal on the –48 V terminal block has a numeric identification, such as 08 in A01/B08- –48 V2 in the previous examples.

l PGND and BGND are copper bars, on which all the terminals are connected. In this case, it is onlynecessary to specify the row and column of the power distribution cabinet. For example, A01-BGNDmeans that the power cable is a BGND cable that connects to the BGND copper bar of the powerdistribution cabinet in row A, column 01 in the equipment room.

Labels for AC Power CablesThe labels are affixed to the AC cables, including the POWER, PGND, and BGND cables. Thelabels are affixed at two ends of AC power cable. The 220 V AC cables and related PGND andBGND cables are covered with insulating sheath. Therefore, the labels only need to contain thewords of AC and the cabinet number (similar to cables of 110 V or other voltages).

The labels for AC power cables are affixed to one side of the identification plates on cable ties.Table C-9 lists the content of the labels on the AC power cables.



C-17

Table C-9 Content of labels on the AC power cables

Content Meaning

MN-AC MN: serial number of the cabinet or the socket where the power is led in.Device cabinet side: Cabinet No.Power socket: The location of the socket is marked out according to onsitesituation. If the sockets can be identified by row number and columnnumber, they can be numbered following the same rule for the cabinets. Ifthe sockets cannot be identified by rows and columns, specify the detailedlocations to avoid confusing with other sockets.

The label only carries location information about the peer device and the power socket. Theinformation of the local end is not necessary. Make sure that labels are affixed in correctdirection. That is, after the cable ties are bundled onto the cable, the identification plates withthe labels must face outward, and the text on the labels of the same cabinet must be in the samedirection. Refer to Figure C-17.

Figure C-17 Example of the labels on the AC power cables

(1) (2)

TO: TO: A01 AC B01 AC

(1) indicates the label on the cabinet side

(information about the position of the cable on thepower distribution cabinet)

(2) indicates the label at the distribution cabinet side

(information about the position of the cable on thecabinet side)

At the cabinet side, the label marked A01-AC indicates that the power cable is connected to thesocket of row A column 01 in the equipment room.

At the power distribution cabinet side, the label marked B01-AC indicates that the power cableis connected to the cabinet in row B, column 01 in the equipment room.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

D Introduction to File System Directory

This describes the functions of the file system directory.

D.1 Introduction to the LMT File DirectoryThis describes the file structure and functions after the LMT is installed.

D.2 Introduction to BAM File DirectoryThis describes the BAM file structure and its functions.

D.3 Introduction to Configuration FilesThis describes the main version and board type in the configuration file minivercfg_fix.ini.

D.4 Introduction to Higher Layer Software of BoardsThis describes the higher layer software of the board, patch names, and functions.

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide D Introduction to File System Directory


D-1

D.1 Introduction to the LMT File DirectoryThis describes the file structure and functions after the LMT is installed.

This part introduces some useful directories in the LMT file directory such as log, alarminformation, data backup and help files.

It also describes some important system file directories, such as the directory of INI file (for theuser backup conveniently).

The format and meaning of some typical files are introduced here.

As the UMG8900 client software, the LMT implements configuration management, operationand maintenance, performance management, fault management and tracing function of theUMG8900.

The LMT adopts standard installation method. Table D-1 lists the directory structure after theLMT is installed ($ is directory of the LMT software installation).

Table D-1 Directory structure of the LMT files

Directory SecondDirectory

ThirdDirectory

Description

$\HW LMT – – All the files of the LMT.

– \adaptor – Executable files and correspondingsupportive files of the LMT relatedto the UMG8900.

\client – Executable files and correspondingsupportive files for the LMT Client.

\server – Executable files and correspondingsupportive files for the LMT Server.

\tray – Executable files, configuration filesneeded for start, dependentdynamic library and dependent jarpackets saved in the backgroundtray.

\uninstall – Configuration files needed wheninstalling LMT and used foruninstalling.

D.2 Introduction to BAM File DirectoryThis describes the BAM file structure and its functions.

Table D-2 lists the structure of the BAM file directory.

D Introduction to File System DirectoryHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide

D-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Table D-2 BAM file directory

Directory SecondaryDirectory

ThirdDirectory

Description

C:\BAM – – –

\alm – System alarm configuration files andalarm shield information

\bin – Application files

\new The latest application files of boards

\config – The UMG8900 software configurationtable files minivercfg_fix.ini and theconfiguration files of board loadingmode.

\data - Various data, such as alarm, log,performance, fault, and operation,which are saved respectively incorresponding sub-directories.

\cal Call log files

\hlm History alarm information

\hvt History event information

\mlm Shielded alarm information

\mvt Shielded event information

\olg Operation log information

\prf Performance data

\run Running log information

\sec Security log information duringsystem running

\slg System log information

\trc Tracing data

\tst Routine test information

\tlg Test log

\ini – System configuration ini files,including bam, command linenavigation tree, command executingreturning code and node returninginformation. Both Chinese andEnglish versions are available.

\chsf Chinese configuration files



D-3

Directory SecondaryDirectory

ThirdDirectory

Description

\engf English configuration files

license – System registration files

mml.txt – Configuration information saved inthe MML command format

phoneno.txt – Telephone numbers in StandALonemode

D.3 Introduction to Configuration FilesThis describes the main version and board type in the configuration file minivercfg_fix.ini.

When software is uploaded to the OMU, the configuration file minivercfg_fix.ini is used. Thefollowing part describes the main parameters of the file.

D.3.1 Description of Main VersionThis describes the parameters related to the software of main version in the configuration fileminivercfg_fix.ini.

D.3.2 Description of Board SoftwareThis describes the parameters related to the board software in the configuration fileminivercfg_fix.ini.

D.3.1 Description of Main VersionThis describes the parameters related to the software of main version in the configuration fileminivercfg_fix.ini.

Table D-3 lists the description of the main version.

Table D-3 Description of the main version

Parameter Description

MainVersion Level-1 main version of the UMG8900

BoardTypeCount Number of board service types

SysCfgFileCount Number of system configuration files

DataCfgFileCount Number of data configuration files

DirCount Number of directories

SysCfgFileNamen System configuration file n

DataCfgFileNamen Data configuration file n

DownLoadPath Path of software download file in the FTP server


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

D.3.2 Description of Board SoftwareThis describes the parameters related to the board software in the configuration fileminivercfg_fix.ini.

Table D-4 lists the description of board types.

Table D-4 Description of board type


PackName software package name of the board type

StandardPackVersion Standard version of the software package

FileCount Number of board files

LoadPriority Load priority

FileTagValidation1 Tag of file 1

FileTypeName1 Type of file 1

FrontBackLimit1 Limitations to the front and back boards described in file1. File 1, file 2, and file n are the files of the board. Eachfile corresponds to seven parameters. FrontBackLimitspecifies which board the file belongs to. For example, theboard in the front slot or the board in the back slot.

FrontHwLimit1 Limitations to the hardware type of the front boarddescribed in file 1

BackHwLimit1 Limitations to the hardware type of the back boarddescribed in file 1

FrontLcLimit1 Limitations to the logical type of the front board describedin file 1

BackLcLimit1 Limitations to the logical type of the back board describedin file 1

FrontHwVerLimit1 Limitations to the hardware version of the front boarddescribed in file 1

BackHwVerLimit1 Limitations to the hardware version of the back boarddescribed in file 1

FileName1 Name of file 1

FlashAddress1 Start address of the Flash described in file 1

FlashAddressLength1 Address length of the Flash described in file 1

StandardFileVersion1 Standard file 1 version under the main version

FileTagValidation2 Tag of file 2

FileTypeName2 Type of file 2



D-5


FrontBackLimit2 Limitations to the front and back boards described in file 2

FrontHwLimit2 Limitations to the hardware type of the front boarddescribed in file 2

BackHwLimit2 Limitations to the hardware type of the back boarddescribed in file 2

FrontLcLimit2 Limitations to the logical type of the front board describedin file 2

BackLcLimit2 Limitations to the logical type of the back board describedin file 2

FrontHwVerLimit2 Limitations to the hardware version of the front boarddescribed in file 2

BackHwVerLimit2 Limitations to the hardware version of the back boarddescribed in file 2

FileName2 Name of file 2

FlashAddress2 Start address of the Flash described in file 2

FlashAddressLength2 Address length of the Flash described in file 2

StandardFileVersion2 Standard file 2 version under the main version

FileTagValidationm Tag of file m

FileTypeNamem Type of file m

FrontBackLimitm Limitations to the front and back boards described in filem

FrontHwLimitm Limitations to the hardware type of front board describedin file m

BackHwLimitm Limitations to the hardware type of back board describedin file m

FrontLcLimitm Limitations to the logical type of front board described infile m

BackLcLimitm Limitations to the logical type of back board described infile m

FrontHwVerLimitm Limitations to the hardware version of front boarddescribed in file m

BackHwVerLimitm Limitations to the hardware version of back boarddescribed in file m

FileNamem Name of file m

FlashAddressm Start address of Flash described in file m


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)


FlashAddressLengthm Address length of Flash described in file m

StandardFileVersionm Standard file m version under the main version

D.4 Introduction to Higher Layer Software of BoardsThis describes the higher layer software of the board, patch names, and functions.

Table D-5 lists the names and functions of board higher layer software and patches of theUMG8900.

NOTE

The change of the software version on the boards may result in the version inconsistency with that of theactual high-layer software. Therefore, Table D-5 is listed just for reference.

Table D-5 Higher layer software of boards

BoardType

Board Software DynamicConfigurationSoftware Name

DefaultConfigurationSoftware Name

OMU Host software omd.vfs omd.vfs

Extended BootROM omd_ebootrom.bin omd_ebootrom.bin

Hard disk logic fomd_floodlogic.rbf fomd_floodlogic.rbf

VPU Host software mvpd_mini.vfs mvpd_mini.vfs

Basic voice file tonefile.arj tonefile.arj



D-7

E Requirements for Device RunningEnvironment

This describes the requirements for device running environment, including location andconstruction of equipment room, temperature and humidity, cleanness, erosive gas,electromagnetism, ESD-prevention, lightning protection, and power.

E.1 Requirements for Equipment Room LocationThis describes the requirements for equipment room location.

E.2 Requirements for Equipment Room ConstructionThis describes the requirements for equipment room construction.

E.3 Requirements for Temperature and HumidityThis describes the requirements for temperature and humidity, and the related measures.

E.4 Requirements for Indoor SanitationThis describes the requirements for cleanness of the equipment room and related measures.

E.5 Requirements for Erosive Gas ConditionThis describes the requirements for erosive gas condition, and related measures.

E.6 Requirements for Electromagnetic EnvironmentThis describes the requirements for electromagnetic environment of the equipment room andrelated measures.

E.7 Requirements for ESD PreventionThis describes the requirements for electrostatic discharge (ESD) prevention in the equipmentroom and related measures.

E.8 Requirements for Lightning Protection GroundingThis describes the requirements for lightning protection grounding.

E.9 Requirements for Power SupplyThis describes the requirements for DC power supply and AC power supply.

HUAWEI UMG8900Installation Guide E Requirements for Device Running Environment


E-1

E.1 Requirements for Equipment Room LocationThis describes the requirements for equipment room location.

The requirements for equipment room location are as follows:

l It is at least 5 km [3.1 mi] away from heavy pollution sources, such as the smeltery andcoal mine. The site is at least 3.7 km [2.3 mi] away from medium pollution sources, suchas the chemical, rubber and galvanization industries. The site is at least 2 km [1.2 mi.] awayfrom light pollution sources, such as a packinghouse and tan yard. If these pollution sourcescannot be avoided, the equipment room must be in the perennial upwind direction of thepollution sources. In addition, adopt a high-quality equipment room or anti-pollutiondevice.

l The air vent of the equipment room is away from the exhaust from the waste pipes, bigcesspools and sewage treatment tanks. The equipment room is kept in the positive pressurestate to prevent corrosive gases from entering the room and damaging components.

l The equipment room is away from industrial and heating boilers.

l The equipment room is located on the second floor or higher. If this requirement cannot bemet, the ground for device installation must be at least 600 mm [23.6 in.] higher than themaximum local flood stage.

l The equipment room is away from livestock farms. If this requirement cannot be met, theequipment room must be in the perennial upwind direction of the livestock farms.

l The equipment room is at least 3.7 km [2.3 mi] away from the seaside or salt lake. If thisrequirement cannot be met, the equipment room must be airtight and installed with an airconditioner for cooling purposes. In addition, the alkalized soil cannot be used as theconstruction material.

l Avoid using any original livestock room or fertilizer warehouses as the equipment room.

l The equipment room must be intact.

l The equipment room is away from dusty areas, such as polluted roads or sand fields. If thisrequirement cannot be met, the windows and doors of the equipment room must not facethe pollution source.

E.2 Requirements for Equipment Room ConstructionThis describes the requirements for equipment room construction.

Table E-1 lists the construction requirements for the equipment room.

Table E-1 Construction requirements for the equipment room

Item Specification

Area The equipment room can hold the UMG8900 with the dimension of2200 mm x 600 mm x 800 mm [87 in. x 24 in. x 32 in.].

Net height The indoor minimum height is the net height between the lowestpoint of the ceiling and the highest point of the floor. The net heightis not less than 3 m [9.8 ft.].

E Requirements for Device Running EnvironmentHUAWEI UMG8900

Installation Guide

E-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Item Specification

Indoor floor The floor is semi-conducting and dust-free. The ESD-preventivefloor must be paved. The floor blocks are paved securely. The errorper square meter is not more than 2 mm [0.08 in.]. If there is notraised floor, use static-conducing material (size to impedance ratiois 1.0 x 107 ohms – 1.0 x 1010 ohms). The static-conducting materialor raised floor is well connected to the grounding device throughcurrent-limiting impedance and connection cable. The current limitresistance is 1 megohm.

Floor load bearingcapacity

More than 600 kg/m2.

Door and window The door is 2 m high [6.6 in.] and 1 m [3.3 in.] wide. One door issufficient for the purpose. The door and window are sealed withdust-proof rubber tape. The windows are installed with double-layerglass and sealed.

Wall surface Wall paper or paint lusterless paint is allowed, but chalked paint isnot recommended.

Indoor groove Use grooves to arrange cables. The inner face of the groove issmooth. The reserved length and width of the groove, and number,position and dimensions of the holes comply with the requirementsfor the arrangement of the transmission device.

Water supply anddrainage

The power supply pipe, drainage pipe and rain pipe cannot passthrough the equipment room. The fire extinguisher is available in aneasily accessible place, such as the corridor or staircase, instead ofin the equipment room.

Partition in equipmentroom

The installation place is separated from the door of the equipmentroom. The partition panel helps prevent dust.

Air conditionerposition

The air conditioner is installed in the position where the air from theair conditioner is not directed at the device.

Other requirements In the equipment room, specific measures are taken to preventepiphyte and mildew, as well as rodent, such as mouse.



E-3

Figure E-1 Partition in the equipment room

Equipment

Air conditioner

Partition panel

E.3 Requirements for Temperature and HumidityThis describes the requirements for temperature and humidity, and the related measures.

Table E-2 lists the temperature and humidity requirement.

Table E-2 Requirements for temperature and humidity

Temperature Relative Humidity

Long term Short term Long term Short term

0℃ to 45℃ [32°F to113°F]

–5℃ to +55℃ [23°Fto 131°F]

5% to 85% 5% to 95%

NOTE

l The measurement points of temperature and humidity refer to the values measured 1.5 m [4.9 ft.] abovethe floor and 0.4 m [1.3 ft.] away from the front side of the cabinet when there are no protection panelsin the front and back of the cabinet.

l Short term means that the consecutive working duration is not more than 96 hours and that theaccumulated working duration of a year is not more than 15 days.

To meet the above requirements, note the following:

l Use a perennial temperature-control device irrespective of the local climate.

l In dry regions, dampen the ground regularly with a wet mop or use a humidifier to increasethe humidity in the equipment room.

l In damp regions, use a dehumidifier to lower the humidity.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

E.4 Requirements for Indoor SanitationThis describes the requirements for cleanness of the equipment room and related measures.

The equipment room must be free of explosive, conducting, permeability magnetic and corrosivedust. Table E-3 lists the dust particle limit in the equipment room.

Table E-3 Dust particle limit in the equipment room

Mechanically ActiveMaterial

Unit Content

Dust particle particle/m3 ≤3×104 (There is no visible duston desk within 3 days)

NOTE

Dust particle: diameter ≤ 5 μm


l Use dust-free materials on the floor, walls, and ceiling.

l Use a door screen and a window screen on the outside. Ensure that the windows are dust-proof.

l Clean the equipment room regularly, and clean the air filter once three months.

l Wear shoe covers and ESD-preventive clothes in the equipment room.

E.5 Requirements for Erosive Gas ConditionThis describes the requirements for erosive gas condition, and related measures.

Measures to prevent erosive gases, such as SO2, H2S, and NH3, must also be taken in theequipment room. Table E-4 lists the requirements on the density of erosive gases.

Table E-4 Erosive gas density limits

Chemically ActiveMaterial

Unit Content

SO2 mg/m3 ≤ 0.20

H2S mg/m3 ≤ 0.006

NH3 mg/m3 ≤ 0.05

Cl2 mg/m3 ≤ 0.01




E-5

l The equipment room must be far away from areas with high density erosive gases, such aschemical plants.

l The air inlet must be located against the direction of the pollution sources.

l The storage batteries must be placed in a separate room.

l Ensure that personnel from a professional company inspect the environment regularly.

E.6 Requirements for Electromagnetic EnvironmentThis describes the requirements for electromagnetic environment of the equipment room andrelated measures.

Table E-5 lists the electromagnetic requirement.

Table E-5 Electromagnetic range

Environment Electromagnetic Parameter

Low-frequency magneticfield

Frequency (Hz) 50 to 20 000

Ampl. A/m (rms) 10 to 0.025

Amplitude-modulationradio-frequency electricfield

Frequency (MHz) 0.009 to 1000

Ampl. V/m (rms) 3

Pulse-modulation radio-frequency electric field

Frequency (GHz) 1 to 20

Ampl. V/m (peak) 3

To suppress the interference signals, note the following:

l The equipment room must be away from transformers, high-voltage wires, and high-currentdevices. For example, the equipment room must be 20 m [66 ft.] away from ACtransformers, and 50 m [164 ft.] away from high-voltage wires.

l The equipment room must be away from a high-power broadcasting transmitter. Forexample, the equipment room must be 500 m [547 yd.] away from a high-powerbroadcasting transmitter.

l If there is a mobile communication transmitter installed in the communication building,the interference degree must comply with the relevant standards and regulations. Ifrequired, take measures to shield and isolate the interference.

l Do not use portable wireless devices in the equipment room.

E.7 Requirements for ESD PreventionThis describes the requirements for electrostatic discharge (ESD) prevention in the equipmentroom and related measures.

The absolute voltage of electrostatic must be less than 1000 V.



Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

l Popularize the knowledge of ESD prevention among the operators.

l Control the humidity in the equipment room to reduce the impact of static electricity.

l Lay ESD-preventive floor in the room. Wear antistatic shoes, uniforms, and wrist strapsbefore entering the room.

E.8 Requirements for Lightning Protection GroundingThis describes the requirements for lightning protection grounding.

Table E-6 lists the requirements for lightning protection grounding.

Table E-6 Lightning protection grounding requirements

Item Description

Building requirements The equipment building is of reinforced concrete structure.The equipment building is equipped with a lightning arresterThe ground for lightning arrester and the protection ground ofthe equipment room share the same group of grounding bodies.

AC power supply systemadopts TN-S power supply

The communication office has a dedicated power transformer.The power cables have metal bushing or insulation bushing, andare led in to the office through a metal pipe under ground. Themetal bushing or metal pipe is grounded at both ends. The lengthunder group is not less than 15 m [16.4 yd.].The three phase lines at the low-voltage side of the ACtransformer in the communication office have separate seamlesszinc oxide lightning protector. The shell of the transformer, theAC neutral line at the low-voltage side, and the metal bushingof the power cable connected to transformer shell are groundednearby.

Lightning protector forincoming power cable

Do not lead the AC or DC power cables overhead, either in orout or to/from the communication office.After low-voltage power cables are led into the equipment room,lightning protector is installed for the power cables in the ACvoltage regulator and AC switchboard, and the lightningprotector is grounded nearby.In the city, use a power lightning protector with nominaldischarge current of more than 20 kA. In the suburbs with morelightning dangers, use a power lightning protector with strikethrough-flow of more than 60 kA. In mountains or higherbuildings in the city, use a power lightning protector with strikethrough-flow of more than 100 kA.The length of grounding cable for power lightning protector isless than 1 m [3.3 ft.].



E-7

Item Description

DC power distributiongrounding

The DC working ground of the communication office (positiveof –48 V or negative of 24 V) is connected to the indoorgrounding bus nearby, and the grounding cable satisfies therequirements for the maximum load of the devices.The power supply devices for the communication office haveDC working grounding cable connected to the grounding bus inthe communication building or the protection grounding bar inthe equipment room.

Equipotential connection The communication devices and auxiliary devices, such asmobile base station, transmission device, switching device,power supply device, and digital distribution frame (DDF), arewell grounded. Their protection grounds are connected to thegrounding bar in the equipment room.The working ground and protection ground of thecommunication device in the equipment room share the sameground net.The cabling rack, suspension metal bracket, cabinet or shell,metal air vent and metal doors and windows are well grounded.

Grounding requirements Do not connect the neutral line of AC power cable to protectionground of the communication device.Do not use a fuse or switch on the grounding cables.All grounding cables are as short and straight as possible.

Grounding impedancerequirements

The grounding impedance of the grounding system isrecommended to be less than 10 ohms.The upper part of the grounding body is more than 0.7 m [2.3ft.] from the ground. In cold areas, the grounding body must beburied under frozen soil layer.Measure the grounding impedance regularly, to ensure thevalidity of grounding.

Signal cable layoutrequirements

In the communication office, signal cables are laid underground.The communication cables have metal bushing or are laid inmetal pipe when they are led in or out of the communicationoffice.The grounding cable for lightning protector is as short aspossible. Unused wires in the cables are well grounded in theequipment room.


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Item Description

Grounding busrequirement

The grounding bus can be realized in grounding ring mode orgrounding bar mode.The grounding cable must not be aluminum. When differentkinds of metals are connected, correct measures must be takento prevent couple corrosion.The grounding bus cable is made of copper bar with a sectionalarea of not less than 120 mm2 or zinc-coated steel with the sameimpedance. The grounding bus cable is insulated from the steelof the building.

Grounding lead-in cablerequirement

The grounding lead-in cable is not longer than 30 m [98.4 ft.].Use zinc-coated steel with sectional area of 40 mm x 4 mm [1.57in. x 0.16 in.] or 50 mm x 5 mm [1.96 in. x 0.2 in.] as the material.

E.9 Requirements for Power SupplyThis describes the requirements for DC power supply and AC power supply.

Requirements for AC Power SupplyAdopt the centralized AC power supply model of mains, uninterrupted power supply (UPS), anda reserved diesel generator.

Adopt three-phase and five-wire, or monophase three-wire AC power for low-voltage powersupply system. Table E-7 lists the nominal voltage and rated frequency of low-voltage AC powersupply system.

Table E-7 Specifications of AC voltage and frequency

Nominal Voltage Rated Frequency

10/127/220/380(V) 50 Hz

Adopt UPS for the backup AC power supply. Keep it on the same phase with the mains. Set theswitching time between mains and UPS to less than 10 ms. Otherwise, the device may rebootor reset.

Consider the working current and protection current when choosing the AC power supplycapacity. Ensure that one device has one AC power supply protection unit. When designing theDC power supply system, consider the maximum static and dynamic load of the system. Alwayskeep sufficient room for the two thresholds. Choose the model of the power cables based on themaximum load of power supply.

The power supply specifications of AC-powered device are as follows:

l Voltage fluctuation of communications device: –10% – +5% of rated voltage

l Voltage fluctuation of power supply device and important buildings:–15% - +10% of ratedvoltage

l Frequency fluctuation: –4% - +4%. Aberration rate of voltage sine wave: ≤ 5%



E-9

The diesel generator set of the office automatically functions in case of power failure,automatically supplies power when the mains is not enough, and automatically stops functioningwhen power is restored. It can be tested and controlled remotely in the standard interface andcommunication protocols.

The specifications of the power cables are as follows:

l Use the neutral line of the same cross-sectional area as the live line.

l Choose the DC power feeder on long-term load. The DC power feeder with the cross-section more than 95 mm2. Use the neutral line of the same cross-sectional area as the liveline.

l Use fire-resistant AC cables.

Suggestions on AC power supply are as follows:

l When the voltage of mains power supply is not stable, use the voltage regulator in any ofthe following conditions: Powered by mains, the voltage fluctuation of communicationsdevice exceeds the rated threshold (–10% – +5% of rated voltage). Powered by mains, thevoltage exceeds the rated voltage fluctuation of communications device. Not directlypowered by mains, the voltage fluctuation exceeds the rated threshold (–15% – +10% ofrated voltage). The voltage exceeds the rated AC voltage fluctuation of DC power supplydevice.

l Use UPS or inverter to prevent interruption or surge of power supply.

l Use a diesel generator set when the mains is faulty. The capacity of the generator set mustbe 1.5 to 2 times larger than that of the UPS.

l Two groups of storage batteries are designed in parallel. Use one group of UPS storagebatteries. The batteries can be working in parallel or serial connection. Use main inverterbased on the maximum power. Keep one backup available.

Requirements for DC Power Supply

The DC power supply of communication offices must be stable. Place the power device closeto the communication device to make the DC feeder as short as possible. Ensure that the loopvoltage from the battery port to the device port is lower than 3.2 V. This reduces the costs onpower consumption and installation.

When there are more than two switching systems, use two or multiple independent power supplysystems.

Set up multiple independent power supply systems for important communication centers. Eachpower system supplies power to the independent equipment room. In ordinary offices, usecentralized power supply room and a battery room or separate power supply. In small-capacityoffices, use centralized power supply mode. Keep the boards away from the erosive chemicalsdischarged from batteries.

Table E-8 lists the requirements for DC power supply.

Table E-8 DC power supply specifications

Item Specification

Voltage fluctuation of –48-V inputend

–40 V to –57 V


Installation Guide


Issue 02 (2009-01-09)

Item Specification

Voltage fluctuation of –60 V input end –51 V to –69 V

Anti-surge current capability At least 1.5 times greater than the rated load currentcapability

Voltage stability When the AC input voltage range is from 85% to110% of the rated value, and the load current is from5% to 100% of the rated value, the output voltage ofthe current stabilizer is an integral value between –56.4 V and –46.0 V. The variance is less than or equalto 1%.

Voltage surge at power-on and power-off

Less than or equal to ±5% of the integral value of DCoutput voltage

Peek-to-peek noise voltage ≤ 200 mV

Dynamic response The recovery time is less than 200 ms. The exceedingamount is less than or equal to ±5% of the integralvalue of DC output voltage.

Suggestions on DC power supply are as follows:

l Adopt the mode of separate power supply. Use multiple DC power supply systems and setpower device in multiple positions.

l Adopt the standard DC power supply system, and set the output voltage of thecommunications device to meet the required voltage range.

l Improve the reliability of the AC power supply system, and reduce the storage batteries.In small-capacity offices, add more storage batteries if it is difficult to enhance the reliabilityof the AC power supply system.

l The total capacity of the high-frequency switch rectifier must satisfy the power of thecommunication loading and battery charging. Set the backup rectifier modules. If there areless than 10 active modules, set one as backup module. If there are more than 10 activemodules, set one as backup module for every 10 active modules.

l Install the storage batteries in two or more groups. The capacity is determined by theduration in which the storage batteries supply power to the load. In most offices, thebatteries must be able to supply power for at least one hour.



E-11

00392311-Installation Guide(V100R007_02,Mini).pdf

Documents

Transcript of 00392311-Installation Guide(V100R007_02,Mini).pdf